2018 Quadrifoglio Owner's Manual

18GA-126-AC ALFA ROMEO GIULIA Third Edition ©2017 FCA US LLC. All Rights Reserved. Owner’s Manual ALFA ROMEO is a registered trademark of FCA Group Marketing S.p.A., used with permission. Printed in U.S.A. 2018 QUADRIFOGLIO OWNER’S MANUAL VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA This manual illustrates and describes the operation of With respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada, the name features and equipment that are either standard or op- INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING The antenna cable should be as short as practical and FCA US LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name tional on this vehicle. This manual may also include a EQUIPMENT routed away from the vehicle wiring when possible. Use FCA Canada Inc. used in substitution therefore. description of features and equipment that are no longer Special design considerations are incorporated into this only fully shielded coaxial cable. available or were not ordered on this vehicle. Please vehicle’s electronic system to provide immunity to radio DRIVING AND ALCOHOL Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio to disregard any features and equipment described in this frequency signals. Mobile two-way radios and telephone Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of ensure a low Standing Wave Ratio (SWR). accidents. manual that are not on this vehicle. equipment must be installed properly by trained person- nel. The following must be observed during installation. Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood FCA US LLC reserves the right to make changes in design normal may require special precautions. alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are and specifications, and/or make additions to or improve- The positive power connection should be made directly drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non- ments to its products without imposing any obligation to the battery and fused as close to the battery as possible. All installations should be checked for possible interfer- drinking driver, call a cab, a friend, or use public trans- upon itself to install them on products previously manu- The negative power connection should be made to body ence between the communications equipment and the portation. factured. sheet metal adjacent to the negative battery connection. vehicle’s electronic systems. This connection should not be fused. WARNING! Antennas for two-way radios should be mounted on the Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. roof or the rear area of the vehicle. Care should be used Your perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are in mounting antennas with magnet bases. Magnets may slower, and your judgment is impaired when you affect the accuracy or operation of the compass on have been drinking. Never drink and then drive. vehicles so equipped. Copyright © 2017 FCA US LLC DEAR CUSTOMER Dear Customer, We would like to congratulate and thank you for choosing Alfa Romeo. We have written this Owner’s Manual to help you get to know all of the features of your vehicle and use it in the best possible way. Please take the necessary time to familiarize yourself with all the dynamic features of your vehicle. Here you will find important information and warnings regarding the use of your vehicle, and how to achieve the best performance from the technical features of your Alfa Romeo. Youare advised to read through the Owner’s Manual before taking it on the road for the first time. It is important to become familiar with the controls of your vehicle, especially with sections concerning the brakes, handling, transmission, and vehicle behavior on different road surfaces. This Owner’s Manual also provides a description of special features and tips, as well as essential information for the safe driving, care, and maintenance of your Alfa Romeo over time. In the provided Warranty Booklet, you will also find a description of the services that Alfa Romeo offers to its customers. The New Vehicle Limited Warranty will detail the terms and conditions for maintaining its validity. We are sure that these will help you to get in touch with and appreciate both your new vehicle and the service provided by the people at Alfa Romeo. For questions or comments pertaining to your vehicle, please contact the Alfa Romeo Customer Care Center: P.O.Box 21–8004 Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004 Phone: 1-844-Alfa-USA (1-844-253-2872) READ THIS CAREFULLY

Refueling Do not use fuel containing methanol or ethanol E85. Using these mixtures may cause misfiring and driving issues, as well as damage vital components of the supply system. For further details on the use of the correct fuel, see the "Fuel Requirements" paragraph in the "Technical Specifications" chapter.

Starting The Engine

Make sure that the electric park brake is engaged and that the transmission is in PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N). Next, press the brake pedal, and then push the engine START/STOP button.

Parking On Flammable Material

The catalytic converter develops high temperatures during operation. Do not park the vehicle on grass, dry leaves, pine needles or other flammable material: fire hazard.

Respecting The Environment

The vehicle is fitted with a system that carries out a continuous diagnosis of the emission-related components in order to help protect the environment.

Electrical Accessories

If you decide to add electrical accessories after purchasing the vehicle, (with the risk of gradually draining the battery), contact your authorized dealer. They can calculate the overall electrical requirement and check that the vehicle's electric system can support the required load.

Scheduled Servicing

Correctly performed maintenance procedures are essential for ensuring that your vehicle continuously maintains its quality in performance and safety features, environmental friendliness, and low running costs. VEHICLE CHANGES / ALTERATIONS Accessories Purchased By The Owner

Warning!

Any change or alteration of the vehicle might seriously affect its safety and road handling, thus causing accidents, in which the occupants could even be fatally injured.

If you decide to install electrical accessories that require a permanent electrical supply (e.g. radio, satellite anti-theft system, etc.) or accessories that in any case drain the electrical supply after purchasing the vehicle, contact your authorized dealer. Dealer personnel will check whether the vehicles's electrical system is able to withstand the load required or whether it needs to be integrated with a more powerful battery. Note: Use caution when adding additional spoilers, alloy wheel rims, or non-standard wheel hubs: they could reduce the ventilation of the brakes and affect efficiency under sharp and repeated braking, or on long descents. Make sure that nothing obstructs the pedals (mats, etc.). FCA US LLC shall not be liable for damage caused by the installation of accessories either not supplied or recommended by FCA US LLC and/or not installed in compliance with the provided instructions. Installing Electrical/Electronic Devices FCA US LLC authorizes the installation of transceivers provided that installation is carried out at a specialized center, in compliance with manufacturer's specifications. Note: Local authorities may not allow the vehicle on the road if devices that modify the features of the vehicle have been installed. This also may void the warranty in relation to faults caused by the change either directly or indirectly related to it. FCA US LLC shall not be liable for damage caused by the installation of accessories either not supplied or recommended by FCA US LLC and/or not installed in compliance with the provided instructions. Radio Transmitters And Mobile Phones Radio transmitter equipment (vehicle mobile phones, CB (Citizen Band) radios, amateur radio etc.) cannot be used inside the vehicle unless a separate antenna is mounted externally. Transmission and reception of these devices may be affected by the shielding effect of the vehicle body. As far as the use of approved mobile phones is concerned, follow the usage instructions provided by the mobile phone Manufacturer.

Caution!

The use of these devices inside the passenger compartment (without an external antenna) may cause the electrical systems to malfunction. This could compromise the safety of the vehicle in addition to constituting a potential hazard for passengers' health. If mobile phones/laptops/smartphones/tablets are inside the vehicle and/or close to the electronic key, a reduced performance of the Passive Entry/Keyless Start system may occur may occur. HOWTO USE THIS MANUAL Operating Instructions Each time an instruction is given that concerns direction (left/right or forward/backward), it is written to be read from the perspective of an occupant in the driver's seat. If a direction is written from a different perspective, it will be specified as such in the text as appropriate. The figures in the manual are only examples: this might imply that some details of the image do not correspond to the actual arrangement of your vehicle. To identify the chapter with the information necessary, you can consult the index at the end of this manual. Chapters can be rapidly identified with dedicated graphic tabs, located at the side of each odd page. There is also a key for getting to know the chapter order and the relevant symbols in the tabs. Additionally, there is a textual indication of each current chapter at the side of each even page. Warnings And Cautions While reading this Owner’s Manual you will find a series of WARNINGS that must be carefully followed to prevent incorrect use of the components of the vehicle, which could cause accidents or injuries. There are also CAUTIONS to prevent procedures that could damage your vehicle. Therefore all WARNINGS and CAUTIONS must always be carefully followed. WARNINGS and CAUTIONS are recalled in the text with the following symbols: Personal Safety: Vehicle Safety: Note: This Owner’s Manual describes the Quadrifoglio model. Optional contents, including equipment meant for specific Markets or particular models, are not identified as such in the text: you need to consider only the information related to the model you own. Any content introduced throughout the production of the model, outside of the specific request of options at the time of purchase, will be identified with the wording (if-equipped). All data contained in this publication is intended to help you use your vehicle in the best possible way. FCA US LLC aims at a constant improvement of the vehicles produced. For this reason, it reserves the right to make changes to the model described for technical and/or commercial reasons. For further information, contact your authorized dealer. Symbols Some car components have colored labels with symbols indicating precautions to be observed when using this component. It is important to follow all warnings when operating your vehicle. See below for a brief description of each symbol.

IT CAN START READ THE OWNER DO NOTTOUCH WITH AUTOMATICALLYALSO HANDBOOK HANDS WITH ENGINE OFF

DO NOT OPEN THE CAP DO NOT OPEN: HIGH PROTECT YOUR EYES WHEN THE ENGINE IS PRESSURE GAS HOT

MOVING PARTS KEEP PARTS KEEP CHILDREN ATA BURSTING OF YOUR BODY AND DISTANCE CLOTHES AWAY

DO NOT APPROACH CORROSIVE LIQUID HIGH VOLTAGE FLAMES GRAPHICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

SAFETY

STARTING AND OPERATING

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE

INDEX This page is intentionally left blank GRAPHICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS

FRONT VIEW

03016S0002EM Front View 1 — Headlights 4 — Doors 2 — Tires And Wheels 5 — Engine Compartment 3 — Exterior Mirrors 6 — Windshield

9 REAR VIEW

03026S0002EM Rear View 1 — Tail Lights 2 — Trunk Lid

10 INSTRUMENT PANEL

03036S0050EM Instrument Panel 1 — Headlight Switch 5 — Instrument Cluster 9 — Climate Control System 2 — Air Vents 6 — Steering Wheel 10 — Glove Compartment 3 — Multifunction Stalk 7 — Windshield Wiper Stalk 11 — Passenger-Side Air Bag 4 — Controls On Steering Wheel 8 — Information And Entertainment System

11 VEHICLE INTERIOR

03046S0001EM Vehicle Interior 1 — Driver Seat 4 — Hazard Warning Lights 2 — Power Windows/Power Mirrors Controls 5 — Alfa DNA Pro Drive Mode System 3 — Gear Selector/Paddle Shifter — If Equipped

12 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

In this section, you will find important KEYS...... 14 information to help you become familiar IGNITION SYSTEM ...... 16 with the features needed to operate your ENGINE IMMOBILIZER ...... 18 vehicle, and how they function. SECURITY ALARM SYSTEM ...... 19 DOORS...... 20 SEATS...... 25 HEAD RESTRAINTS ...... 28 STEERING WHEEL ...... 30 MIRRORS ...... 31 EXTERIOR LIGHTS ...... 32 INTERIOR LIGHTS ...... 35 WINDSHIELD WIPERS ...... 37 CLIMATE CONTROL ...... 39 POWERWINDOWS...... 46 HOOD...... 47 TRUNK ...... 48 INTERNAL EQUIPMENT ...... 50 ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION SYSTEMS...... 54 ACTIVE AERODYNAMICS ...... 54

13 KEYS panic alarm will remain active for three Operation minutes, and can be deactivated: Key Fob Door And Trunk Lid Unlock By pushing the PANIC button again. Yourvehicle uses a keyless ignition Briefly pushing the unlock button on the system. This system includes a key fob Automatically if the vehicle speed key fob will unlock the doors and trunk and a keyless push button ignition. exceeds 5 mph (8 km/h). lid, turn on the interior lights, and flash the turn signals once (if activated from The Remote Keyless Entry key fob allows In both cases, the panic alarm is the Information and Entertainment you to lock or unlock the doors and trunk immediately deactivated. System). or activate the Panic Alarm from distances. The key fob does not need to Push and release the unlock button on the be pointed at the vehicle to activate the Warning! key fob once to unlock the driver side system. front door or twice within one second to unlock all doors and the trunk lid. Before exiting a vehicle, always shift the automatic transmission into PARK, apply The current unlock setting can be the parking brake, turn the engine OFF, changed through the Information and remove the key fob from the vehicle and Entertainment System menu, so that the lock your vehicle. system unlocks: Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or All doors unlock on the first push of with access to an unlocked vehicle. the key fob unlock button. Allowing children to be in a vehicle Unlock the driver door on the first GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE unattended is dangerous for a number of push of the key fob unlock button. reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned Flashing of the turn signals upon 04016S0001EM not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal locking/unlocking the doors and Key Fob or the gear selector. activation of the courtesy light upon PANIC Function Do not leave the key fob in or near the unlocking the doors can be activated or The key fob contains a PANIC button. vehicle, or in a location accessible to deactivated through the Information and Should you ever feel threatened, push children. A child could operate power Entertainment System. For further this button and the vehicle security alarm windows, other controls, or move the information, refer to the Information and will sound. vehicle. Entertainment System Owner’s Manual To activate the PANIC function, push and Do not leave children or animals inside Supplement. hold the PANIC button for at least one parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat The doors can also be unlocked by using second. When the panic alarm is active, build-up may cause serious injury or death. the emergency key, located inside the the headlights turn on, the turn signals key fob. flash, the horn honks intermittently, and all interior adjustable lights turn on. The 14 Door And Trunk Lid Lock Pushing the lock or unlock button again Briefly pushing the lock button on the key will restart the lights turn on timer (if the fob will lock the doors and trunk lid, turn parking lights functions were already off the interior lights, and flash the turn active, it will remain active). signals (if activated in the Information This function is available only if the doors and Entertainment System). are closed. If one or more doors are open, these Replacing The Electronic Key Fob doors will also lock, and this is indicated Battery by a rapid flashing of the turn signals. The doors prepare for locking, which To replace the battery, proceed as follows: becomes active from the moment they 04016S0003EM are closed. The doors will unlock again 1. Push the sides of the key fob inward Removing Emergency Key only if the key fob is detected inside the and extract the cover pulling downwards. passenger compartment. 3. Remove the battery plug by rotating it counter clockwise. The doors can be locked by using the emergency key in the driver’s side door lock. Trunk Lid Opening Rapidly push the trunk lid key fob button twice to open the trunk lid. The turn signals will flash to indicate that the trunk lid has been opened. Remote Start

The remote start button on the key fob 04016S0002EM enables engine starting (push the button Key Fob Cover Removal 04016S0004EM twice within five seconds to start the Removing Battery Plug engine). 2. Remove the emergency key from its housing. Car Finder 4. Remove the battery from its slot and replace it with a new one of the same Push the lock or unlock button to type. remotely and temporarily turn on the turn signals and headlights. This is useful for finding the vehicle easily in a crowded area like a parking garage, for example. 15 Duplicating Keys IGNITION SYSTEM If you need a replacement key fob, go to Operation an authorized dealer. To activate the keyless ignition, the key General Information fob must be inside the passenger The following regulatory statement compartment. applies to all Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle: This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and with Industry Canada

04016S0005EM license-exempt RSS standard(s). Battery Location Operation is subject to the following two conditions: Proceed in reverse order to reassemble the key. 1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and Caution! 2. This device must accept any 04026S0001EM interference received, including Keyless Ignition START/STOP Button interference that may cause undesired The battery replacement operation must be operation. The keyless ignition has the following done with care, in order not to damage the

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE modes: electronic key. Note: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party STOP: engine off, steering locked. responsible for compliance could void the Some electrical devices (e.g. central door Request For Additional Keys user’s authority to operate the locking system, alarm, etc.) are still The system can recognize up to eight key equipment. available. fobs with remote control. ON: all electrical devices are available. To guarantee that the engine starts and This state can be entered by pushing the the vehicle operates correctly, use only ignition button once, without pressing the electronic key fobs specifically coded for brake pedal. the vehicle’s electronics. AVV: engine starting. This state can be If an electronic key fob is coded for a entered by pushing the ignition button vehicle, it cannot be used on any other once while pressing the brake pedal. vehicle.

16 Note: touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the Starting With A Discharged Key Fob Battery With the keyless ignition in the ON transmission gear selector. position: if 30 minutes pass with the Do not leave the key fob in or near the If the key fob battery is discharged, gear selector in P (Park) and the engine vehicle, (or in a location accessible to proceed as follows to start the vehicle: stopped, the keyless ignition will children), and do not leave the ignition in the automatically reset to the STOP AVVor ON/RUN mode. A child could operate 1. Lift the front armrest. position. power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle. 2. Lay the key fob on the key fob outline With the engine started, it is possible found on the floor of the armrest Be sure the parking brake is fully to remove the key fob from the vehicle. compartment while pushing the disengaged before driving; failure to do so START/STOP button to start the ignition. The engine will remain running and the can lead to brake failure and a collision. instrument cluster will indicate the absence of the key fob when the door is Always fully apply the parking brake when closed. leaving your vehicle, or it may roll and cause damage or injury. Also be certain to leave For more information on the engine the transmission in PARK. Failure to do so start-up, refer to "Starting The Engine" in may allow the vehicle to roll and cause "Starting And Operating." damage or injury. Driving the vehicle with the parking brake engaged, or repeated use of the parking Warning! brake to slow the vehicle may cause serious damage to the brake system.

04026S0002EM Never use the PARK position as a Key Fob Placement Location substitute for the parking brake. Always Caution! apply the parking brake fully when parked to guard against vehicle movement and possible injury or damage. If the Brake System Warning Light remains When exiting the vehicle, always make on with the parking brake released, a brake sure the ignition is in the OFF mode, remove system malfunction is indicated. Have the the key fob from the vehicle, and lock your brake system serviced by an authorized vehicle. dealer immediately. Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to 17 General Information ENGINE IMMOBILIZER possible to start the engine, contact an authorized dealer. The following regulatory statement Engine Immobilizer Operation applies to all Radio Frequency (RF) If the Engine Immobilizer Failure/ devices equipped in this vehicle: The Engine Immobilizer system prevents Break-in Attempt icon is displayed unauthorized use of the vehicle by while driving, this means that the system This device complies with Part 15 of the disabling engine starting. is running a self-diagnosis (e.g. due to a FCC Rules and with Industry Canada voltage drop). If the display persists, license-exempt RSS standard(s). The system does not need to be enabled contact an authorized dealer. Operation is subject to the following two or activated. Operation of the immobilizer is automatic whether the conditions: Note: vehicle's doors are locked or unlocked. 1. This device may not cause harmful When the ignition is set to ON, the Engine Do not tamper with the Engine interference, and Immobilizer system identifies the code Immobilizer system. Any modifications transmitted by the key. If the code is or alterations could cause the protection 2. This device must accept any function to be deactivated. interference received, including recognized as valid, the Engine interference that may cause undesired Immobilizer system enables engine The Engine Immobilizer system is not operation. starting. compatible with certain aftermarket When the ignition is brought back to remote starting systems. The use of Note: Changes or modifications not STOP,the Engine Immobilizer system these devices could cause problems expressly approved by the party deactivates the control unit controlling when starting, as well as the responsible for compliance could void the the engine, disabling engine starting. deactivation of the protection function.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE user’s authority to operate the equipment. For the correct engine starting All keys provided with the vehicle procedures, refer to “Starting The have been programmed in accordance Engine” in “Starting And Operating.” with the electronics on the vehicle itself. Irregular Operation Each key has its own code which must If the key code is not recognized during be stored by the system's control unit. starting, the Engine Immobilizer Contact an authorized dealer to have Failure/Break-in Attempt icon is new keys (up to eight) stored with a displayed on the instrument panel (refer code. to "Warning Lights And Messages" in "Getting To Know YourInstrument Panel"). This condition leads to the engine turning off after two seconds. In this case, switch the ignition to STOP and then to ON; if it is still blocked, try with the other keys provided. If it is still not 18 SECURITY ALARM SYSTEM the doors, hood, and trunk lid are closed correctly and then rearm the system by Alarm Activation pushing the lock button on the key fob. While armed, the alarm will sound in the If the alarm emits an acoustic signal even following scenarios: when the doors, hood, and trunk lid are Opening of doors/hood/trunk lid correctly closed, a fault has occurred in (perimeter protection) system operation. In this case, contact an authorized dealer. Operation of ignition with a key which is not validated To Disarm The Alarm Push the unlock button to disarm the Cutting of the battery cables 04056S0003EM Passive Entry Door Handle Button alarm. While disarming, the following Movement inside the passenger operations are performed: compartment (volumetric protection — if When the alarm is armed, the warning equipped) lights on the panels of the interior front Two brief flashes of the turn signals (if door handles will flash. programmed) Unexpected lifting/tilting of the vehicle (anti-lift protection — if Two brief acoustic signals (if equipped) programmed) Activation of the alarm triggers the Doors are unlocked acoustic warning and the turn signals. The alarm can also be disarmed using the Note: The alarm system is activated by Passive Entry System, by grasping one of the Engine Immobilizer system, which is the Passive Entry front door handles with automatically activated when you get out a valid key fob in hand to unlock. For of the vehicle with the key fob and lock further information refer to "Passive the doors. Entry" in "Doors.”

To Arm The Alarm 04046S0001EM With the doors, hood, and trunk lid closed Lock/Unlock Buttons and the keyless ignition system placed in The activation of the alarm is preceded the STOP position, push and release the by a self-diagnosis stage: if a fault is lock button on the key fob. The alarm can detected, the system emits a further also be armed by pushing the Passive acoustic signal. Entry door handle button, located on the If a second acoustic signal is emitted exterior door handle. For further after the alarm is already armed, wait information, refer to "Passive Entry" about four seconds and disarm the alarm in "Doors.” by pushing the unlock button. Verify that 19 DOORS Locking And Unlocking Doors From The Inside If all doors are closed properly, they will automatically lock once the vehicle has exceeded approximately 12 mph (20 km/h) (“Auto Relock” function active). Push the interior lock button on the driver or passenger side door panel trim to lock

04056S0003EM 04046S0002EM the doors. Passive Entry Door Handle Button Volumetric/Anti-Lift Protection Button With doors locked, push the unlock button on the interior trim panel to Note: The alarm does not disarm when Any disabling of the Volumetric/Anti-Lift unlock the doors. the doors are unlocked by inserting the Protection must be repeated each time blade of the emergency key, found inside the instrument panel is switched off. Note: The key fob may not be found if it the key fob, into the door handle lock is located next to a mobile phone, lap top To Disarm The Alarm Using Passive cylinder. or other electronic device; these devices Entry may block the key fob’s wireless signal. Volumetric/Anti-Lift Protection — If To completely deactivate the alarm (e.g. Equipped during a long period of vehicle inactivity), GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE To ensure the correct operation of the insert the blade of the emergency key, Volumetric/Anti-Lift Protection system, found inside the key fob, into the door completely close the side windows. handle lock cylinder and turn the To disable the function, push the emergency key to the right (clockwise) to Volumetric/Anti-Lift Protection button lock the door(s). before activating the alarm. When the function is disabled, this is indicated by the light on the Volumetric/Anti-Lift Protection button 04056S0001EM flashing for several seconds. Door Lock And Unlock Switch Panel

20 Passive Entry Warning! Caution! The Passive Entry system can identify the presence of a key fob near the doors and trunk lid. Do not leave children or animals inside An unlocked vehicle is an invitation. Always The system enables the doors and trunk parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat remove the key from the ignition and lock all lid to be locked or unlocked without build-up may cause serious injury or death. of the doors when leaving the vehicle pushing any button on the key fob. unattended. For personal security and safety in the The key fob is detected only after the event of a collision, lock the vehicle doors as system recognizes the presence of a you drive as well as when you park and leave Locking/Unlocking Doors From The hand on one of the front door handles. If the vehicle. Outside the detected key fob is valid, the doors Before exiting a vehicle, always shift the When locking the doors from the outside and the trunk lid are unlocked (refer to automatic transmission into PARK, apply the Information and Entertainment the parking brake, turn the engine OFF, with the doors closed, push the lock button on the key fob. System Owner’s Manual Supplement for remove the key fob from the vehicle and Passive Entry Settings). lock your vehicle. The door lock can be activated with all doors locked and the trunk lid open. When Note: The key fob may not be able to be Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or detected by the vehicle keyless-go with access to an unlocked vehicle. the lock button on the key fob is pushed, all locks are activated, including the open system if it is located next to a mobile Allowing children to be in a vehicle trunk lid. The trunk lid will be locked when phone, laptop or other electronic device; unattended is dangerous for a number of it is closed. these devices may block the key fob’s reasons. A child or others could be seriously wireless signal and prevent the or fatally injured. Children should be warned When unlocking the doors from the outside, push the unlock button on the key fob. keyless-go system from starting the not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal vehicle. or the gear selector. Locking/Unlocking Doors From The Grasping the handle of the driver's door Outside In An Emergency Do not leave the key fob in or near the unlocks the driver's side door, or all doors vehicle, or in a location accessible to If the battery is discharged or the key fob depending on the mode set using the children. A child could operate power is inoperable, you can lock or unlock the Information and Entertainment System windows, other controls, or move the doors from the outside by inserting the vehicle. (refer to the Information and blade of the emergency key, found inside Entertainment System Owner’s Manual the key fob, into the door handle lock Supplement for Passive Entry Settings). cylinder and turn the emergency key as follows. Note: If wearing gloves, or if it has rained and the door handle is wet, the activation Lock — Turn the emergency key to the sensitivity of the Passive Entry function right (clockwise) may be reduced, resulting in a longer reaction time. Unlock — Turn the emergency key to the left (counter clockwise) 21 Door Locking 2. Remove the emergency key from the To lock the doors, proceed as follows: key fob housing. 1. Make sure that you have the key fob 3. Insert the emergency key in the driver and are close to the driver’s or side door lock cylinder and turn it to the passenger’s side door handle. left (counter clockwise) to unlock the door. 2. Push the Passive Entry door handle button or the Passive Entry trunk lid button, which is located next to the exterior trunk lid release button. This will

lock all doors and the trunk lid. Door 04056S0005EM locking will activate the alarm as well. Exterior Trunk Lid Button Note: After pushing the Passive Entry door handle button, you must wait two seconds before the doors can be unlocked again using the passive entry door handle button. This feature makes it 04016S0002EM possible to check whether the vehicle has Emergency Key Release Buttons been locked correctly by pulling the door handle within two seconds. The doors will GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE not be unlocked again. The vehicle doors and trunk lid can be 04056S0003EM locked by pushing the lock button on the Passive Entry Door Handle Button key fob or on the interior door lock. Driver Side Door Emergency Opening If the key fob does not work, e.g. because its battery is discharged or the vehicle battery is discharged, the emergency key can be used to unlock the driver side door. 04016S0003EM Emergency Key To remove the emergency key from the key fob, proceed as follows: Note: 1. Push the sides of the key fob inward The emergency key blade is not and extract the cover pulling downwards. directional and can be inserted indifferently into the lock. 22 To avoid leaving the key fob inside While pulling the handle, do not push the the vehicle accidentally, the Passive door lock/unlock button on the handle. Entry function features an automatic door unlocking function. If one of the vehicle doors is open and the "door locking" button on the front door handles or lock button in the interior door lock switch panel is pushed, a check of the inside and outside of the vehicle for the presence of the key fob is made once all the open doors are closed. 04056S0005EM Exterior Trunk Lid Release Button 04056S0004EM Note: Do NOT Grab The Door Handle When Locking If the key fob is inadvertently forgotten inside of the trunk, and an If the key fob is detected inside the attempt is made to close it from outside, vehicle, the Passive Entry function the trunk lid will not lock. With the doors automatically unlocks all the vehicle locked, the trunk lid unlocked, and the doors and flashes the turn signals. key fob detected inside the vehicle, the If one or more key fobs are inside the trunk lid will unlock again and the lights passenger compartment, the lock button flash twice. 04056S0003EM on the key fob inside the passenger Passive Entry Door Handle Button compartment is temporarily disabled. Before driving, make sure the trunk lid is closed correctly. The vehicle will not unlock the doors if an unauthorized key fob has been detected Trunk Lid Lock close to the outside of the vehicle. The trunk lid of the vehicle may still be If the Passive Entry function is disabled locked by pushing the lock button on the using the Information and Entertainment key fob, pushing the door lock button on System, the protections to avoid the door handles, or pushing the lock accidentally leaving the key fob inside button on the interior door panel of the the vehicle are deactivated. vehicle. Trunk Lid Access On vehicles equipped with Passive Entry, Approaching the trunk lid with a valid key the trunk lid and the doors can be locked by pushing the button located near the 04056S0001EM fob, push the opening button to access Interior Lock Switch Panel the trunk lid. opening button of the trunk lid. 23 Note: Changes or modifications not Unlocking The Doors With A Discharged expressly approved by the party Battery responsible for compliance could void the Proceed as follows to unlock the doors if user’s authority to operate the the vehicle battery is discharged. equipment. Rear Doors And Passenger Door Child Safety Locks 1. With the doors unlocked insert the To provide a safer environment for small emergency key from the key fob or a flat children riding in the rear seats, the rear bladed screwdriver into the door lock doors are equipped with Child-Protection manual release lock cylinder. Door Lock system. 04056S0005EM Exterior Trunk Lid Button This device can be engaged only with the doors open. System Activation/Deactivation The Passive entry system can be activated or deactivated using the Information and Entertainment System. General Information The following regulatory statement

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE applies to all radio frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle: 04056S0008EM Door Lock Manual Release Lock This device complies with Part 15 of the Cylinder FCC Rules and with Industry Canada 04056S0007EM license-exempt RSS standard(s). Child Safety Lock Positions 2. Turn the manual release lock cylinder Operation is subject to the following two clockwise for the right door locks or conditions: Lock position: device locked (door counterclockwise for the left door locks. opened from exterior only) 1. This device may not cause harmful 3. Remove the key/screwdriver from the interference, and Unlock position: device unlocked (door manual release lock. may be opened from the inside) 2. This device must accept any Proceed in one of the following ways to The Child Safety Locks remain locked interference received, including realign the door lock device (only when even if the doors are unlocked. interference that may cause undesired the battery charge has been restored): Note: The rear doors cannot be opened operation. Push the lock button on the electronic from the inside when the Child Safety key Lock is engaged. 24 Push the unlock button on the door SEATS panel The front seats can be adjusted to ensure Unlock driver’s door lock with the maximum comfort for the occupants. emergency key When adjusting the driver’s seat, keep Operate the internal door handle the shoulders resting firmly against the backrest, and the wrists within reach of Note: For the rear doors, if the Child the top of the steering wheel. The driver Safety Locks are engaged, and the must also be able to fully press the brake previously described locking procedure is pedal. carried out, operating the internal handle will not open the door. Instead, it will only 04066S0002EM realign the lock release device. To open Warning! Manual Seat Adjustment the door, the outside handle must be used. The door central locking/unlocking 1 — Adjustment Lever buttons are not deactivated when the It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, 2 — Height Adjustment Button emergency lock is engaged. inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, 3 — Recline Lever people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed. Height Adjustment Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats Push the height adjustment button and seat belts. In a collision, people riding in upward or downward to obtain your these areas are more likely to be seriously desired height. injured or killed. Seatback Recline Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a To adjust the seatback, lift the recline seat and using a seat belt properly. lever located on the outboard side of the seat, lean back to the desired position Sparco Racing Seats — If Equipped and release the lever. To return the seatback, lift the lever, lean forward and Forward/Rearward Adjustment release the lever. The adjustment lever is at the front of the seat, near the floor. Pull the bar upward to move the seat forward or rearward. Release the bar once the seat is in the desired position. Using body pressure, move forward and rearward on the seat to be sure that the seat adjusters have latched. 25 Power Seats — If Equipped Seatback Recline The power seat switches are located on The angle of the seatback can be the outboard side of the seat near the adjusted forward or rearward. Push the floor. Use these switches to move the seatback switch in the desired direction, driver's seat up, down, forward, rearward, and the seat will move in the direction of or to recline the seatback. the switch. Release the switch when the desired position is reached. Power Lumbar The power lumbar switch is located on the outboard side of the power seat. Push the switch forward or rearward to 04066S0015EM increase or decrease the lumbar support. Seatback Width Adjustment Push the switch upward or downward to 4 — Power Adjustable Bolster Buttons raise or lower the lumbar support. 5 — Driver Memory Seat Buttons Height Adjustment The height of the seats can be adjusted 04066S0003EM Seat Cushion Extension — If Equipped Power Seat Adjustment up or down. Pull upward or push Lift the adjustment lever and push the downward on the seat switch, and the front of the cushion forward or backward 1 — Seat Adjustment seat will move in the direction of the to extend the cushion by a few inches GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 2 — Recline Adjustment switch. Release the switch when the (centimeters). 3 — Lumbar Adjustment desired position is reached. Seat Angle Adjustment (Tilting) The seat angle can be adjusted in four Caution! directions. Lift or push the front part of seat switch to move the front part of the seat in the corresponding direction. Do not place any article under a power seat Release the seat switch when the seat or impede its ability to move as it may cause has reached the desired position. damage to the seat controls. Seat travel may become limited if movement is stopped Power Bolster Adjustment by an obstruction in the seat's path. Push the power bolster adjustment 04066S0017EM buttons to regulate the width of the Seat Cushion Extension backrest through the lateral padding. Forward/Rearward Adjustment 6 — Adjustment Lever Push the seat switch forward or rearward to adjust to your desired position. 26 Driver Memory Seat slide under the seat belt, which could result A quick push of the heated seat button Storing and recalling can be done with the in serious injury or death. will select the heat levels in order of ignition in the ON mode, vehicle speed at highest to lowest. A fourth push of the 0 mph (0 km/h), and the driver’s side door Heated Seats — If Equipped button will turn the heated seat off. closed, or for three minutes after having Note: If your vehicle is equipped with The “minimum” setting is automatically opened the driver's side door. An audible deactivated once a certain period of time chime is heard to confirm a memory Sparco Racing Seats, they will not be profile is set or recalled. To set a memory equipped with the heated seat feature. has elapsed. This varies on a case-by-case basis, in accordance with profile, first adjust your seat (and power With the engine in the ON position, push the specific operating conditions. mirror position if desired) until you are in the driver or passenger heated seat the desired position. Then, push the button located on the instrument Rear Heated Seats memory button you want to assign the set position to for 1.5 seconds. When a panel. If equipped with rear heated seats, the new seat position is memorized, the controls can be found on the rear of the previously memorized position on the center console and will function the same same button is automatically as the front heated seat controls. overwritten. Recalling a memorized Note: To preserve the battery charge, position can also be done for approximately three minutes after the this function cannot be activated when doors are opened and for approximately the engine is off. one minute after the engine is stopped. To recall a memorized position, push the assigned button briefly. Warning!

Warning! 04066S0004EM1 Persons who are unable to feel pain to the Heated Seat Buttons skin because of advanced age, chronic Youcan select three heating levels: illness, diabetes, spinal cord injury, Adjusting a seat while driving may be medication, alcohol use, exhaustion or other dangerous. Moving a seat while driving Maximum — three orange indicators physical condition must exercise care when could result in loss of control which could illuminated on the buttons. using the seat heater. It may cause burns cause a collision and serious injury or death. even at low temperatures, especially if used Average — two orange indicators for long periods of time. Seats should be adjusted before fastening illuminated on the buttons. the seat belts and while the vehicle is parked. Do not place anything on the seat or Serious injury or death could result from a Minimum — one orange indicator seatback that insulates against heat, such poorly adjusted seat belt. illuminated on the buttons. as a blanket or cushion. This may cause the seat heater to overheat. Sitting in a seat Do not ride with the seatback reclined so After selecting a heating level, heat will that has been overheated could cause that the shoulder belt is no longer resting be felt within a few minutes. serious burns due to the increased surface against your chest. In a collision you could temperature of the seat. 27 Rear Seats HEAD RESTRAINTS The non-adjustable head restraints The rear seats allow for three consist of a trimmed foam covering over Head restraints are designed to reduce the upper structure of the seatbacks and passengers. the risk of injury by restricting head Note: Because the rear seat is designed are intended to help protect you and the movement in the event of a rear impact. passenger from neck injury. as a 4+1 seat, the middle seat is of Head restraints should be adjusted so limited use. It is recommended that this that the top of the head restraint is Adjust the seatbacks to their upright, seat only be used by a person who can located above the top of your ear. on-road positions so that the head use the backrest as a substitute for the restraint is positioned as close as head restraint. possible to the back of your head. Warning! Front Head Restraints (Adjustments) — If Equipped

A loose head restraint thrown forward in The front head restraints may be a collision or hard stop could cause serious height-adjustable. To adjust them, injury or death to occupants of the vehicle. operate as follows: Always securely stow removed head restraints in a location outside the occupant Upward adjustment: Raise the head compartment. restraint until it clicks into place. ALL the head restraints MUST be Downward adjustment: Push the reinstalled in the vehicle to properly protect adjustment button and push downward 04066S0006EM the occupants. Follow the re-installation on the head restraint to lower. GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE Rear Seat instructions above prior to operating the vehicle or occupying a seat. The seats and the seatbelts are considered as components of the Do not place items over the top of the Warning! protection system for the vehicle's Reactive Head Restraint, such as coats, seat covers or portable DVD players. These occupants. items may interfere with the operation of All occupants, including the driver, should Note: Refer to the "Seat Belt Systems" the Reactive Head Restraint in the event of not operate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s seat in "Safety" for further information. a collision and could result in serious injury until the head restraints are placed in their or death. proper positions in order to minimize the risk of neck injury in the event of a crash. Sparco Racing Seat Head Restraints — Head restraints should never be adjusted If Equipped while the vehicle is in motion. Driving a vehicle with the head restraints improperly Yourvehicle may be equipped with adjusted or removed could cause serious non-adjustable head restraints on the injury or death in the event of a collision. driver's and passenger's seatbacks. 28 Note: To allow maximum visibility for the To reinstall the head restraints, proceed driver, if the head restraints are not in as follows: use, lower the head restraint all the way. 1. Hold down both the adjustment Rear Head Restraints (Adjustments) button and release button while placing the head restraint post into the holes.

Warning! 2. Then, reposition the head restraint to the appropriate height for the passengers. All occupants, including the driver, should not operate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s seat until the head restraints are placed in their 04076S0002EM Warning! proper positions in order to minimize the Rear Head Restraint risk of neck injury in the event of a crash. 1 — Adjustment Button A loose head restraint thrown forward in Head restraints should never be adjusted 2 — Release Button a collision or hard stop could cause serious while the vehicle is in motion. Driving a injury or death to occupants of the vehicle. vehicle with the head restraints improperly Note: To allow maximum visibility for the Always securely stow removed head adjusted or removed could cause serious restraints in a location outside the occupant injury or death in the event of a collision. driver, if the head restraints are not in compartment. use, lower the head restraint all the way. ALL the head restraints MUST be The height of the outboard head Head Restraints (Removal) reinstalled in the vehicle to properly protect restraints can be adjusted. The head To remove the head restraints, proceed the occupants. Follow the re-installation instructions above prior to operating the restraint of the center seat, if equipped, as follows: can only be removed. The height cannot vehicle or occupying a seat. be adjusted. 1. Raise the head restraints to their For upward adjustment, pull up on the maximum height. head restraint until it clicks into place. 2. Push the adjustment button and the For downward adjustment, push in the release button at the side of the two adjustment button and lower the head supports. restraint while holding the button to the desired height. 3. Remove the head restraints by pulling them upwards.

29 STEERING WHEEL Steering Wheel feature will not be available. Adjustments Warning! While the engine is running, push the This feature allows you to tilt the heated steering wheel button on the Do not adjust the steering column while steering column upward or downward. It instrument panel. also allows you to lengthen or shorten the driving. Adjusting the steering column while steering column. The tilt/telescoping driving or driving with the steering column lever is located below the steering wheel unlocked, could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle. Failure to follow this at the end of the steering column. warning may result in serious injury or death.

To Adjust The Position: 1. Pull the Tilt/Telescoping Control Handle down to the open position. 2. Adjust the steering wheel to the desired position. 04086S0002EM 3. Lock the desired position by pushing Heated Steering Wheel Button the Tilt/Telescoping Control Handle to When the function is enabled, the the closed position. indicator on the button will illuminate. GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE Warning! Warning!

It is absolutely forbidden to carry out any Persons who are unable to feel pain to the after-market operation involving steering skin because of advanced age, chronic system or steering column modifications illness, diabetes, spinal cord injury, (e.g. installation of anti-theft device) that medication, alcohol use, exhaustion, or other could adversely affect performance. Doing physical conditions must exercise care when so could void the New Vehicle Limited using the steering wheel heater. It may Warrant, cause SERIOUS SAFETY cause burns even at low temperatures, PROBLEMS INCLUDING INJURY,and also especially if used for long periods. result in the vehicle not meeting 04086S0001EM Steering Wheel Adjustment type-approval requirements. Do not place anything on the steering wheel that insulates against heat, such as a 1 — Tilt/Telescoping Control Handle blanket or steering wheel covers of any type A — Open Heated Steering Wheel — If Equipped and material. This may cause the steering B — Closed Note: If your vehicle is equipped with wheel heater to overheat. Sparco Racing Seats, the Heated 30 MIRRORS automatically folds the mirrors. The mirrors return to the driving position Electrochromic Mirror when the vehicle is then unlocked. This mirror automatically adjusts for If the door mirrors were folded using the headlight glare from vehicles behind you. power mirror control knob, they can only The electrochromic mirror has a power be returned to the driving position by button to activate/deactivate the rotating the knob again. automatic dimming/anti-glaring function. Note: The power folding operation can be enabled only when the vehicle speed is lower than 31 mph (50 km/h). They can

04106S0004EM only be manually controlled up to that Power Mirror Control speed. 1 — Power Mirror Control Knob Automatic Dimming Mirrors A — Left Like the electrochromic mirror, an B — Right automatic dimming feature is also C — Power Folding Position available on the outside rear view mirrors D — Neutral to prevent glare. The automatic dimming button is the same for all rear view mirrors. 04106S0002EM To adjust the selected mirror, push the Electrochromic Mirror Power Button knob in the direction desired. Warning! When the vehicle is in REVERSE, the Note: Once adjustment is complete, automatic dimming feature is rotate the knob to the neutral position to deactivated. prevent accidental movements. Vehicles and other objects seen in an outside convex mirror will look smaller and farther Outside Power Mirrors Power Folding away than they really are. Relying too much on With the power mirror control knob in the side convex mirrors could cause you to collide Power Adjustment neutral position, move it to the power with another vehicle or other object. Use your The power mirrors can be adjusted with folding position. Move the knob again to inside mirror when judging the size or distance the ignition ON. return the mirrors to the driving position. of a vehicle seen in a side convex mirror. Select the desired mirror using the power If the power mirror control knob is moved mirror control. again during door mirror folding (from Heated Mirrors closed to open position and vice versa), Push the rear defrost button in the the movement direction is reversed. climate controls to activate the heated Automatic Activation mirrors. Activating the central door locking system from outside the vehicle 31 EXTERIOR LIGHTS except for the parking lights. Refer to System, by selecting the following "Parking Lights" in this section for more functions in sequence on the main MENU: Headlight Switch information. 1. “Settings.” The headlight switch is located to the left The instrument panel and the various of the steering wheel on the instrument controls on the dashboard will be 2. “Lights.” panel. This switch controls the operation illuminated when the exterior lights are of the headlights, parking lights, turned on. 3. “Daytime Running Lights.” instrument panel lights, instrument panel light dimming, interior lights and rear fog Automatic Headlights Note: The Daytime Running Lights lights. cannot be deactivated in Canadian This system automatically turns the markets. In addition, there are buttons for parking headlights on or off according to ambient sensors deactivation and stop/start. light levels. Rear Fog Light Refer to “Starting And Operating” for further information. Function Activation The rear fog light switch is integrated From the O (off) position, turn the light with the headlight switch. switch to the (AUTO) position. Push the button to turn the rear fog Note: The function can only operate with lights on/off. the ignition position cycled to ON. The rear fog lights turn on only when the headlights or parking lights are turned on. Function Deactivation The lights can be turned off by pushing To deactivate the function, turn the light the button again or by turning the GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE switch to a position other than the headlight switch to the O (off) position. (AUTO) position. When the engine is stopped with the rear Daytime Running Lights (DRL) fog lights on, they will remain off the next time the engine is started. 04126S0001NA With the ignition cycled to ON, and the Headlight Switch light switch turned to the position, if Parking Lights the dusk sensor detects sufficient 1—Parking Sensors Deactivation Button external light, the Daytime Running With the ignition in the STOP position, 2 — Parking Light, Daylight Running Lights will turn on automatically while the turn the headlight switch to the Lights, Headlight Switch other lights remain off. position to turn the parking lights on. 3 — Instrument Panel Dimmer If the turn signals are operated, the All of the parking lights will turn on for 4 — Rear Fog Light Button brightness of the corresponding Daytime eight minutes, and opening the door 5 — Stop/Start Button Running Lights will be decreased as long activates an audible warning. as the turn signals are on. To leave only the lights on one side (right/left) illuminated, you must move The exterior lights can be activated only The DRL can be activated/deactivated from the Information and Entertainment the multifunction lever (located on the when the ignition is in the ON position, left side of the steering wheel) to the side 32 that you want to remain on. With the Adaptive Frontlight System (AFS parking lights on, the warning light on Function) — If Equipped the instrument panel will illuminate. This is a system combined with Xenon Note: Cycling the ignition to ON turns off headlights (Bi-Xenon 35 W headlamp if the parking lights, which were only equipped) which directs the headlights illuminated on one side. horizontally, and continuously and automatically adapts them to the driving Headlight Off Delay conditions around bends or when The “Headlight Off Delay” function delays cornering. the turning off of the headlights for a set The system directs the headlights to light time when the ignition is cycled OFF. up the road in the best way, taking into 04126S0020EM The function can be activated from the account the speed of the vehicle and the Multifunction Lever Information and Entertainment System bend or corner angle, as well as the speed by selecting the following functions in of steering. The high beam headlights are turned off sequence on the main menu: by pulling the lever to its original position. The adaptive lights are automatically The warning light/icon will turn off in 1. “Settings.” activated when the vehicle is started. the instrument panel when the headlights High Beam Headlights are turned off. 2. “Lights.” To activate the fixed high beam Flashing The Headlights 3. “Headlight Off Delay.” headlights, push the multifunction lever, Pulling the multifunction lever toward the The side lights and the headlights stay on located on the left side of the steering steering wheel will activate the high for a time that can be set between 30, wheel, towards the instrument panel. The beam headlights manually. The lights will 60, and 90 seconds. headlight switch must be turned to the remain on as long as the lever is held. (AUTO) or (ON) position. Function Activation Once the lever is released, the lights will With high beam headlights on, the resume the previous position. With the headlights on, cycle the ignition High Beam Indicator on the to STOP,the timer will then start. instrument panel will illuminate. Automatic High Beam Headlights — If Note: To activate this function, the Equipped headlights must be deactivated within The Automatic High Beam Headlights two minutes after the ignition has been system provides increased forward cycled to STOP. lighting at night by automating high beam control through the use of a digital Function Deactivation camera mounted on the windshield. This This function is deactivated by turning on camera detects vehicle specific light and the headlights, the side lights, or by automatically switches from high beams cycling the ignition to ON. to low beams until the approaching vehicle is out of view. 33 This function is enabled with the If the multifunction lever is pushed again “Lane Change” Function Information and Entertainment System, with the Automatic High Beam Tap the lever up or down once, without and can only be activated with the light Headlights activated, the Automatic High moving beyond the detent, and the turn switch turned to (AUTO). Beam Headlights function deactivates. signal (right or left) will flash five times. If the high beam headlights are on, the To deactivate the automatic headlight Then, the turn signal (right or left) will blue icon/warning light will illuminate function, rotate the headlight switch to automatically turn off. in the instrument panel. the position. To turn off the flashing before the end of the When the speed is higher than 37 mph Note: If the system recognizes heavy cycle, move the lever in the opposite (60 km/h) and the function is active, the traffic areas, the automatic functions direction until the first click (about half way). lights will turn off if the multifunction remain disabled independently of the Static Bending Light Function (SBL) — lever is pushed again. vehicle’s speed. If Equipped When the speed is lower than 15 mph Turn Signals The SBL function utilizes Light Emitting (25 km/h) and the function is active, the To activate the turn signals function, Diodes (LEDs) in order to better illuminate function switches the high beam move the multifunction lever, located on the street and increase the light angle headlights off. the left side of the steering wheel, up or while turning. This function is enabled by If the high beam headlights are operated down until it reaches the detent. Moving rotating the light switch to position or quickly again (pushing the multifunction the lever upward flashes the right turn (AUTO). The SBL LEDs activate when lever towards the instrument panel), the signal and moving the lever downward the speed is below 25 mph (40 km/h). warning light/icon will illuminate in the will flash the left turn signal. This function can be activated/ instrument panel, and the high beam

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE The or turn signal will blink on the deactivated on the Information and headlights will turn on constantly until instrument panel. Entertainment System by selecting the the speed exceeds 37 mph (60 km/h). The turn signals turn off automatically following functions in sequence on the When the speed of 37 mph (60 km/h) is when the vehicle is brought back onto a main menu: exceeded again, the automatic straight course. 1. “Settings.” functioning is reactivated. 2. “Lights.” 3. “Cornering Lights.”

34 INTERIOR LIGHTS being drained once the doors are closed. After 15 minutes to preserve the If a light is left on accidently, the battery. Front Map Reading Lights overhead lights turn off automatically Timing While Getting Out Of The The front map/reading and overhead approximately 15 minutes after the Vehicle lights are mounted in the overhead engine has been turned OFF. After cycling the ignition to STOP,the console. Each light can be turned on by Overhead Light Timing overhead lights will turn on as follows: pushing the corresponding switch on the console. These switches are backlit for To assist getting in and out of the vehicle For a few seconds after the engine night time visibility. To turn the lights off, at night or in poorly-lit areas, two timed stops. push the switch a second time. modes are available to keep the interior lighting on after the engine is cycled OFF. For approximately three minutes when Timing While Getting Into The Vehicle one of the doors is opened. The overhead lights will illuminate as For a few seconds when the last door follows: is closed. For a few seconds when the doors are The timing ends automatically when the unlocked. doors are locked. For approximately three minutes when Vanity Mirror Lights one of the doors is opened. On the driver and passenger sun visor, For a few seconds when the doors are there is a light which illuminates the sun visor mirror when folded down. 04136S0001EM locked. Overhead Console Timing is interrupted when the ignition is 1 — Driver’s Reading/Map Light Switch cycled to ON. 2 — Rear Overhead Lights Switch Exiting Overhead Light Timing 3 — Overhead Lights Switch The overhead lights will turn off as 4 — Front Map Reading Lights Switch follows: 5 — Passenger’s Reading/Map After all doors are closed upon Light Switch entering the vehicle, the three minute 6 — Passenger’s Reading/Map Light timer will stop and a second timer will 7 — Center Reading/Map Light start for the overhead lights. This timing 8 — Driver’s Reading/Map Light will end when the ignition is cycled to ON. 04136S0002EM Sun Visor Mirror When the doors are locked (either with Note: Before getting out of the vehicle, key fob or with key inserted on driver’s 1 — Sun Visor Mirror Cover ensure that the overhead lights are off. side door). This will prevent the battery level from 35 The courtesy light turns on automatically Door Light Rear Overhead Light by lifting the cover. This vehicle is equipped with door The rear overhead lights are activated or Glove Compartment Light courtesy lamps that illuminate the entry deactivated by two on/off switches This light turns on automatically when the way for the driver or passenger when the located within the lights on the ceiling glove compartment is opened and turns door is opened, and turns off when it is above the rear seats. off when it is closed. closed. The light turns on and off regardless of The light turns on and off regardless of the ignition status. the ignition status.

04136S0004EM Rear Overhead Light 1 — Passenger Rear Overhead Light 04136S0003EM 04136S0007EM 2 — Driver Rear Overhead Light

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE Door Light Glove Compartment Light 3 — Driver Rear Overhead Light Switch As part of the "Passive Entry" system, Interior Ambient Lighting 4—Passenger Rear Overhead Light Switch another light can be found under each The brightness of the interior lighting can exterior door handle. be adjusted via the Information and The light turns on when a door is opened. Entertainment System. Note: The light will turn off To access the adjustment function, on the automatically after a few minutes if a main menu select the following items in door is left open. To turn it on again, open sequence: another door or close and reopen the 1. "Settings." same door. 2. "Interior Ambient Lighting." 3. "Lights." The lights can be adjusted to seven different levels of brightness. 04136S0005EM Exterior Door Handle Light 36 Courtesy Trunk Lights Instrument Panel Dimmer Control WINDSHIELD WIPERS The trunk features two courtesy lights. With the daytime running lights or Windshield Wiper Stalk These courtesy lights turn on headlights on, rotate the dimmer control automatically when the trunk is opened upward to increase the instrument panel The windshield wiper stalk is located on and turn off when it is closed. brightness and the control button icons. the right side of the steering wheel. Rotate the dimmer control downward to The windshield wipers will only operate decrease brightness. with the ignition cycled to ON.

Caution!

Turn the windshield wipers off when driving through an automatic car wash. Damage to the windshield wipers may result if the wiper control is left in any position other than off.

04136S0006EM Courtesy Trunk Lights In cold weather, always turn off the wiper switch and allow the wipers to return to the The courtesy lights will turn on and off 04126S0055EM “Park” position before turning off the Dimmer Control regardless of the ignition status. engine. If the wiper switch is left on and the wipers freeze to the windshield, damage to Note: If the trunk is left open, the lights the wiper motor may occur when the vehicle will automatically turn off after is restarted. 15 minutes to preserve battery life. Always remove any buildup of snow that prevents the windshield wiper blades from returning to the off position. If the windshield wiper control is turned off and the blades cannot return to the off position, damage to the wiper motor may occur.

37 Windshield Wiper/Washers Rain Sensors Rotating the switch to the position, Warning! activates the first, less sensitive level of the Rain Sensing function. Rotating the switch to the position, Sudden loss of visibility through the activates the second, more sensitive windshield could lead to a collision. You level of the Rain Sensing function. Refer might not see other vehicles or other obstacles. To avoid sudden icing of the to “Rain Sensor” in this section for more windshield during freezing weather, warm information on how this system the windshield with the defroster before and functions. during windshield washer use. Windshield Washer Operation

04146S0001EM Pull the stalk toward the steering wheel Rain Sensor Windshield Wiper Switch to operate the windshield washer. The Rain Sensor is located behind the Operation: The switch on the wiper Keep the stalk pulled to activate both the interior rear view mirror. This feature stalk can be set to the following windshield washer jet and the windshield senses moisture on the windshield and positions: wiper with a single movement. The wipers automatically activates the wipers for and washers will continue to operate until Windshield Wiper Off. the driver. you let go of the stalk. Low Sensitivity Rain Sensing. The windshield wiper stops working three High Sensitivity Rain Sensing. GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE strokes after the stalk is released, Low Continuous Wiper Speed. followed by a final stroke six seconds High Continuous Wiper Speed. later to complete the cycle. Windshield Wiper Operation Mist Rotating the switch to the position Use this feature when weather activates the first (low) level continuous conditions make occasional usage of the speed of the windshield wipers in manual wipers necessary. Push the stalk upward mode. to the MIST position and release for a Rotating the switch to the position single wiping cycle. This function is useful 04146S0002EM activates the second (high) level to remove small deposits of dust from Rain Sensor the windshield or morning dew. continuous speed of the windshield The feature is especially useful for road wipers in manual mode. Note: This function does not activate the splash or over spray from the windshield windshield washer. To spray windshield washers of the vehicle ahead. Rotate the washer fluid onto the windshield, the end of the multifunction lever to one of washing function must be used. four settings to activate this feature. 38 The sensor has an adjustment range that Deactivation CLIMATE CONTROL varies progressively from wiper still (no Use the wiper switch or cycle the ignition Passenger Compartment Air Vents stroke) when the windshield is dry, to to STOP. wiper at continuous speed (fast In the event of malfunction of the rain Side Air Vents operation) with intense rain. sensor while it is active, the windshield To adjust the position of the Side Air Activation wiper operates intermittently at a speed Vents, move the Side Air Vent Adjuster Rotating the wiper switch to position consistent with the sensitivity setting of (2) in any direction. or activates the rain sensor. the rain sensor, whether or not there is Rotate the Side Air Vent Adjuster (2) rain on the glass for as long as the sensor The activation of the rain sensor system to adjust the air flow. Rotating the Side failure is indicated on the display. is done by tapping the wiper stalk Air Vent Adjuster (2) clockwise will close The sensor continues to operate and it is upwards while the switch is in the or the vent. Rotating it counterclockwise position. possible to set the windshield wiper to continuous mode or . The failure will open the vent. The variation in sensitivity during rain indication remains on for as long as the sensor operation is also signaled by a sensor is active. stroke of the wiper (command acquired and implemented). This stroke is also The rain sensor is able to recognize and executed with the windshield dry. automatically adjust itself in the presence of the following conditions: If the windshield washer is used with the rain sensor activated, the normal washing Presence of dirt on the controlled cycle is performed, after which the rain surface (e.g. salt, dirt, etc.). sensor resumes its normal automatic Presence of streaks of water caused operation. by the worn window wiper blades. Note: Keep the glass in the sensor area clean. Difference between day and night. 04156S0002EM Side Air Vents 1 — Demister Air Vents 2 — Side Air Vent Adjuster

39 Central Air Vents Rear Air Vents To adjust the position of the Central To adjust the position of the Rear Air Air Vents, move the Central Air Vent Vents, move the Rear Air Vent Adjuster Adjuster (2) up or down. (2) in any direction. Rotate the Central Air Vent Air Flow Rotate the Rear Air Vent Adjuster (2) Adjuster (3) to adjust the air flow. to adjust the air flow. Rotating the Rear Rotating Central Air Vent Air Flow Air Vent Adjuster (2) clockwise will close Adjuster (3) up will open the vents, the vent. Rotating it counterclockwise allowing for maximum airflow. Rotating it will open the vent. down will close the vents. GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 04156S0004EM

04156S0003EM Rear Air Vents Central Air Vents 1 — Adjustable Rear Air Vents 1 — Adjustable Central Air Vents 2 — Rear Air Vent Adjuster 2 — Central Air Vent Adjuster 3 — Central Air Vent Air Flow Adjuster 4 — Windshield Front Defroster Vent

40 Automatic Dual-Zone Climate Control System Controls

04156V0005EM Automatic Climate Control System 1 — Driver Temperature Adjustment 6 — Rear Defrost Button 11 — Passenger Heated Seat Button — Knob If Equipped 2 — Driver Side AUTO Button (Auto- 7 — Passenger Side Air Distribution 12 — Air Conditioning Button matic Operation) Selection Button 3 — Driver Side Air Distribution Selec- 8 — Passenger Side AUTO Button (Au- 13 — Steering Wheel Heater Button — tion Button tomatic Operation) If Equipped 4 — Max Defrost Button 9 — Passenger Temperature Adjust- 14 — Driver Side Heated Seat Button ment Knob — If Equipped 5 — Blower Speed Adjustment Knob 10 — SYNC Button (Set Temperature 15 — Air Recirculation Button Alignment) Driver/Passenger Side

41 Compressor variations (for Front Defroster Caution! cooling/dehumidifying the air) Air recirculation Air recirculation Rear Defroster The system uses R1234yf refrigerant, which The Climate Control System can also be System deactivation does not pollute the environment in the operated manually by using the buttons event of accidental leakage. Under no and knobs on the faceplate. Operating Mode circumstances, use R134a and R12 fluids, Manual selections will override the The Climate Control system can be which are incompatible with the components automatic settings, which are stored until activated in different ways. It is of this system. the AUTO button is pushed. If the system recommended to use the automatic intervenes for safety reasons, the function. Push the AUTO button and set Description automatic setting will take control of the the desired temperatures. system. The Automatic Dual Zone Climate The automatic system adjusts the Control System adjusts the temperature The below operations will not deactivate temperature, quantity, and distribution and air distribution independently the automatic (AUTO) function: of air introduced into the passenger between the driver and passenger. Air Recirculation activation/ compartment. It also controls air The system maintains the set deactivation recirculation and the activation of the air conditioner. temperature inside the passenger A/C activation/deactivation At any time during automatic operation, compartment and compensates for SYNC function activation outside temperature change. you can change the temperature, activate

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE Rear Window Defrost activation/ Note: The reference temperature is or deactivate the Rear Defroster, 72 °F (22 °C) for optimal comfort deactivation activate SYNC, activate or deactivate the air conditioner, and activate or management. When in AUTO mode, the vehicle’s deactivate air recirculation. The system internal temperature is controlled The automatic setting will adjust the will automatically adjust to the new according to the set temperature. following to maintain comfort within the settings. passenger compartment: The following can be manually set or Air temperature from the driver/front adjusted: Climate Control Display Settings passenger side vents Driver/passenger air temperature The Climate Control settings are visible Air distribution from the driver/front Blower speed (continuous variation) on the Information and Entertainment System radio screen. passenger side vents Air distribution (seven positions for Fan speed (continuous variation of the driver and passenger) air flow) A/C activation

42 The display on the Information and function. This will set a new passenger Air flow distributed between the Entertainment System is a pop up side temperature. floor vents, windshield, and front window (1), which is activated by pushing Rotate the Temperature Adjustment side window defrosting/demisting the buttons or turning the knobs on the Knob fully clockwise to engage the HI vents. This distribution setting Climate Control system. The indicator (maximum heating) setting or fully lights located on the number of buttons counterclockwise to engage the LO warms the passenger compartment and knobs indicate that the selected (maximum cooling) setting. To deactivate while preventing the windows from feature is on/off. If no operation is these functions, rotate the Temperature fogging up. performed for a predetermined time, the Adjustment Knob to the desired Air flow distribution between the pop-up will close on the display. temperature. windshield demisting/defrosting Rear passengers’ temperature is linked vents, and side/central dashboard to driver side selection. vents. This distribution setting Air Distribution Selection sends air to the windshield in sunny Push the Air Distribution Selection conditions. button on the faceplate to change the Air flow distribution to all vents on mode of air distribution. the vehicle. Air flow to the windshield and In AUTO mode, the Climate Controls demister window vents to automatically manage the air demist/defrost them. distribution. When set manually, the 0521128655US respective symbols on the Information 1 — Climate Control Pop-up Display Air flow at the central and side and Entertainment System indicate the dashboard vents to ventilate the Air Temperature Adjustment air distribution setting. chest and the face. Rotate the driver or passenger Fan Speed Adjustment Air flow to the front and rear floor Temperature Adjustment Knob clockwise Turn the Blower Speed Knob to increase for warmer temperatures or vents. This setting heats the or decrease the blower speed. The speed counterclockwise for cooler passenger compartment the is displayed with lighted indicators in the temperatures. The set temperatures are quickest. Information and Entertainment System shown on the Information and display. Entertainment System. Air flow distributed between the floor vents (hotter air) and the Maximum fan speed = all indicators Push the SYNC button to sync the driver illuminated on the Information and and passenger air temperatures. central and side dashboard vents (cooler air). This air distribution Entertainment System display Rotate the passenger Temperature Adjustment Knob to cancel the SYNC setting is useful on sunny days during spring and autumn. 43 Minimum fan speed = one indicator SYNC Button Enabling The Air Quality System (AQS) Function — If Equipped illuminated on the Information and Push the SYNC button (indicator Entertainment System display illuminated) to sync the passenger side When the automatic recirculation function is selected, the AQS function The fan can be turned off by rotating the air temperature with the driver side air automatically activates internal air Blower Speed Knob counterclockwise to temperature. recirculation when the outside air is the off position (all segments on the This function makes temperature polluted (e.g. in heavy traffic and tunnels). Information and Entertainment System regulation easier when the driver is display are turned off). traveling alone. At low external temperatures or in high humidity, the automatic function turns Note: To restore automatic control of Turn the passenger Temperature off to avoid fogging up the windows. The the fan speed, push the AUTO button. Adjustment Knob or push the passenger user can select the function again by side Air Distribution Selection Button to AUTO Button pushing the Air Recirculation Button. change the passenger side air When the AUTO button is pushed temperature and return to separate air In automatic operation, air recirculation (indicator illuminated), the Climate temperature management. will be controlled by the system Control system automatically adjusts the according to outside environmental Air Recirculation And Air Quality following settings: conditions. System (AQS) Quantity and distribution of air flow in Note: the passenger compartment Air Recirculation is managed according to the following operating mode: With the AQS function active and The air conditioner Automatic engagement: indicator is after the internal air recirculation GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE system has been functioning for a set Air recirculation illuminated above the “A”on the Air Cancels any manual settings amount of time, the Climate Control Recirculation Button System enables air intake to cycle the Selecting the AUTO function illuminates Forced activation (air circulation air in the passenger compartment for a the indicator on the A/C button or . always activated): indicator illuminated set time. The AQS function is disabled If air distribution or the fan speed is above the icon on the Air during the air changes. manual adjusted, the AUTO button Recirculation Button The engagement of the recirculation indicator turns off to indicate that the Forced deactivation (air recirculation system makes it possible to reach the Climate Control system is no longer in always off with intake of outside air): required heating or cooling conditions AUTO mode. both indicators not illuminated on the Air faster. It is, however, inadvisable to use After a manual adjustment, push the Recirculation Button it on rainy/cold days as it can increase AUTO button to resume the automatic the possibility of the windows fogging. system. The three operating conditions are When the outside temperature is low, obtained by pushing the Air Recirculation recirculation is forced off to prevent the Button in sequence. windows from fogging up. 44 A/C Compressor While in MAX-DEF function, the air Note: To avoid damage, do not apply conditioner will: stickers over the interior heating Push the A/C button to activate or filaments of the Rear Defroster. deactivate the A/C compressor (indicator Activate the air conditioner illuminated when activated). The A/C compressor when the weather allows Humidity Sensor compressor will remain off even after the Turn air recirculation off The Humidity Sensor helps to prevent the engine has stopped. Set the maximum air temperature (HI) windows from fogging up. The AUTO When the A/C compressor is turned off, on both the driver and passenger side function (indicator illuminated) must be the system deactivates air recirculation on for the Humidity Sensor to function. to prevent the windows from fogging up. Activate a blower speed based on the When outside temperature is low, the If the climate control system can temperature of the engine coolant system may turn the compressor on and maintain the temperature, with the A/C Adjust the air flow towards the turn air recirculation off for safer driving. turned off, the AUTO feature will remain windshield and front side windows on and the AUTO button indicator light Activate the Rear Window Defroster Switching Off/On The Climate Control will not switch off. System Display the fan speed (indicators To restore automatic control of the A/C illuminated) and current air distribution Switching Off The Climate Control compressor, push the A/C button or the System AUTO button. With the A/C compressor setting Rotate the Air Speed Adjustment Knob off, the air speed can be set manually Note: The MAX-DEF function remains completely counterclockwise to turn off using the Air Speed Adjustment Knob. active for approximately three minutes the Climate Control System. When the A/C compressor is on, and the once the engine coolant reaches the With the air conditioner off: engine is running, air speed cannot be proper temperature. Air recirculation is on lower than the minimum speed (only one When the function is on, AUTO mode will indicator light is lit). deactivate. The only manual operations The A/C compressor is off Note: When the A/C is off the Climate possible are adjusting blower speed and The fan is off Control system can not produce air that turning off the Rear Window Defroster. The heated rear window can be is colder than the current outside Pushing the button switches off the activated/deactivated temperature. Under certain MAX-DEF function. environmental conditions, windows could Note: The climate control system stores fog up rapidly, since the air is not Rear Defroster the previously set temperatures and dehumidified. Push the Rear Defroster button to resumes operation when any button on the system is pushed. Front Defroster And MAX-DEF activate (indicators illuminated) the Rear Function Defroster. The Rear Defroster will turn off after Push the Front Defroster button 20 minutes or once the engine is turned (indicator illuminated) to defrost the off. To reactive the Rear Defroster, push windshield and side windows. the Rear Defroster button. 45 Switching On The Climate Control control system will continue to maintain POWER WINDOWS System the temperature while the engine is off. Power Window Switches To switch the climate control system on By deactivating the Stop/Start system in automatic mode, push the AUTO with the button located on the The power window switches work with button. dashboard, the climate control system the ignition in the ON position and for will take priority over the engine shutting three minutes after the ignition has been Stop/Start off. placed in the STOP position. When one of the front doors is opened, this operation The climate control system manages the Note: Stop/Start system. Stop/Start has the is disabled. engine shut off when vehicle speed is In harsh climate conditions, limit the Driver Side Front Door Controls 0 mph (0 km/h) to maintain comfort use of the Stop/Start system to prevent The switches are located on the door within the vehicle. the compressor from continuously panel trim. All windows can be controlled Stop/Start will deactivate in the switching on and off. This will cause from the driver side door panel. following scenarios: rapid misting of the windows and the accumulation of humidity in the The climate control system is in AUTO passenger compartment. mode (indicator illuminated), and the vehicle has yet to reach the set When the Stop/Start system is on, temperature the climate control system will always take air in from outside, reducing the The climate control system is in LO probability of the windows fogging up.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE maximum cooling The climate control system is in HI System Maintenance maximum heating In winter, the Climate Control System must be turned on at least once a month The climate control system is in the 04166S0001EM MAX-DEF status for approximately ten minutes. Power Window Switches Have the system inspected at an When the Stop/Start system is active, authorized dealer before the summer. 1 — Front Left 4 — Window the engine will restart if the inside Window Switch Lockout Switch temperature changes significantly, or if 2 — Front Right 5 — Rear Left the LO setting, or MAX-DEF setting, is Window Switch Window Switch activated. 3 — Rear Right With Stop/Start system on, air flow is Window Switch reduced to keep the compartment comfort conditions for longer. Until the temperature drastically changes within the cabin, the climate 46 Window Opening This device is also useful if the windows HOOD are activated accidentally by children Push the buttons to open the desired Opening window. inside the vehicle. Each button has two position steps. Push The anti-pinch safety function is To open the hood, proceed as follows: activated both during the manual and the gently (first position step) for manual 1. Pull the release lever located on the automatic operation of the window. "burst" window travel, while pushing the driver’s side kick panel. same button harder (second position When the anti-pinch system is activated, step) activates "continuous automatic" the window closing is immediately operation. interrupted. Then the window closing is If the button is pushed again, the window automatically reversed and the window will stop in the desired position. lowers by about eight inches (20 cm) in Window Closing relation to the first stop position. The window cannot be operated during this Pull the window switch up to move the time. window upward. Hold the switch for at least half of a second and the window will Note: In the event of an error, or if the go up automatically. anti-pinch protection is activated three consecutive times, the automatic closing To stop the window during Auto-Up operation of the window will be 04196S0001EM operation, push or pull the window switch deactivated. In order to restore the Hood Release Lever again. correct operation of the system, the 2. Go to the outside of the vehicle and Passenger Side Front Door/Rear Door window must be lowered. position yourself in front of the grille. Controls Power Window System Initialization 3. Lift the hood slightly. There are single window controls on the If power supply is interrupted, the passenger and rear door trim panels electric window automatic operation 4. Move the under-hood latch from right which operate the door windows. must be reinitialized. to left to release the hood. Auto-Up Feature With Anti-Pinch To perform the initialization procedure, Protection which must be done on each door with the The vehicle may be equipped with an doors closed, manually fully close the anti-pinch safety device for closing the window to be initialized. windows. If the safety system senses any obstacle while the window is closing, it will stop the window’s movement and reverse it, depending on its position.

47 Closing TRUNK As the hood is extremely light, to close The trunk unlocking is electrically the hood, lower it to approximately operated and is deactivated when the 16 inches (40 cm) from the engine vehicle is in motion. compartment then apply a slight pressure downward and drop the hood. Opening Make sure that the hood is completely Opening From The Outside closed and fully latched. If it is not When unlocked, the trunk lid can be perfectly closed, do not try to push the opened from outside the vehicle using hood down but open it and repeat the the exterior trunk lid release button 04196S0002EM procedure located between the plate lights. Push Release Hood Latch To The Left Note: Always check that the hood is the button until you hear a “click.” The 5. Raise the hood completely. The closed correctly to prevent it from trunk lid can also be opened by quickly operation is assisted by the addition of opening while the vehicle is traveling. pushing the exterior trunk lid release two gas props which hold it in the open Since the hood is equipped with a double button on the key fob twice. position. locking system, one for each side, you must check that it is closed on both its Note: side ends. Do not tamper with the props and Warning! GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE assist the hood while lifting it. Use both hands to lift the hood. Before lifting, check that the windshield Be sure the hood is fully latched before wiper arms are not raised from the driving your vehicle. If the hood is not fully windshield or in operation, that the latched, it could open when the vehicle is in vehicle is stationary and that the electric motion and block your vision. Failure to follow this warning could result in serious park brake is engaged. 04056S0005EM injury or death. Exterior Trunk Lid Release Button The turn signal indicators will blink and the interior lights will turn on when the trunk lid is opened. They turn off automatically when the trunk lid is closed. The lights turn off automatically after a few minutes if the trunk lid is left open. 48 Opening From The Inside Pull the lever in the direction indicated by Trunk Initialization When unlocked, the trunk lid can be the arrow to open the trunk lid. The lever Note: If the battery is disconnected or opened from inside the vehicle using the can be seen in the dark. the protection fuse blows, the trunk lid interior trunk lid release button, located Closing opening/closing mechanism must be under the dashboard near the engine re-initialized as follows: hood opening lever. Push the trunk lid Grip one of the handles and lower the release button until you hear a “click.” trunk lid until it clicks. 1. Close all the doors and the trunk lid. 2. Push the lock button on the remote control. 3. Push the unlock button on the remote control. Trunk Specifications Access To The Tire Service Kit To access the Tire Service Kit, lift the carpet in the trunk. For its use, refer to ”Tire Service Kit” in “In Case Of 04206S0003EM 04206S0002EM Emergency” for further information. Interior Trunk Lid Release Button Trunk Lid Interior Handles Trunk Lid Emergency Opening Note: A lever can be found in the trunk lid over It will not be possible to open the the lock to allow opening from the inside. trunk lid with a key or by pushing the button in the passenger compartment when the battery is disconnected. So, always position the manual trunk lid opening strap on the trunk lid lock before disconnecting the battery. Refer to “Storing The Vehicle” in “Servicing And Maintenance” for the procedure. 04206S0004EM Cargo Area

04206S0006EM Emergency Release Button 49 Rear Cargo Tie–Downs — If Equipped INTERNAL EQUIPMENT Sun Visors There are four hooks inside the trunk for Glove Compartment The sun visors are located at the sides of attaching the cargo net or cables which the interior rear view mirror. They can be can safely secure the cargo. To open the glove compartment proceed adjusted forward and toward the side as follows: window. 1. If equipped with a lock, unlock the To direct the visor toward the side glove compartment by placing the window, detach the visor from the emergency key in the lock on the handle. interior rear view mirror side hook and turn it towards the side window. 2. Pull handle to open the glove compartment. From this position, the sun visor can also be extended toward to rear of the vehicle for additional blockage of sunlight. Courtesy mirrors with lights are fitted on the back of the sun visors and can be

04206S0005EM used even in poor light conditions. Rear Cargo Tie-Downs Note: Do not apply a load greater than 22 lbs (10 kg) on a single hook. Cargo Net — If Equipped GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE This is useful for correctly arranging the cargo and/or for transporting light 04246S0001EM materials. Opening The Glove Compartment When the glove compartment is opened, a light turns on to illuminate the inside of the compartment. 04246S0002EM Note: Do not insert large objects that Rotate Sun Visor Toward Passenger will prevent the glove compartment from Window closing completely. Always make sure that the glove compartment is Note: A rear facing child restraint completely closed when driving. system should never be fitted in the front passenger seat. Always comply with the instructions on the sun visor. Refer to "Child Restraints" in "Safety" for more information. 50 Homelink The following operation will delete the (keeping the programmable button manufacture’s standard codes and does pushed down). Description not need to be repeated during the Homelink is a fixed system installed on subsequent button programming: 2. If the indicator does not begin to flash the vehicle. It can sync up to three quickly, change the distance between the Push and hold the outer buttons (1 and different devices that activate garage HomeLink and the portable remote doors, gates, lighting systems, and home 3). After about ten seconds, the lighted control and try the procedure again. or office alarm systems. indicators will start to flash. Release both buttons. 3. The HomeLink indicator flashes, first Programming slowly and then quickly. When the indicator starts to flash quickly, release both buttons. Warning! Using The Homelink System The HomeLink system activates the Vehicle exhaust contains carbon garage door or gate motor, just like the monoxide, a dangerous gas. Do not run your portable remote control. The car must be vehicle in the garage while programming the within the range of the garage door and transceiver. Exhaust gas can cause serious the ignition must be in the ON position. injury or death. Push the programmed button (1, 2 or 3). Yourmotorized door or gate will open and 04246S0006NA While the signal is being transmitted, the close while you are programming the indicator is lit and the system (garage universal transceiver. Do not program the Garage Door Opener (Homelink) transceiver if people, pets or other objects Buttons door, gate, etc.) will respond. are in the path of the door or gate. Only use 1 — Homelink Button 1 If the HomeLink system does not this transceiver with a garage door opener operate, the original portable remote 2 — Homelink Button 2 that has a “stop and reverse” feature as control may be equipped with an required by Federal safety standards. This 3 — Homelink Button 3 alternative code (refer to “Alternative includes most garage door opener models 4 — Homelink Indicator Code Synchronization”). manufactured after 1982. Do not use a garage door opener without these safety If necessary, the original remote control features. Call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, Note: Follow the steps below to begin can still be used to operate the system. on the Internet at HomeLink.com for safety programming your remote control to one Alternative Code Synchronization information or assistance. of the HomeLink buttons: To check whether the garage door or gate 1. Push and hold the desired HomeLink motor has an alternative code, proceed Note: Without starting the engine, button (1, 2 or 3). When the HomeLink as follows: activate the handbrake and place the indicator begins to flash slowly, move the ignition in the ON position. portable remote control one to three 1. Read the garage door or gate motor inches from the HomeLink system manufacturer manual. 51 2. The portable remote control seems to handbrake and turn the ignition to ON, have programmed to the HomeLink without starting the engine. Warning! system, but the garage door or gate can Proceed as follows: be neither opened or closed. 1. Locate the “Learn” or “Train” button on 3. Push the programmed button and Vehicle exhaust contains carbon the garage door or gate motor. The color monoxide, a dangerous gas. Do not run your keep it pushed (1, 2 or 3). With an and position may vary depending on the vehicle in the garage while programming the alternative code system, the indicator manufacturer (consult the garage door or transceiver. Exhaust gas can cause serious flashes briefly, and then remains off for gate manual). Push the “Learn” or “Train” injury or death. two seconds. This sequence is repeated button (this normally activates the for 20 seconds. Yourmotorized door or gate will open and setting warning light). close while you are programming the 2. Push the desired HomeLink button (1, universal transceiver. Do not program the transceiver if people, pets or other objects Warning! 2 or 3). When the HomeLink indicator are in the path of the door or gate. Only use begins to flash slowly, move the portable this transceiver with a garage door opener remote control one to three inches from that has a “stop and reverse” feature as Vehicle exhaust contains carbon the HomeLink system (keeping the required by Federal safety standards. This monoxide, a dangerous gas. Do not run your programmable button pushed down). includes most garage door opener models vehicle in the garage while programming the manufactured after 1982. Do not use a transceiver. Exhaust gas can cause serious 3. Within 30 seconds, push the garage door opener without these safety injury or death. programmed key (1, 2 or 3) and release it. features. Call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, Push the programmed button a second on the Internet at HomeLink.com for safety GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE Yourmotorized door or gate will open and information or assistance. close while you are programming the time and release it to conclude the universal transceiver. Do not program the operation. For some motors, the transceiver if people, pets or other objects operation will probably have to be Note: Activate the handbrake and place are in the path of the door or gate. Only use repeated a third time to end the setting. the ignition to ON without starting the this transceiver with a garage door opener The motor should now be capable of engine. that has a “stop and reverse” feature as Proceed as follows: required by Federal safety standards. This recognizing the signal transmitted by includes most garage door opener models HomeLink and then open/close the door 1. Push the desired HomeLink button manufactured after 1982. Do not use a or gate. and keep it pushed (1, 2 or 3). Do not garage door opener without these safety Programming A Single Key release the button until the last features. Call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, operation has been performed. on the Internet at HomeLink.com for safety It is possible to program another original information or assistance. remote control on an already 2. When the HomeLink indicator begins programmed HomeLink key by canceling to flash slowly, move the portable remote the previously stored frequency. Note: To program Homelink using an control 1 to 3 inches from the system Alternative Code, the car must be within (keeping the programmable button range of the garage door. Activate the pressed down). 52 If the indicator does not begin to flash Technical Information For After Sales Center Console quickly, change the distance between the Service The center console storage compartment HomeLink and the portable remote If you are unable to set up HomeLink is located between the front seats. control and try the procedure again. successfully after following the above To access the center console storage, lift The HomeLink indicator flashes, first instructions, contact After Sales Service the upper part of the center console as (HomeLink free hotline number slowly and then quickly. When the shown below. indicator starts to flash quickly, release 1-800-355-3515 ) with the following both buttons on the remote control. information: Vehicle make and model, including The system previously programmed to manufacturing year and country of HomeLink has now been deleted and the new system is ready to use. This does not purchase; affect the other two HomeLink buttons in Make, model, age and frequency of use any way. of the original portable remote control (if Deleting Programmed Keys known). It is recommended to delete HomeLink General Information programming before selling the car. The following regulatory statement All three keys are deleted simultaneously. applies to all Radio Frequency (RF) 04246S0004EM Center Console Proceed as follows: devices equipped in this vehicle: This device complies with Part 15 of the 1. Push and hold the outer buttons FCC Rules and with Industry Canada Warning! (1 and 3). After about ten seconds, the license-exempt RSS standard(s). indicator will start to flash. Operation is subject to the following two 2. Release both keys. conditions: Do not operate this vehicle with a console compartment lid in the open position. Driving 1. This device may not cause harmful with the console compartment lid open may interference, and result in injury in a collision. 2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Note: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment. 53 Cupholder ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION ACTIVE AERODYNAMICS Two cupholders are available in the SYSTEMS Carbon Fiber Active Aero Front Spoiler center console. The following systems are used for This is an automatic device, working at reducing engine emissions: the vehicle speed, which allows higher Catalytic Converter reactivity at average speeds and higher vehicle stability at high speeds, Oxygen Sensors regulating the air flow into the lower part Evaporation Control System of the vehicle. Note: The system is not active in temperatures near or below zero, or when the Alfa DNA Pro selector is in the "Natural" or "Advanced Efficiency" positions. 04246S0005EM Cupholders In Center Console 1— Cover

To access the cupholders, slide the cover forward. To close the compartment, push GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE the cover and it will close automatically.

04296S0001EM Front Fascia If there is a fault, a generic failure icon will light up on the instrument panel display, along with a message that will identify the type of malfunction. See your authorized dealer if a fault occurs.

54 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

This section gives you all the information INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES . . .56 you need to understand and use INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY . .58 the instrument panel correctly. WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES ON THE INSTRUMENT PANEL .....63 ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM . . .83 EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS ...... 83

55 INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES Instrument Cluster

05026S0006EM Instrument Cluster 1. Tachometer

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 2. Digital Engine Oil Temperature Gauge With Overheating Warning Light 3. Instrument Cluster Display 4. Digital Fuel Level Gauge (The Triangle On The Left Side Of The Symbol Indicates The Side Of The Vehicle With The Fuel Door) 5. Speedometer (Speed Indicator)

56 Tachometer Under normal usage, the temperature Note: If the low fuel warning light turns should remain around the middle of the on, refuel the vehicle at your nearest fuel The Tachometer indicates the engine digital scale according to the working station. Revolutions Per Minute (Giri). conditions. Adjusting Instrument Panel Lighting The warning light will turn on to signal Caution! (Brightness Sensor) the excessive increase of the engine oil Inside the Tachometer there is a light temperature. sensor capable of detecting light and In the event of excessive engine oil Do not travel with the fuel tank almost adjusting the brightness of the temperature, stop the engine empty: any gaps in fuel supply could damage instrument panel and the Information and immediately and contact an authorized the catalytic converter. Entertainment System display. dealer. Speedometer Engine Oil Temperature Gauge Fuel Level Gauge The speedometer shows the vehicle The digital indicator monitors the The digital fuel gauge monitors the speed in miles per hour and/or kilometers temperature of the engine oil and starts amount of fuel in the tank. per hour (mph/km/h). supplying indications when the oil When the warning light turns on, a temperature reaches approximately message is displayed, and a chime is 122° F (50°C). sound when 2.38 Gallons (9.0 L) of fuel are left in the tank.

57 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY Instrument Cluster Display Description This vehicle is equipped with a driver-interactive display that is located in the instrument cluster. When one or more of the doors have been opened or closed and the ignition is in the OFF position, the instrument cluster will display the vehicle mileage for a few seconds. Reconfigurable Instrument Cluster Display During operation, the instrument cluster display is divided into multiple sections which show driving data, warnings, and failure indications. GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

05036S0001QV Premium Instrument Cluster Display

58 Reconfigurable Multifunctional 4. Speed Limit Warning Light Navigation instructions and call Display Shows information regarding the Speed information can be repeated, besides on Limiter function. the Information and Entertainment 1. Headlight Warning Lights System display, also in this area of the Displays the headlight warning light for 5. Compass display, these functions can be set on the either of the following active modes: Information and Entertainment System. 6. Reconfigurable Main Area Headlights Home Can display the following screens: Automatic Headlights. Home The parameters shown on the display, for the modes: Dynamic, Natural and 2. Gear Selector Information Trip A Advanced Efficiency are: Displays the following information Trip B (can be activated/deactivated Time controlled by the gear selector function: through the Information and Outside Temperature P = PARK Entertainment System) Performance Current Speed (shown if the repeat R = REVERSE modes of the Phone and Navigation N = NEUTRAL The screens can be selected, on rotation, functions are not active) by pushing the MENU selection button on D = DRIVE, (automatic forward speed) Range the windshield wiper stalk. AutoStick: + shifting to higher gear in manual (sequential) driving mode; – shifting to lower gear in sequential driving mode.

3. Forward Collision, Lane Departure, Cruise Control Displays operations for the following modes: Forward Collision Warning (FCW) 05036S0004NA Lane Departure Warning (LDW) — If 05036S0002EM MENU Selection/Reset Button Premium Instrument Cluster Display Equipped Depending on the driving mode chosen Cruise Control (CC) or Adaptive Cruise using the “Alfa DNA Pro” (Dynamic, Control (ACC) — If Equipped Natural, Advanced Efficiency and RACE), the screens can be graphically different. 59 Trip A And B To reset the values, push and hold down the button on the windshield wiper stalk. The "Trip computer" can be used to display, for all driving modes (Dynamic, Performance Natural, Advanced Efficiency and RACE) The displayed parameters differ and with the ignition device ON, the according to the active mode. The modes measurements regarding the operating which can be selected using the “Alfa state of the vehicle. This function is DNA Pro” system are: characterized by two separate records, called “Trip A”and “Trip B” (the latter can Natural be deactivated by Information and 05036S0055NA Entertainment System), where the Premium Instrument Cluster Display “complete missions” (journeys) are In RACE mode, the consumption recorded in a reciprocally independent indication index is not active and a sports manner. gearshift indicator is displayed. The “Trip A”and “Trip B” are used to display sports gearshift indicator is represented the values relating to: by three yellow segments, if the third indicator, characterized by the word Distance travelled "SHIFT,” is on, it means that the gear Average fuel consumption should be shifted. Average speed 05036S0009NA Efficiency Consumption Graph Active trip The screen graphically reproduces some Fuel consumption indicator parameters closely linked to the efficiency of the driving style, with a view to limiting consumption. Advanced Efficiency GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

05036S0005NA Race Mode

05036S0007NA Premium Instrument Cluster Display 60 The displayed parameters are related to Displays the position by indicating the vehicle stability, the graphs illustrate the cardinal direction. trend of the longitudinal/lateral accelerations (G-meter information), 8. Failure Warning Lights considering gravity acceleration as a Area dedicated to displaying failures, the reference unit. following symbols could be displayed on rotation: Lateral acceleration peaks are also indicated. Low criticality symbols (yellow amber). Race High criticality symbols (red).

05036S0011NA 9. Odometer Dynamic Driving Style Indicates the total miles travelled. The three center icons on the screen indicate the effectiveness of the driving Customer Programmable Settings style, linked to the following parameters: acceleration, deceleration and gear shifts, with a view to limiting consumption. The bar below the icons shows current consumption and the green line represents the optimal area. The globe lights up gradually according to 05036S0014NA lower consumption. Acceleration Stability Gauge The displayed parameters are related to Dynamic 05036S0015EM vehicle stability, the graphs illustrate the Information and Entertainment System trend of the longitudinal/lateral accelerations (G-meter information), Multiple settings can be programmed by considering gravity acceleration as a the user using the Information and reference unit. Entertainment System. This section describes only the basic settings: Lateral acceleration peaks are also indicated. Units & Language 7. Vehicle Range Time&Date Indicates the miles left before the fuel Cluster tank is empty. 05036S0013NA Acceleration Gauge 61 To access the settings list in the Units & Language Clock & Date Information and Entertainment System, proceed as follows: 1. Press the MENU button to access the main menu 2. Select “Settings” from the main menu using the Rotary Knob

0401135760US 0401135761US Units & Language Menu Clock & Date Menu The following settings can be modified The following settings can be modified under the “Units & Language” menu: under the “Clock & Date” menu: Units: select US, metric, or custom. Sync With GPS Time: activates or The custom option allows for individual deactivates the clock synchronization

11036S0015EM selection of the unit measures through the GPS. If the function is deactivated, the options Set Time and Language: change the language of the 1 — ON/OFF Control And Volume Knob Set Date are enabled. system 2 — OPTION Button Set Time: set the time manually 3 — Rotary Pad Restore Settings: restores the factory 4 — MENU Button settings Time Format: set the time format to To access and change the setting, turn either a 12-hour and a 24-hour clock and push the Rotary Pad. Set Date: set the date manually

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Restore Settings: restores the factory settings To access and the change the setting, turn and push the Rotary Pad.

62 Cluster WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES ON THE INSTRUMENT PANEL The following pages consist of warning lights and messages. Note: The warning light turns on together with a dedicated message and/or chime when applicable. These indications are precautionary and as such must not be 0401135762US considered as exhaustive and/or Instrument Cluster Display Menu alternative to the information contained The following settings can be modified in the Owner’s Manual, which you are under the “Cluster” menu: advised to read carefully in all cases. Always refer to the information in this Warning Buzzer Volume: set the section in the event of a failure volume of the warning buzzer indication. Trip B: activate or deactivate the Trip The failure indicators appearing on function the display are divided into two Phone Repeat: activate or deactivate categories: very serious and less serious repeating the Phone function screens on faults. Serious faults are indicated by a the instrument cluster display repeated and prolonged warning "cycle.” Less serious faults are indicated by a Restore Settings: restores the factory warning "cycle" with a shorter duration. settings Youcan stop the warning cycle in both To access and the change the setting, cases by pushing the button located on turn and push the Rotary Pad. the windshield wiper stalk. The instrument panel warning light will stay on until the cause of the failure is eliminated.

63 Red Warning Lights

Warning Light What It Means What To Do INSUFFICIENT BRAKE FLUID/ELECTRIC PARK BRAKE Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by ON turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to the This light monitors various brake functions, including ON/RUN position. The light should illuminate for brake fluid level and parking brake application. If the approximately four seconds. The light should then turn brake light turns on it may indicate that the parking brake off unless the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is is applied, that the brake fluid level is low, or that there is detected. If the light does not illuminate, have the light a problem with the anti-lock brake system reservoir. inspected by an authorized dealer. If the light remains on when the parking brake has been The light also will turn on when the parking brake is disengaged, and the fluid level is at the full mark on the applied with the ignition switch in the ON/RUN position. master cylinder reservoir, it indicates a possible brake This light shows only that the parking brake is applied. It hydraulic system malfunction or that a problem with the does not show the degree of brake application. Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti-Lock Brake For low brake fluid level, go to an authorized dealer to System (ABS) / Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system. have the system checked as soon as possible. In this case, the light will remain on until the condition has Release the electric park brake, then check that the been corrected. If the problem is related to the Brake warning light has turned off. Booster, the ABS pump will run when applying the brake, If the warning light stays on, contact an authorized dealer. and a brake pedal pulsation may be felt during each stop. ELECTRONIC BRAKING FORCE DISTRIBUTION (EBD) FAILURE The simultaneous turning on of the BRAKE (red) and Drive very carefully to the nearest authorized dealer to (amber) warning lights with the engine on indicates have the system inspected immediately. either a failure of the EBD system or that the system is not available. In this case, the rear wheels may suddenly

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL lock and the vehicle may swerve when braking abruptly.

64 Warning Light What It Means What To Do AIR BAG WARNING LIGHT This light will turn on for four to eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN position. If the light is either not on during startup, stays on, or turns on while driving, have the system inspected at an authorized dealer as soon as possible. This light will If the problem persists, contact an authorized dealer. illuminate with a single chime when a fault with the Air Bag Warning Light has been detected, it will stay on until the fault is cleared. If the light comes on intermittently or remains on while driving, have an authorized dealer service the vehicle immediately. SEATBELTREMINDER WARNING LIGHT When the ignition is first placed in the ON/RUN position, if the driver’s seat belt is unbuckled, a chime will sound and the light will turn on. When driving, if the driver or Always wear your seat belt when operating the vehicle. front passenger seat belt remains unbuckled, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will flash or remain on continuously and a chime will sound. Refer to “Occupant Restraints” in “Safety” for further information.

Stop the vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as OIL TEMPERATUREWARNING LIGHT possible. If the problem persists, contact an authorized This telltale indicates engine oil temperature is high. dealer.

Warning!

The fault of the warning light is signaled by the turning on of the icon on the instrument panel. In this case, the warning light may not indicate any faults with the restraint systems. Before proceeding, contact an authorized dealer to have the system checked immediately. If the warning light does not turn on when the ignition device is moved to ON or if it stays on when driving (together with the message on the display), there might be a fault in the restraint systems; in this case, the air bags or pretensioners may not deploy in the event of an accident or, in a lower number of cases, they could deploy erroneously. Before proceeding, contact an authorized dealer to have the system checked immediately. 65 Amber Warning Lights

Warning Light What It Means What To Do ANTI-LOCK BRAKE (ABS) INDICATOR LIGHT This light monitors the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS). The light will turn on when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN position and may stay on for as long as four seconds. If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving, then the Anti-Lock portion of the brake system is not functioning and service is required. However, the conventional brake system will Drive carefully and contact an authorized dealer as soon as continue to operate normally if the brake indicator light is not possible. on. If the ABS light is on, the brake system should be serviced as soon as possible to restore the benefits of Anti-Lock Brakes. If the ABS light does not turn on when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN position, have the light inspected by an authorized dealer. TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING INDICATOR LIGHT The warning light switches on and a message is displayed to indicate that the tire pressure is lower than the recommended value and/or that slow pressure loss is occurring. In these cases, Continue driving for up to 50 miles (80 km) at a speed no higher optimal tire duration and fuel consumption may not be then 50 mph (80 km/h). Contact an authorized dealer to have guaranteed. the tire repaired. Should one or more tires be in the condition mentioned above, the display will show the indications corresponding to each tire in sequence. GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

66 Each tire, including the spare (if Please note that the TPMS is not a properly. Always check the TPMS provided), should be checked monthly substitute for proper tire maintenance, malfunction telltale after replacing one when cold and inflated to the inflation and it is the driver’s responsibility to or more tires or wheels on your vehicle, to pressure recommended by the vehicle maintain correct tire pressure, even if ensure that the replacement or alternate manufacturer on the vehicle placard or under-inflation has not reached the level tires and wheels allow the TPMS to tire inflation pressure label. (If your to trigger illumination of the TPMS low continue to function properly. vehicle has tires of a different size than tire pressure telltale. the size indicated on the vehicle placard Yourvehicle has also been equipped with Caution! or tire inflation pressure label, you should a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate determine the proper tire inflation when the system is not operating pressure for those tires.) properly. The TPMS malfunction The TPMS has been optimized for the As an added safety feature, your vehicle indicator is combined with the low tire original equipment tires and wheels. TPMS has been equipped with a Tire Pressure pressure telltale. When the system pressures and warning have been Monitoring System (TPMS) that detects a malfunction, the telltale will established for the tire size equipped on illuminates a low tire pressure telltale flash for approximately one minute and your vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor damage may result when using when one or more of your tires is then remain continuously illuminated. replacement equipment that is not of the significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, This sequence will continue upon same size, type, and/or style. Aftermarket when the low tire pressure telltale subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as wheels can cause sensor damage. Using illuminates, you should stop and check the malfunction exists. When the aftermarket tire sealants may cause the your tires as soon as possible and inflate malfunction indicator is illuminated, the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) them to the proper pressure. Driving on a system may not be able to detect or sensor to become inoperable. After using an significantly under-inflated tire causes signal low tire pressure as intended. aftermarket tire sealant it is recommended the tire to overheat and can lead to tire TPMS malfunctions may occur for a that you take your vehicle to an authorized failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel variety of reasons, including the dealership to have your sensor function checked. efficiency and tire tread life, and may installation of replacement or alternate affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping tires or wheels on the vehicle that ability. prevent the TPMS from functioning

67 Warning Light What It Means What To Do

Tire Pressure Low In any situation in which the message on the display is "See The indicator light will illuminate to indicate that the tire Manual", it is ESSENTIAL to refer to “Auxiliary Driving pressure is lower than the recommended value and/or that Systems” in “Safety,” strictly complying with the slow pressure loss is occurring. In these cases, optimal tire indications that you find there. duration and fuel consumption may not be guaranteed. ELECTRONIC STABILITY CONTROL (ESC) INDICATOR LIGHT When the ignition is cycled to ON, the indicator light illuminates, but should turn off as soon as the engine is started. ESC System Intervention: Intervention by the system is indicated by the flashing of the indicator light: it indicates that the vehicle is in critical stability and grip conditions.

ESC System Failure: If the indicator light does not turn off, or if it stays on with the engine running, a failure was found in the ESC system. In these cases, contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible. Hill Start Assist System Failure: The illumination of the indicator light indicates a Hill Start Assist system failure. ELECTRONIC STABILITY CONTROL (ESC) OFF INDICATOR LIGHT When the ignition is cycled to ON, the indicator light illuminates, but should turn off as soon as the engine is started. GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL The indicator light illuminates to indicate that some active safety systems have been partially or totally deactivated. For further details about the active safety systems, refer to “Active Safety Systems” in “Safety.” When the active safety systems are reactivated, the indicator light turns off.

68 Warning Light What It Means What To Do

REAR FOG LIGHT The indicator illuminates when the rear fog light is activated.

ENGINE CHECK/MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LIGHT (MIL) In normal conditions, when the ignition is cycled to ON, the Under these conditions, the vehicle can continue travelling indicator light illuminates, but it should turn off as soon as at moderate speed but without demanding excessive the engine is started. effort from the engine or high speed. Prolonged use of the The operation of the indicator light may be checked by the vehicle with the indicator light on constantly may cause traffic police using specific devices. Comply with the laws damage. Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible. and regulations of the country where you are driving.

Caution!

If, turning the ignition device to ON, the warning light does not turn on or if it turns on steadily or flashing when travelling (on some versions together with the message on the display), contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.

Warning Light What It Means What To Do

FORWARD COLLISION WARNING SYSTEM (FCW) Drive carefully and contact an authorized dealer as soon This indicator light informs the driver that the frontal as possible. collision alarm function is not enabled.

FUEL RESERVE / LIMITED RANGE The indicator light (or the symbol in the display) illuminates Refuel the vehicle. when about 2.4 gallons (9 liters) of fuel is left in the tank.

Warning!

If the warning light (or the icon on the display) flashes while driving, contact an authorized dealer. 69 Green Telltale Indicator Lights

Indicator light What It Means What To Do PARK/HEADLIGHT ON INDICATOR LIGHT This indicator will illuminate when the park lights or headlights are turned on. Headlight Off Delay This function allows the headlights to remain on for 30, 60 or 90 seconds after the ignition was placed in the STOP position. LEFTTURN SIGNAL The instrument cluster directional arrow will flash independently for the left turn signal as selected, as well as the exterior turn signal lamp(s) (front and rear) as selected when the multifunction lever is moved down (left). This directional arrow will flash in conjunction with the right directional arrow when the hazard warning light button is pushed. RIGHTTURN SIGNAL The instrument cluster directional arrow will flash independently for the right turn signal as selected, as well as the exterior turn signal lamp(s) (front and rear) as selected when the multifunction lever is moved up (right). This directional arrow will flash in conjunction with the left directional arrow when the hazard warning light button is

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL pushed.

AUTOMATIC HIGH BEAM HEADLIGHTS — IF EQUIPPED This indicator light will illuminate when the automatic high beam headlights are activated.

70 Blue Telltale Indicator Light

Indicator Light What It Means What To Do HIGH BEAM HEADLIGHTS This indicator shows that the high beam headlights are on. Push the multifunction control lever away from you to switch the headlights to high beam. Push the lever a second time to switch the headlights back to low beam. Pull the lever toward you for a temporary high beam on, “flash to pass” scenario.

Red Symbols

Symbol What It Means What To Do LOW ENGINE OIL PRESSURE This telltale indicates low engine oil pressure. If the telltale turns on while driving, stop the vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible. A chime will sound when this telltale turns on. Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected. This telltale does not indicate how much oil is in the engine. The engine oil level must be checked under the hood. Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible. Note: Do not use the vehicle until the failure has been solved. The illumination of the telltale does not indicate the amount of oil in the engine: the oil level can be checked on the display upon entering the vehicle and also by activating the "Oil level" function on the Information and Entertainment System. The oil level can also be checked manually.

71 Caution!

If the LOW ENGINE OIL PRESSURE symbol switches on when driving, stop the engine immediately and contact an authorized dealer.

Symbol What It Means What To Do In normal driving conditions: stop the vehicle, turn off the engine and check that the coolant level in the reservoir is not below the MIN mark. In this case, wait for the engine to cool down, then slowly and carefully open the cap, top ENGINE TEMPERATUREWARNING LIGHT up with coolant and check that the level is between the This telltale warns of an overheated engine condition. If MIN and MAX marks on the reservoir itself. Also check the engine coolant temperature is too high, this indicator visually for any fluid leaks. Contact an authorized dealer if will illuminate and a single chime will sound. If the the telltale comes on when the engine is started again. temperature reaches the upper limit, a continuous chime If the vehicle is used under demanding conditions (e.g. in will be sound for 4 minutes or until the engine is allowed high-performance driving): slow down and, if the telltale to cool whichever comes first. stays on, stop the vehicle. Stop for two or three minutes with the engine running and slightly accelerated to facilitate better coolant circulation, then turn the engine off. Check that the coolant level is correct as described above. POWER STEERING FAILURE If the telltale remains on, you could not have steering Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible. assistance and the effort required to operate the steering GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL wheel could be increased; steering is, however, possible. DOOR OPEN INDICATOR LIGHT The telltale illuminates when one or more doors are not Close the doors properly. completely shut. An acoustic signal is activated with the doors open and the vehicle moving.

72 Symbol What It Means What To Do HOOD OPEN INDICATOR LIGHT The telltale turns on when the hood is not properly closed, along with the icon, an image of the vehicle with an open Close the hood properly. hood appears on the display. A buzzer is heard when the hood is open and the vehicle is moving. TRUNK LID OPEN INDICATOR LIGHT The telltale turns on when the trunk lid is not properly closed, along with the icon, an image of the vehicle with an Close the trunk lid properly. open trunk lid appears on the display. A buzzer is heard when the trunk lid is open and the vehicle is moving.

AUTOMATICTRANSMISSION FAILURE The telltale illuminates, together with a buzzer warning, to Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible. indicate that the automatic transmission is faulty.

Caution!

Driving the vehicle with this symbol on may severely damage the gearbox, with resulting breakage. The oil may also overheat: contact with hot engine or with exhaust components at high temperature could cause fires.

Symbol What It Means What To Do ELECTRONIC THROTTLE CONTROL (ETC) WARNING LIGHTS Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible. This telltale, along with the related message, signals a failure in the electronic throttle control system (ETC).

73 Symbol What It Means What To Do Place the ignition in the off position and the shift selector in the park position: the telltale should turn off. If the If a failure is detected, the telltale illuminates while the telltale stays on with engine running the vehicle can still engine is running. be driven. Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the failure eliminated. If the telltale flashes with the engine running, immediate intervention is required. A loss of performance, Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible to have irregular/high idling speed or engine stopping might take the failure eliminated. place and the vehicle may need to be towed. LOW ENGINE OIL LEVEL This telltale appears on the panel when the engine oil level falls below the minimum recommended value. Contact an authorized dealer to have the system checked. The level must also be checked using the dipstick in the engine compartment (see chapter "Servicing and Maintenance.")

ALFA STEERING TORQUE (AST) FAILURE The illumination of the telltale signals a failure in the Contact an authorized dealer to have the system checked. automatic steering correction system.

ALTERNATOR FAILURE The illumination of the telltale with engine on Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible. corresponds to an alternator failure. GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

74 Amber Symbols

Symbol What It Means What To Do ENGINE IMMOBILIZER FAILURE / BREAK-IN ATTEMPT

Engine Immobilizer System Failure Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible. The telltale will illuminate to report a failure of the Engine Immobilizer system.

Break-In Attempt The telltale will illuminate when the ignition is cycled to ON position, to indicate a possible break-in attempt detected by the alarm system. Electronic Key Not Recognized The telltale will illuminate when the engine is started and the electronic key is not recognized by the system. Alarm System Failure The telltale will illuminate to report an alarm system failure.

For reactivating the fuel cut-off system, refer to FUEL CUT-OFF INDICATOR LIGHT “Enhanced Accident Response System” in “Occupant The telltale will illuminate after an accident has occurred Restraint Systems" in "Safety” for further information. If it and the system has shut the fuel off. is not possible to restore the fuel supply, contact an authorized dealer.

PARK SENSORS SYSTEM FAILURE The telltale will illuminate when the system has failed or is Contact an authorized dealer to have the system checked. not available.

POSSIBLE ICE ON ROAD The telltale will illuminate when the outside temperature falls to or below 37°F (3°C).

75 Symbol What It Means What To Do ENGINE OIL CHANGE REQUIRED — IF EQUIPPED The telltale is illuminated only for a limited time. Note: After the first indication, each time the engine is started the symbol will continue to illuminate as described above until the oil is changed. Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible. If the telltale flashes, this does not mean that there is a fault on the vehicle, rather it simply reports that it is now necessary to change the oil as a result of regular use of the vehicle. The deterioration of engine oil is accelerated by using the vehicle for short drives, preventing the engine from reaching operating temperature.

Caution!

Deteriorated engine oil should be replaced as soon as possible after the symbol is switched on, and never more than 500 miles (805 km) after it first switches on. Failure to observe the above may result in severe damage to the engine and invalidate the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. When this symbol comes on, it does not mean that the level of engine oil is low, so if it flashes you do not need to top up the engine oil.

Symbol What It Means What To Do

ENGINE OIL PRESSURE SENSOR FAILURE GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL The telltale will illuminate in the event of engine oil Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible. pressure sensor failure.

ENGINE OIL LEVEL SENSOR FAILURE The telltale will illuminate in the event of engine oil level Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible. sensor failure.

76 Symbol What It Means What To Do FORWARD COLLISION WARNING (FCW) SYSTEM FAILURE Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible. The telltale will illuminate in the case of failure of the Forward Collision Warning system.

START/STOP SYSTEM FAILURE Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible to have This telltale will illuminate to report a Stop/Start system the failure eliminated. failure.

RAIN SENSOR FAILURE The telltale will illuminate in the case of failure of the Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible. automatic windshield wiper.

DUSK SENSOR FAILURE The telltale will illuminate in the case of failure of the Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible. automatic low beam alignment.

BLIND SPOT MONITORING SYSTEM FAILURE The telltale will illuminate in the event of a Blind Spot Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible. Monitoring system failure.

FUEL LEVEL SENSOR FAILURE The telltale will illuminate in the event of fuel level sensor Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible. failure.

EXTERIOR LIGHTS FAILURE The telltale will illuminate to indicate a failure on the The failure may be caused by a blown bulb, a blown following lights: daytime running lights (DRLs) / parking protection fuse, or an interruption of the electrical lights / trailer turn signal indicators (if present) / trailer connection. lights (if present) / side lights / turn signal indicators / Replace the bulb or the relevant fuse. Contact an rear fog light / reversing light / brake lights / license plate authorized dealer. lights.

77 Symbol What It Means What To Do

KEYLESS SYSTEM FAILURE The telltale will illuminate in the event of keyless system Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible. failure.

FUEL CUT-OFF SYSTEM FAILURE The telltale will illuminate in the event of fuel cut-off Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible. system failure.

LANE DEPARTURE WARNING (LDW) SYSTEM FAILURE The telltale will illuminate in the event of a fault in the Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible. Lane Departure Warning system.

AUTOMATIC HIGH BEAM HEADLIGHTS FAILURE — IF EQUIPPED Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible to have The telltale will illuminate to report a failure of the the failure eliminated. automatic high beam headlights. GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

78 Symbol What It Means What To Do AUTOMATICTRANSMISSION FLUID OVERHEATING The telltale will illuminate in the case of transmission Wait for the telltale to turn off with the engine off or overheating, after a particularly demanding use. In this idling. case an engine performance limitation is carried out.

AUDIO SYSTEM FAILURE Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible to have The telltale will illuminate to report a failure of the audio the failure eliminated. system.

SPEED LIMITER SYSTEM FAILURE Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible to have While driving, the telltale will illuminate to signal a Speed the failure eliminated. Limiter system failure.

LOOSE FUEL FILLER CAP Lights up if the fuel tank cap is open or not properly Tighten the cap properly. closed.

ELECTRIC PARK BRAKE FAILURE The telltale will illuminate and a message will display to signal a failure in the electric park brake system. If you are still able to drive the vehicle (park brake is not This failure may partially or completely block the vehicle engaged), drive to the nearest authorized dealer and because the park brake could remain activated even if remember, when executing any maneuvers/commands, automatically or manually disengaged using the relevant that the electric park brake is not operational. controls. In these circumstances, you can disengage the park brake following the emergency disengagement procedure described in “In Case Of Emergency.”

Warning!

If a failure is present with sharp braking, the rear wheels may lock and the vehicle may swerve.

79 Symbol What It Means What To Do

LOW COOLANT LEVEL — IF EQUIPPED This telltale will illuminate to indicate that the vehicle Top up, as described in "Servicing And Maintenance.” coolant level is low.

SERVICE ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM This light will illuminate when the Adaptive Cruise Control Contact an authorized dealer to have the system checked. (ACC) is not operating and needs service.

Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible. WEAR ON BRAKE PADS Note: This light will illuminate when the brake pads have Always use genuine parts or similar because the reached their wear limit. Integrated Brake System (IBS) system could detect anomalies. Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible. WEAR ON CCB BRAKE DISCS — IF EQUIPPED Warning! This light will illuminate when the carbon ceramic brake It is recommended to use only OEM brake pads in order discs have reached their wear limit. to ensure the original performance of the braking system.

Symbol What It Means What To Do

DYNAMIC DRIVE CONTROL SYSTEM FAILURE The telltale will illuminate to signal a failure in the

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL dynamic drive control system.

WINDSHIELD WIPER FAILURE Contact an authorized dealer. Signals a windshield wiper failure.

80 Symbol What It Means What To Do

GENERIC INDICATION Signals information and failures. The accompanying messages describe the failure.

FOUR WHEEL DRIVE FAILURE Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible to have This telltale will illuminate to report a four wheel drive the failure eliminated. system failure.

AFS SYSTEM FAILURE The telltale will illuminate to indicate the automatic Go to an authorized dealer to have the system checked. directional light system failure.

SOFT SUSPENSION CALIBRATION INSERTION — IF EQUIPPED The telltale will illuminate when the most comfortable suspension setting is activated.

SHOCK ABSORBERS FAILURE (ADC) — IF EQUIPPED While driving, if the telltale illuminates, it signals a failure Contact an authorized dealer to have the system checked. in the suspension system.

To refill the liquid, refer to “Engine Compartment” in WINDSHIELD WASHER LIQUID LEVEL “Servicing And Maintenance.” Always use liquid with the The telltale will illuminate to indicate that the level of the features indicated in the “Fluids And Lubricants” section windshield and headlight washing fluid (if any) is low. in “Technical Specifications.”

81 Green Symbols

Symbol What It Means

HEADLIGHTS The telltale will illuminate when the headlights are turned on.

AUTOMATIC HEADLIGHTS The symbol lights up when the automatic headlights are on.

START/STOP OPERATION The telltale will illuminate in the case of Start/Stop system intervention (stopping the engine). When the engine is restarted, the telltale will shut off (for the engine restarting modes refer to “Stop/Start” in “Starting And Operating”).

SPEED CONTROL ACTIVATED The telltale will illuminate when the Speed Control system is activated.

ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED The symbol comes on when the Adaptive Cruise Control system is activated.

Blue Symbols

Symbol What it means GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

AUTOMATIC HIGH BEAM HEADLIGHTS — IF EQUIPPED The telltale will illuminate when the automatic high beam headlights are activated.

HIGH BEAM HEADLIGHTS The telltale will illuminate when the high beam headlights are activated.

82 ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II) EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND SYSTEM Cybersecurity MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS Operation Yourvehicle is required to have an In some localities, it may be a legal The OBD (Onboard Diagnostic system) Onboard Diagnostic system (OBD II) and requirement to pass an inspection of your carries out a continuous diagnosis of the a connection port to allow access to vehicle's emissions control system. components of the vehicle related to information related to the performance Failure to pass could prevent vehicle emissions. of your emissions controls. Authorized registration. service technicians may need to access For states that require It also alerts the driver of when these this information to assist with the components are no longer in peak an Inspection and diagnosis and service of your vehicle and Maintenance (I/M), this condition by switching on the warning emissions system. light on the instrument panel (see check verifies the “Warning Lights And Messages” “Malfunction Indicator paragraph in this chapter). Warning! Light (MIL)” is functioning and is not on The aim of the OBD system (Onboard when the engine is running, and that the Diagnostic) is to: OBD II system is ready for testing. ONLYan authorized service technician Normally, the OBD II system will be ready. Monitor the efficiency of the system should connect equipment to the OBD II The OBD II system may not be ready if Indicate an increase in emissions connection port in order to diagnose or service your vehicle. your vehicle was recently serviced, Indicate the need to replace damaged recently had a dead battery or a battery components If unauthorized equipment is connected to replacement. If the OBD II system should the OBD II connection port, such as a be determined not ready for the I/M test, driver-behavior tracking device, it may: The vehicle also has a connector, which your vehicle may fail the test. can interface with appropriate tools, that Be possible that vehicle systems, makes it possible to read the error codes Yourvehicle has a simple ignition including safety related systems, could be actuated test, which you can use prior to stored in the electronic control units impaired or a loss of vehicle control could together with a series of specific occur that may result in an accident going to the test station. To check if your parameters for engine operation and involving serious injury or death. vehicle's OBD II system is ready, you must do the following: diagnosis. This check can be carried out Access, or allow others to access, by your authorized dealer. information stored in your vehicle systems, 1. Cycle the ignition switch to the ON Note: After eliminating a fault, to check including personal information. position, but do not crank or start the the system completely, your authorized engine. dealer is obliged to run tests and, if necessary certain road tests. Note: If you crank or start the engine, you will have to start this test over.

83 2. As soon as you cycle the ignition Regardless of whether your vehicle's switch to the ON position, you will see the OBD II system is ready or not, if the MIL is “Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)” illuminated during normal vehicle symbol come on as part of a normal bulb operation you should have your vehicle check. serviced before going to the I/M station. The I/M station can fail your vehicle 3. Approximately 15 seconds later, one because the MIL is on with the engine of two things will happen: running. The MIL will flash for about ten seconds and then return to being fully illuminated until you turn OFF the ignition or start the engine. This means that your vehicle's OBD II system is not ready and you should not proceed to the I/M station. The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully illuminated until you place the ignition in the off position or start the engine. This means that your vehicle's OBD II system is ready and you can proceed to the I/M station. If your OBD II system is not ready, you should see an authorized dealer or repair facility. If your vehicle was recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement, you may need to do nothing more than drive your vehicle as you

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL normally would in order for your OBD II system to update. A recheck with the above test routine may then indicate that the system is now ready.

84 SAFETY

This very important section describes ACTIVE SAFETY SYSTEMS ...... 86 the safety systems that your vehicle is AUXILIARY DRIVING SYSTEMS ....89 equipped with, and provides instructions OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS . .97 on how to use them correctly. SAFETYTIPS ...... 121

85 ACTIVE SAFETY SYSTEMS surface where the grip of the left and can it increase braking or steering efficiency The vehicle may be equipped with the right wheels varies, such as in a corner. beyond that afforded by the condition of the following active safety devices: The Electronic Braking Force Distribution vehicle brakes and tires or the traction afforded. Anti-Lock Braking (ABS) System (EBD) system works with the ABS,

SAFETY allowing the brake force to be distributed Drive Train Control (DTC) System The ABS cannot prevent collisions, between the front and rear wheels. including those resulting from excessive Electronic Stability Control (ESC) System Intervention speed in turns, following another vehicle too System closely, or hydroplaning. The ABS equipped on this vehicle is Traction Control System (TCS) provided with the "Brake-by-wire" The capabilities of an ABS equipped Panic Brake Assist (PBA) System (Integrated Brake System - IBS) function. vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner that could jeopardize Hill Start Assist (HSA) System With this system, the command given by the user’s safety or the safety of others. pressing the brake pedal is not Dynamic Steering Torque (DST) transmitted hydraulically, but electrically. System Therefore, the light pulsation that is felt Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Active TorqueVectoring (ATV) System on the pedal with the traditional system System For the operation of the systems, see the is no longer noticeable. The ESC system improves the directional following pages. control and stability of the vehicle in various driving conditions. Anti-Lock Braking (ABS) System Warning! The ESC system corrects the vehicle’s An integral part of the braking system, understeer and oversteer, distributing the ABS prevents one or more wheels the brake force on the appropriate from locking and slipping in all road The ABS contains sophisticated wheels. The torque supplied by the surface conditions, regardless of the electronic equipment that may be susceptible to interference caused by engine can also be reduced in order to intensity of the braking action. The improperly installed or high output radio maintain control of the vehicle. system ensures that the vehicle can be transmitting equipment. This interference The ESC system uses sensors installed controlled even during emergency can cause possible loss of anti-lock braking on the vehicle to determine the path that braking, allowing the driver to optimize capability. Installation of such equipment the driver intends to follow and stopping distances. should be performed by qualified compares it with the vehicle’s effective The system intervenes during braking professionals. path. When the real path deviates from when the wheels are about to lock, Pumping of the Anti-Lock Brakes will the desired path, the ESC system typically in emergency braking or diminish their effectiveness and may lead to a intervenes to counter the vehicle’s low-grip conditions where locking may be collision. Pumping makes the stopping distance understeer or oversteer. more frequent. longer. Just press firmly on your brake pedal when you need to slow down or stop. Oversteer occurs when the vehicle is The system also improves control and turning more than it should according to stability of the vehicle when braking on a The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws the angle of the steering wheel. of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor 86 Understeer occurs when the vehicle is modification or poor vehicle maintenance Panic Brake Assist (PBA) System turning less than it should according to that reduces the effectiveness of the ESC The PBA system is designed to improve system can increase the risk of loss of the angle of the steering wheel. vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal the vehicle’s braking capacity during injury and death. emergency braking. System Intervention The system detects emergency braking The intervention of the system is by monitoring the speed and force with indicated by the flashing of the ESC Traction Control System (TCS) which the brake pedal is pressed, and warning light on the instrument panel, to The system automatically operates in the consequently applies the optimal brake inform the driver that the vehicle event of slipping, loss of grip on wet pressure. This can reduce the braking stability and grip are critical. roads (hydroplaning), and acceleration on distance: the PBA system therefore one or both drive wheels on roads that complements the ABS. are slippery, snowy, icy, etc. Depending Warning! Maximum assistance from the PBA on the slipping conditions, two different system is obtained by pressing the brake control systems are activated: pedal very quickly. In addition, the brake Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot If the slipping involves both drive pedal should be pressed continuously prevent the natural laws of physics from acting wheels, the system intervenes, reducing during braking, avoiding intermittent on the vehicle, nor can it increase the traction the power transmitted by the engine. presses, to get the most out of the afforded by prevailing road conditions. ESC If the slipping only involves one of the system. Do not reduce pressure on the cannot prevent accidents, including those brake pedal until braking is no longer resulting from excessive speed in turns, driving drive wheels, the Brake Limited necessary. on very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. ESC Differential (BLD) function is activated, also cannot prevent accidents resulting from automatically braking the wheel which is The PBA system is deactivated when the loss of vehicle control due to inappropriate brake pedal is released. driver input for the conditions. Only a safe, slipping (the behavior of a self-locking attentive, and skillful driver can prevent differential is simulated). This will accidents. The capabilities of an ESC equipped increase the engine torque transferred to vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or the wheel which isn't slipping. dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of others. System Intervention Vehicle modifications, or failure to The intervention of the system is properly maintain your vehicle, may change indicated by the flashing of the ESC the handling characteristics of your vehicle, warning light on the instrument panel, to and may negatively affect the performance inform the driver that the vehicle of the ESC system. Changes to the steering stability and grip are critical. system, suspension, braking system, tire type and size or wheel size may adversely affect ESC performance. Improperly inflated and unevenly worn tires may also degrade ESC performance. Any vehicle 87 allowing your right foot to be moved system controls the steering through the easily from the brake pedal to the DST function to implement an additional Warning! accelerator. torque contribution on the steering wheel The system will automatically deactivate in order to suggest the most correct The Panic Brake Assist (PBA) cannot prevent maneuver to the driver.

SAFETY after two seconds without starting, the natural laws of physics from acting on gradually releasing the braking pressure. The coordinated action of the brakes and the vehicle, nor can it increase the traction During this release stage, it is possible to steering increases the sensation of afforded by prevailing road conditions. PBA hear a typical mechanical brake release safety and control of the vehicle. cannot prevent collisions, including those noise, indicating the imminent movement resulting from excessive speed in turns, Note: The DST feature is only meant to driving on very slippery surfaces, or of the vehicle. help the driver realize the correct course hydroplaning. The capabilities of a of action through small torques on the PBA-equipped vehicle must never be steering wheel, which means the exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner, Warning! effectiveness of the DST feature is highly which could jeopardize the user's safety or dependent on the driver’s sensitivity and the safety of others. overall reaction to the applied torque. It There may be situations where the Hill Start is very important to realize that this Assist (HSA) will not activate and slight Hill Start Assist (HSA) System rolling may occur, such as on minor hills or feature will not steer the vehicle, This is an integral part of the ESC system with a loaded vehicle, or while pulling a meaning the driver is still responsible for and facilitates starting on slopes, trailer. HSA is not a substitute for active steering the vehicle. activating automatically in the following driving involvement. It is always the driver’s Active Torque Vectoring (ATV) System cases: responsibility to be attentive to distance to other vehicles, people, and objects, and most The dynamic drive control is used to Uphill: vehicle stationary on a road importantly brake operation to ensure safe optimize and balance the drive torque with a gradient higher than 5%, engine operation of the vehicle under all road between the wheels of the same axles. running, brake pressed and transmission conditions. Yourcomplete attention is The ATVsystem improves the grip in in NEUTRAL (N) or gear other than always required while driving to maintain turns, sending more drive torque to the safe control of your vehicle. Failure to follow external wheel. REVERSE (R) engaged. these warnings can result in a collision or Downhill: vehicle stationary on a road serious personal injury. Given that, in a turn, the external wheels with a gradient higher than 5%, engine of the car travel more than the internal ones and therefore turn faster, sending a running, brake pressed and reverse gear Dynamic Steering Torque (DST) System higher thrust to the external rear wheel engaged. The DST function uses the integration of allows for the car to be more stable and When setting off, the ESC system control the ESC system with the electric power to not suffer an "understeer" condition. unit maintains the braking pressure on steering to increase the safety level of Understeer occurs when the vehicle is the wheels until the engine torque the whole vehicle. turning less than appropriate for the necessary for starting is reached, or in In critical situations (braking on surfaces steering wheel position. any case for a maximum of two seconds, with different grip conditions), the ESC 88 AUXILIARY DRIVING SYSTEMS While driving, the system monitors the detection area from three different The following auxiliary driving systems points (side, rear and front) to check are standard in this vehicle: whether an alert needs to be sent to the Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) driver. The system can detect the presence of a vehicle in one of these Forward Collision Warning (FCW) three areas. Tire Pressure Monitoring System Note: (TPMS) The system does not alert the driver Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) System for the presence of fixed object (e.g. 06016S0002EM The Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) system BSM Indicator Light safety barriers, poles, walls, etc.). uses two radar sensors, located in the However, in some circumstances, the rear bumper (one for each side), to detect When the engine is started the warning system may activate in the presence of the presence of other vehicles in the rear light turns on to signal the driver that the these objects. This is normal and does side blind spots of your vehicle. system is active. not indicate a system malfunction. Sensors The system does not alert the driver The sensors are activated when any about the presence of vehicles coming forward gear is engaged at a speed from the opposite direction, in the higher than 6 mph (10 km/h) or when adjacent lanes. REVERSE is engaged. The sensors are temporarily deactivated when the vehicle is in PARK. Warning! The detection area of the system covers approximately one lane on both sides of The Blind Spot Monitoring system is only an the vehicle. aid to help detect objects in the blind spot 06016S0001EM This area begins from the door mirror and zones. The BSM system is not designed to Rear Sensor Location extends for 19 ft (6 m) towards the rear detect pedestrians, bicyclists, or animals. The system warns the driver about the part of the vehicle. Even if your vehicle is equipped with the When the sensors are active, the system BSM system, always check your vehicle’s presence of other vehicles in the mirrors, glance over your shoulder, and use detection area by illuminating the monitors the detection areas on both your turn signal before changing lanes. warning light located within the door sides of the vehicle and warns the driver Failure to do so can result in serious injury or mirror on the side in which the other about the possible presence of vehicles death. vehicle was detected. in these areas.

89 Rear View Note: Operating Mode The system detects vehicles coming from If the sensors are covered by objects The system may be activated/ the rear part of your vehicle on both sides or vehicles, the system will not warn the deactivated via the Information and and entering the rear detection area with driver. Entertainment System. To access the

SAFETY a difference in speed of less than 31 mph function, select the following items on (50 km/h) with relation to your vehicle. For the system to operate correctly, the main menu in sequence: the rear bumper area where the radar Overtaking Vehicles sensors are located must stay free from 1. “Settings.” If another vehicle is overtaken slowly, snow, ice and dirt gathered from the 2. “Safety.” with a difference in speed of less than road surface. 15 mph (25 km/h) and the vehicle stays in 3. “Blind Spot Alert.” the blind spot for approximately Do not cover the rear bumper area 1.5 seconds, the warning light on the door where the radar sensors are located with "Blind Spot Alert” Visual Mode mirror of the corresponding side any object (e.g. adhesives, bike rack, When the system is enabled, the warning illuminates. etc.). light within the door mirror on the side of If the difference in speed between the the detected object illuminates. two vehicles is greater than 15 mph Warning! The visual warning on the mirror will blink (25 km/h), the warning light will not if the driver activates the turn signals, illuminate. indicating a lane change. Rear Cross Path Detection (RCP) is not a The warning will be fixed if the driver Rear Cross Path Detection (RCP) back up aid system. It is intended to be used System to help a driver detect an oncoming vehicle in stays in the same lane. This system helps the driver during a parking lot situation. Drivers must be "Blind Spot Alert" Function reverse maneuvers in the case of reduced careful when backing up, even when using Deactivation visibility. RCP.Always check carefully behind your vehicle, look behind you, and be sure to check When the system is deactivated ("Blind The RCP system monitors the rear for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, Spot Alert" mode off), the BSM or RCP detection areas on both sides of the obstructions, and blind spots before backing systems will not emit an acoustic or a vehicle to detect objects moving towards up. Failure to do so can result in serious visual warning. the sides of the vehicle, with a minimum injury or death. The BSM system will store the operating speed between 1 mph (1 km/h) and mode running when the engine was 2 mph (3 km/h) and objects moving at a stopped. Each time the engine is started, maximum speed of 21 mph (35 km/h), in the operating mode stored previously will areas such as parking lots. be recalled and used. The system activation is signaled to the driver by an acoustic warning.

90 General Information detected (limited braking). Signals and limited braking are intended to allow the The following regulatory statement driver time to intervene. applies to all Radio Frequency (RF) In situations with the risk of collision, if devices equipped in this vehicle: the system detects no intervention by This device complies with Part 15 of the the driver, it provides automatic braking FCC Rules and with Industry Canada to help slow the vehicle and mitigate the license-exempt RSS standard(s). potential front end collision (automatic Operation is subject to the following two braking). If intervention by the driver on conditions: the brake pedal is detected, but not 1. This device may not cause harmful 06016S0003EM deemed sufficient, the system may interference. Front Bumper Radar Location intervene in order to improve the reaction of the braking system by 2. This device must accept any reducing vehicle speed further interference received, including (additional assistance in braking stage). interference that may cause undesired The system will intervene automatically operation. in case of imminent collision or impact Note: Changes or modifications not against a pedestrian crossing the road expressly approved by the party (speed under 31 mph (50 km/h)). responsible for compliance could void the Note: For safety reasons, when the user’s authority to operate the vehicle has stopped, the brake calipers equipment. may remain blocked for about two Forward Collision Warning (FCW) seconds. Make sure to press the brake System pedal if the vehicle moves slightly 06016S0004EM forward. This is a driving assistance system which Windshield Camera Location uses a radar located behind the front In the event of an imminent collision, the bumper and a camera located in the Warning! central part of the windshield. system intervenes by automatically braking the vehicle to prevent the collision or reduce its effects. Forward Collision Warning (FCW) is not The system provides the driver with intended to avoid a collision on its own, nor audible and visual signals through can FCW detect every type of potential dedicated messages on the instrument collision. The driver has the responsibility to cluster display. avoid a collision by controlling the vehicle via braking and steering. Failure to follow this The system may lightly brake to warn the warning could lead to serious injury or death. driver if a potential front end collision is 91 Engagement/Disengagement Activation/Deactivation The default setting is "Med". With this The following functions can be selected The Forward Collision Warning system is setting, the system warns the driver of a in sequence using the Information and activated whenever the engine is started possible collision with the vehicle in front Entertainment System: regardless of what is shown on the when that vehicle is at a standard distance, between that of the other two

SAFETY Information and Entertainment System. 1. “Settings.” Following a deactivation, the system will settings. 2. “Safety.” not warn the driver about the possible With the system sensitivity set to "Far", collision with the preceding vehicle, the system will warn the driver of a 3. “Forward Collision Warning.” regardless of the setting selected with possible collision with the vehicle in front 4. “Mode.” the Information and Entertainment when that vehicle is at a greater distance, System. thus providing the possibility of acting on Select from among three operating the brakes more lightly and gradually. modes: Note: Each time the engine is started, the system is activated regardless of This setting provides the drivers with the Warning And Brake: the system (if what setting was selected when the maximum possible reaction time to active), in addition to the visual and engine was turned OFF. prevent a potential collision. audible warnings, provides limited The system is active: With the option set to "Near", the system braking, automatic braking, and will alert the driver of a possible collision additional assistance in braking stage Each time the engine is started. with the vehicle in front when that vehicle where the driver does not brake In the Information and Entertainment is close. This setting offers the driver a sufficiently in the event of a potential System. lower reaction time compared to the front end collision. "Med" and "Far" settings, in the event of a When the ignition is in the ON position. potential collision, but permits more Only Warning: the system (if active), dynamic driving of the vehicle. does not provide limited braking, but The vehicle speed is between 4 mph guarantees automatic braking or (7 km/h) and 124 mph (200 km/h). The system sensitivity setting is kept in additional assistance in braking stage the memory when the engine is turned When the front seat belts are OFF. where the driver does not brake at all or fastened. not sufficiently enough in the event of a System Limited Operation Signal potential front end collision. Changing The System Sensitivity If a dedicated message is displayed, a The sensitivity of the system can be condition limiting the system operation Disabled: the system does not provide changed through the Information and may have occurred. The possible reasons visual and audible warnings, limited Entertainment System menu, choosing of this limitation are if something is braking, automatic braking, or additional from one of the following three options: blocking the camera view, or a fault is assistance in braking stage. The system "Near", "Med" or "Far". Refer to the present. will therefore provide no indication of a description in the Information and possible collision. If an obstruction is signaled, clean the Entertainment System Supplement for area of the windshield. how to change the settings. 92 Although the vehicle can still be driven in In certain cases, this dedicated message Driving In Special Conditions normal conditions, the system may be not could be displayed when the radar is not In certain driving conditions, system completely available. detecting any vehicles or objects within intervention might be unexpected or When the conditions limiting the system its view range. delayed. The driver must therefore be very functions end, this will go back to normal If atmospheric conditions are not the careful, keeping control of the vehicle. and complete operation. Should the fault reason behind this message, check if the Driving close to a bend. persist, contact your authorized dealer. sensor is dirty. It could be necessary to The vehicle ahead is leaving a clean or remove any obstructions in the System Failure Signaling roundabout. area. If the system turns off and a dedicated Vehicles with small dimensions and/or If the message appears frequently, even message is shown on the display, it not aligned in the driving lane. means that there is a fault with the in the absence of atmospheric conditions Lane change by other vehicles. system. such as snow, rain, mud or other Vehicles traveling at right angles to the In this case, it is still possible to drive the obstructions, contact your authorized vehicle. vehicle, but you are advised to contact an dealer for a sensor alignment check. authorized dealer as soon as possible. In the absence of visible obstructions, Note: In particularly complex traffic Radar Indication Not Available manually removing the decorative cover conditions, the driver can deactivate the trim and cleaning the radar surface could system manually through the Information If conditions are such that the radar be required. Have this operation and Entertainment System. cannot detect obstacles correctly, the performed at your authorized dealer. system is deactivated and a dedicated Driving Close To A Bend message appears on the display. This Note: It is recommended that you do not When entering or leaving a wide bend, the generally occurs in the event of poor install devices, accessories, or system may detect a vehicle in front you, visibility, such as when it is snowing or aerodynamic attachments in front of the but not in the same driving lane. In cases raining heavily. sensor or darken it in any way, as this can such as these, the system may intervene. compromise the correct functioning of The function of this system can also be the system. temporarily reduced due to obstructions such as mud, dirt or ice on the bumper. In Frontal Collision Alarm With Active such cases, a dedicated message will be Braking shown on the display and the system will If this function is selected, the brakes are be deactivated. This message can operated to reduce the speed of the sometimes appear in conditions of high vehicle in the event of potential collision. reflectivity (e.g. tunnels with reflective This function applies an additional tiles or ice or snow). When the conditions braking pressure if the braking pressure limiting the system functions end, it will applied by the driver does not suffice to go back to normal and complete prevent potential collision. 06016S0005EM operation. The function is active with speed above Driving Around Wide Curves 4 mph (7 km/h). 93 The Vehicle Ahead Is Leaving A Roundabout On a roundabout, the system could intervene if it detects a vehicle ahead

SAFETY which is leaving the roundabout.

06016S0006EM 06016V0008EM Driving Near Small Vehicles Other Vehicle Passing Through Radar Range Lane Change By Other Vehicles Vehicles suddenly changing lanes to enter the same lane as your vehicle within the Warning! 06016S0010EM operating range of the radar sensor, may Driving In Roundabouts cause the system to intervene. Vehicles With Small Dimensions The system has not been designed to And/Or Not Aligned In The Driving Lane prevent impacts and cannot detect possible conditions leading to an accident in The system cannot detect vehicles in advance. Failure to take into account this front of you but outside the range of the warning may lead to serious or fatal injuries. radar sensor and may therefore not react in the presence of small vehicles, such as The system may activate, assessing the trajectory of the vehicle, for the presence of bicycles or motorcycles. reflecting metal objects different from other vehicles, such as safety barriers, road signs, barriers before parking lots, tollgates, level crossings, gates, railways, objects near road constructions sites or higher than the 06016S0007EM vehicle (e.g. a fly-over). In the same way, the Other Vehicles Changing Lanes system may intervene inside multi-story Vehicles Traveling At Right Angles To parking lots or tunnels, or due to a glare on The Vehicle the road surface. These possible activations are a consequence of the real driving The system may temporarily react to a scenario coverage by the system and must vehicle that is passing through the radar not be regarded as faults. sensor’s operating range at right angles. 94 The system has been designed for road Tire Pressure Monitoring System level. Therefore, if insufficient tire use only. If the vehicle is driven on a track, (TPMS) pressure is indicated by the ( ) warning the system must be deactivated to avoid This vehicle is equipped with a Tire light displaying in the instrument cluster, unnecessary warnings. Automatic Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) that increase the inflation pressure up to the deactivation is signaled by the dedicated sends the inflation pressure information prescribed cold inflation value. warning light/symbol switching on in the of each tire to the control unit, and will The system will automatically update, instrument panel (refer to the instructions in the "Warning Lights And Messages On The signal the driver in the event of and the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Instrument Panel" in "Getting To Know Your insufficient tire pressure. Light” will turn off once the system Instrument Panel" for further information). Tire pressure will vary with temperature receives the updated tire pressures. The by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) for every vehicle may need to be driven for up to 12°F (6.5°C). This means that when the 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in General Information outside temperature decreases, the tire order for the TPMS to receive this The following regulatory statement pressure will also decrease. Tire pressure information. applies to all Radio Frequency (RF) should always be set based on cold Operating Example inflation tire pressure. This is defined as devices equipped in this vehicle: For example, your vehicle may have a the tire pressure after the vehicle has not This device complies with Part 15 of the recommended cold (parked for more than been driven for at least three hours, or FCC Rules and with Industry Canada three hours) placard pressure of 33 psi driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after a license-exempt RSS standard(s). (227 kPa). If the ambient temperature is three hour period. The cold tire inflation Operation is subject to the following two 68°F (20°C), and the measured tire pressure must not exceed the maximum conditions: pressure is 28 psi (193 kPa), a inflation pressure molded into the tire temperature drop to 20°F (-7°C) will 1. This device may not cause harmful sidewall. Refer to “Tires” in “Servicing decrease the tire pressure to interference. And Maintenance” for information on approximately 24 psi (165 kPa). This tire how to properly inflate the vehicle’s tires. pressure is low enough to turn on the 2. This device must accept any The tire pressure will also increase as the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Warning Light.” interference received, including vehicle is driven. This is normal, and there Driving the vehicle may cause the tire interference that may cause undesired should be no adjustment for this pressure to rise to approximately 28 psi operation. increased pressure. (193 kPa), but the “Tire Pressure Note: Changes or modifications not The TPMS will signal the driver if Monitoring Telltale Light” will still be on. expressly approved by the party pressure falls below the warning limit for In this situation, the “Tire Pressure responsible for compliance could void the any reason, including the effects of low Monitoring Warning Light” will turn off user’s authority to operate the temperature and normal loss of pressure only after the tires are inflated to the equipment. from the tire. vehicle’s recommended cold placard The TPMS will stop indicating insufficient pressure value. tire pressure when pressure is equal to or greater than the prescribed cold inflation 95 Insufficient Tire Pressure Indication Accumulation of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel housings. Caution! If an insufficient pressure value is detected on one or more tires, the Using tire chains on the vehicle. warning light in the instrument cluster Using wheels/tires not equipped with

SAFETY The TPMS has been optimized for the will display alongside the dedicated original equipment tires and wheels. TPMS messages, the system will highlight the TPMS sensors. pressures and warning have been tire or tires with insufficient pressure After the punctured tire has been established for the tire size equipped on graphically, and an acoustic signal will be repaired with the original tire sealant your vehicle. Undesirable system operation emitted. or sensor damage may result when using contained in the Tire Repair Kit, the replacement equipment that is not of the In this case, stop the vehicle, check the previous condition must be restored so same size, type, and/or style. The TPM inflation pressure of each tire, and inflate that the warning light is off during sensor is not designed for use on the necessary tire or tires to the correct normal driving. aftermarket wheels and may contribute to a cold inflation pressure value, shown on TPMS Deactivation poor overall system performance or sensor the display or in the dedicated TPMS damage. Customers are encouraged to use menu. The TPMS can be deactivated by OEM wheels to assure proper TPM feature replacing all four wheel and tire operation. Tpms Temporarily Disabled assemblies (road tires) with wheel and Using aftermarket tire sealants may TPMS Check Message tire assemblies that do not have TPMS Sensors, such as when installing winter cause the Tire Pressure Monitoring System When a system fault is detected, the “Tire wheel and tire assemblies on your (TPMS) sensor to become inoperable. After Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will vehicle. using an aftermarket tire sealant it is flash on and off for 75 seconds, and then recommended that you take your vehicle to remain on solid. The system fault will also To deactivate the TPMS, first replace all your authorized dealer to have your sensor four wheel and tire assemblies (road function checked. sound a chime. If the ignition is cycled, this sequence will repeat, provided that tires) with tires not equipped with Tire After inspecting or adjusting the tire the system fault still exists. The “Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPM) Sensors. pressure always reinstall the valve stem Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will Then, drive the vehicle for 20 minutes cap. This will prevent moisture and dirt from turn off when the fault condition no above 15 mph (24 km/h). The TPMS will entering the valve stem, which could chime, the "TPM Telltale Light" will flash damage the TPMS sensor. longer exists. A system fault can occur due to any of the following: on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on. The instrument cluster will Jamming due to electronic devices or display the “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM” driving next to facilities emitting the message and then display dashes (--) in same radio frequencies as the TPMS place of the pressure values. sensors. Beginning with the next ignition switch Installing some form of aftermarket cycle, the TPMS will no longer chime or window tinting that affects radio wave display the “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM” signals. message in the instrument cluster. 96 Instead, dashes (--) will remain in place of driver’s responsibility to maintain OCCUPANT RESTRAINT the pressure values. correct tire pressure using an accurate SYSTEMS To reactivate the TPMS, replace all four tire pressure gauge, even if Some of the most important safety wheel and tire assemblies (road tires) underinflation has not reached the level features in your vehicle are the restraint with tires equipped with TPM sensors. to trigger illumination of the “Tire systems: Then, drive the vehicle for up to Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light”. 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h). The Seasonal temperature changes will Occupant Restraint Systems Features TPMS will chime, the "TPM Telltale Light" affect tire pressure, and the TPMS will Seat Belt Systems will flash on and off for 75 seconds and monitor the actual tire pressure in the then turn off. The instrument cluster will tire. Supplemental Restraint Systems display the “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM” (SRS) Air Bags message and then display pressure General Information Child Restraints values in place of the dashes. On the next ignition switch cycle the "SERVICE TPM The following regulatory statement Some of the safety features described in SYSTEM" message will no longer be applies to all radio frequency (RF) this section may be standard equipment displayed, as long as no system fault devices equipped in this vehicle: on some models, or may be optional exists. This device complies with Part 15 of the equipment on others. If you are not sure, FCC rules and RSS-210 of Industry ask your authorized dealer. Note: Canada. Operation is subject to the The TPMS is not intended to replace following two conditions: Important Safety Precautions normal tire care and maintenance, or to (1) This device may not cause harmful Please pay close attention to the provide warning of a tire failure or interference. information in this section. It tells you condition. (2) This device must accept any how to use your restraint system The TPMS should not be used as a interference received, including properly, to keep you and your tire pressure gauge while adjusting your interference that may cause undesired passengers as safe as possible. tire pressure. operation. Here are some simple steps you can take Note: Changes or modifications not to minimize the risk of harm from a Driving on a significantly expressly approved by the party deploying air bag: underinflated tire will cause the tire to responsible for compliance could void the overheat, and can lead to tire failure. 1. Children 12 years old and under user’s authority to operate the Underinflation also reduces fuel should always ride buckled up in the rear equipment. efficiency and tire tread life, and may seat of a vehicle with a rear seat. affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability. The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the 97 2. If a child from 2 to 12 years old (not in a 9. If the air bag system in this vehicle Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder rear-facing child restraint) must ride in the needs to be modified to accommodate a System (BeltAlert) front passenger seat, move the seat as far disabled person, refer to the “Customer back as possible and use the proper child Assistance” section for customer service Driver and Passenger BeltAlert (if restraint (refer to “Child Restraints” in this contact information. equipped) SAFETY section for further information). BeltAlert is a feature intended to remind the driver and outboard front 3. Children that are not big enough to seat passenger (if equipped with wear the vehicle seat belt properly (refer Warning! outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) to “Child Restraints” in this section for to buckle their seat belts. The Belt Alert further information) should be secured in Never place a rear-facing child restraint in feature is active whenever the ignition the rear seat of a vehicle with a rear seat front of an air bag. A deploying passenger switch is in the START or ON/RUN in child restraints or belt-positioning front air bag can cause death or serious position. booster seats. Older children who do not injury to a child 12 years or younger, use child restraints or belt-positioning including a child in a rear-facing child Initial Indication booster seats should ride properly restraint. If the driver is unbuckled when the buckled up in the rear seat of a vehicle Only use a rear-facing child restraint in ignition switch is first in the START or with a rear seat. the rear seat of a vehicle with a rear seat. ON/RUN position, a chime will signal for a 4. Never allow children to slide the few seconds. If the driver or outboard shoulder belt behind them or under their Seat Belt Systems front seat passenger (if equipped with arm. outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) Buckle up even though you are an is unbuckled when the ignition switch is 5. Youshould read the instructions excellent driver, even on short trips. first in the START or ON/RUN position provided with your child restraint to Someone on the road may be a poor the Seat Belt Reminder Light will turn on make sure that you are using it properly. driver and could cause a collision that and remain on until both outboard front includes you. This can happen far away seat belts are buckled. The outboard 6. All occupants should always wear from home or on your own street. front passenger seat BeltAlert is not their lap and shoulder belts properly. Research has shown that seat belts save active when an outboard front passenger 7. The driver and front passenger seats lives, and they can reduce the seat is unoccupied. should be moved back as far as practical seriousness of injuries in a collision. BeltAlert Warning Sequence to allow the front air bags room to inflate. Some of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown from the vehicle. Seat The BeltAlert warning sequence is 8. Do not lean against the door or belts reduce the possibility of ejection activated when the vehicle is moving window. If your vehicle has side air bags, and the risk of injury caused by striking above a specified vehicle speed range and deployment occurs, the side air bags the inside of the vehicle. Everyone in a and the driver or outboard front seat will inflate forcefully into the space motor vehicle should be belted at all passenger is unbuckled (if equipped with between occupants and the door and times. outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) occupants could be injured. 98 (the outboard front passenger seat Lap/Shoulder Belts Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a BeltAlert is not active when the outboard seat and using a seat belt properly. front passenger seat is unoccupied). The All seating positions in your vehicle are Occupants, including the driver, should BeltAlert warning sequence starts by equipped with lap/shoulder belts. always wear their seat belts whether or not blinking the Seat Belt Reminder Light and The seat belt webbing retractor will lock an air bag is also provided at their seating sounding an intermittent chime. Once the only during very sudden stops or position to minimize the risk of severe injury BeltAlert warning sequence has collisions. This feature allows the or death in the event of a crash. completed, the Seat Belt Reminder Light shoulder part of the seat belt to move Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could will remain on until the seat belts are freely with you under normal conditions. make your injuries in a collision much worse. buckled. The BeltAlert warning sequence However, in a collision the seat belt will Youmight suffer internal injuries, or you could may repeat based on vehicle speed until lock and reduce your risk of striking the even slide out of the seat belt. Follow these the driver and occupied outboard front inside of the vehicle or being thrown out instructions to wear your seat belt safely and seat passenger seat belts are buckled. of the vehicle. to keep your passengers safe, too. The driver should instruct all occupants Two people should never be belted into a to buckle their seat belts. single seat belt. People belted together can Warning! crash into one another in a collision, hurting Change of Status one another badly. Never use a lap/shoulder If the driver or outboard front seat belt or a lap belt for more than one person, passenger (if equipped with outboard Relying on the air bags alone could lead to no matter what their size. front passenger seat BeltAlert) more severe injuries in a collision. The air unbuckles their seat belt while the bags work with your seat belt to restrain vehicle is traveling, the BeltAlert warning you properly. In some collisions, the air bags Warning! sequence will begin until the seat belts won’t deploy at all. Always wear your seat belt even though you have air bags. are buckled again. In a collision, you and your passengers can A lap belt worn too high can increase the The outboard front passenger seat risk of injury in a collision. The seat belt BeltAlert is not active when the outboard suffer much greater injuries if you are not properly buckled up. Youcan strike the forces won’t be at the strong hip and pelvic bones, but across your abdomen. Always front passenger seat is unoccupied. interior of your vehicle or other passengers, BeltAlert may be triggered when an wear the lap part of your seat belt as low as or you can be thrown out of the vehicle. possible and keep it snug. animal or other items are placed on the Always be sure you and others in your outboard front passenger seat or when vehicle are buckled up properly. A twisted seat belt may not protect you the seat is folded flat (if equipped). It is properly. In a collision, it could even cut into you. It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, Be sure the seat belt is flat against your body, recommended that pets be restrained in inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, the rear seat (if equipped) in pet without twists. If you can’t straighten a seat people riding in these areas are more likely belt in your vehicle, take it to your authorized harnesses or pet carriers that are to be seriously injured or killed. dealer immediately and have it fixed. secured by seat belts, and cargo is properly stowed. Do not allow people to ride in any area of A seat belt that is buckled into the wrong your vehicle that is not equipped with seats buckle will not protect you properly. The lap and seat belts. portion could ride too high on your body, 99 possibly causing internal injuries. Always buckle 2. The seat belt latch plate is above the 5. Position the shoulder belt across the your seat belt into the buckle nearest you. back of the front seat, and next to your shoulder and chest with minimal, if any arm in the rear seat (for vehicles slack so that it is comfortable and not A seat belt that is too loose will not protect equipped with a rear seat). Grasp the resting on your neck. The retractor will you properly. In a sudden stop, you could move latch plate and pull out the seat belt. withdraw any slack in the shoulder belt. SAFETY too far forward, increasing the possibility of injury. Wear your seat belt snugly. Slide the latch plate up the webbing as far as necessary to allow the seat belt to 6. To release the seat belt, push the red A seat belt that is worn under your arm is go around your lap. button on the buckle. The seat belt will dangerous. Yourbody could strike the inside automatically retract to its stowed surfaces of the vehicle in a collision, 3. When the seat belt is long enough to position. If necessary, slide the latch increasing head and neck injury. A seat belt fit, insert the latch plate into the buckle plate down the webbing to allow the seat worn under the arm can cause internal until you hear a “click.” belt to retract fully. injuries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder bones. Wear the seat belt over your Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting shoulder so that your strongest bones will take the force in a collision. Procedure A shoulder belt placed behind you will not Use the following procedure to untwist a protect you from injury during a collision. twisted lap/shoulder belt. Youare more likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not wear your shoulder 1. Position the latch plate as close as belt. The lap and shoulder belt are meant to possible to the anchor point. be used together. 2. At about 6 to 12 inches (15 to 30 cm) A frayed or torn seat belt could rip apart above the latch plate, grasp and twist the in a collision and leave you with no 06046S0001NA seat belt webbing 180 degrees to create protection. Inspect the seat belt system Seat Belt Latch Plate Inserted Into Seat a fold that begins immediately above the periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or Belt Buckle loose parts. Damaged parts must be latch plate. replaced immediately. Do not disassemble 4. Position the lap belt so that it is snug 3. Slide the latch plate upward over the or modify the seat belt system. Seat belt and lies low across your hips, below your folded webbing. The folded webbing assemblies must be replaced after a abdomen. To remove slack in the lap belt collision. must enter the slot at the top of the latch portion, pull up on the shoulder belt. To plate. loosen the lap belt if it is too tight, tilt the Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating latch plate and pull on the lap belt. A snug 4. Continue to slide the latch plate up Instructions seat belt reduces the risk of sliding under until it clears the folded webbing and the the seat belt in a collision. seat belt is no longer twisted. 1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and adjust the seat.

100 Second Row Center Seat Belt The second row center seat belt features risk of sliding under the seat belt in a Operating Instructions a seat belt with a mini-latch plate and collision. buckle, which allows the seat belt to detach from the lower anchor when the 8. Position the shoulder belt on your seat is folded. The mini-latch plate and chest so that it is comfortable and not regular latch plate can then be stored out resting on your neck. The retractor will of the way in the parcel tray for added withdraw any slack in the seat belt. convenience to open up utilization of the 9. To release the seat belt, push the red storage areas behind the front seats button on the buckle. when the seat is not occupied. 10. To disengage the mini-latch plate 1. Remove the mini-latch plate and from the mini-buckle for storage, insert regular latch plate from its stowed the regular latch plate into the black position in the right rear side trim panel. button on the top of the mini-buckle. The 2. Grasp the mini-latch plate and pull the seat belt will automatically retract to its seat belt over the seat. stowed position. If necessary, slide the latch plate down the webbing to allow the 3. Route the shoulder belt to the inside seat belt to retract fully. Insert the of the right head restraint. mini-latch plate and regular latch plate into its stowed position. 4. When the seat belt is long enough to fit, insert the mini-latch plate into the mini-buckle until you hear a “click.” Warning! 5. Sit back in seat. Slide the regular latch plate up the webbing as far as necessary to allow the seat belt to go around your If the mini-latch plate and mini-buckle are 06056S0002EM lap. not properly connected when the seat belt is Second Row Seat Belts used by an occupant, the seat belt will not 1 — Seat Belt 2 — Seat Belt 6. When the seat belt is long enough to be able to provide proper restraint and will increase the risk of injury in a collision. Buckle Latch Plate fit, insert the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.” 3 — Mini Latch 4 — Mini Seat Belt When reattaching the mini-latch plate and mini-buckle, ensure the seat belt Plate Buckle 7. Position the lap belt so that it is snug 5 — Mini Buckle and lies low across your hips, below your webbing is not twisted. If the webbing is Release abdomen. To remove slack in the lap belt twisted, follow the preceding procedure to portion, pull up on the shoulder belt. To detach the mini-latch plate and mini-buckle, untwist the webbing, and reattach the loosen the lap belt if it is too tight, pull on mini-latch plate and mini-buckle. the lap belt. A snug seat belt reduces the 101 Seat Belts And Pregnant Women Note: These devices are not a substitute for proper seat belt placement by the occupant. The seat belt still must be worn snugly and positioned properly.

SAFETY The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC). Like the air bags, the pretensioners are single use items. A deployed pretensioner or a deployed air bag must be replaced immediately. 06086S0102NA ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking 0226075266 Energy Management Feature Retractor Pregnant Women And Seat Belts The front seat belt system is equipped If the passenger seating position is Seat belts must be worn by all occupants with an Energy Management feature that equipped with an ALR and is being used including pregnant women: the risk of may help further reduce the risk of injury for normal usage, only pull the seat belt injury in the event of an accident is in the event of a collision. The seat belt webbing out far enough to comfortably reduced for the mother and the unborn system has a retractor assembly that is wrap around the occupant’s mid-section child if they are wearing a seat belt. designed to release webbing in a so as to not activate the ALR. If the ALR Position the lap belt snug and low below controlled manner. is activated, you will hear a clicking sound the abdomen and across the strong as the seat belt retracts. Allow the bones of the hips. Place the shoulder belt Switchable Automatic Locking webbing to retract completely in this across the chest and away from the neck. Retractors (ALR) case and then carefully pull out only the Never place the shoulder belt behind the amount of webbing necessary to back or under the arm. The seat belts in the passenger seating comfortably wrap around the occupant’s positions are equipped with a Switchable mid-section. Slide the latch plate into the Seat Belt Pretensioner Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) which buckle until you hear a "click." is used to secure a child restraint system. In Automatic Locking Mode, the shoulder The front seat belt system is equipped For additional information, refer to belt is automatically pre-locked. The seat with pretensioning devices that are “Installing Child Restraints Using The belt will still retract to remove any slack designed to remove slack from the seat Vehicle Seat Belt” under the “Child in the shoulder belt. Use the Automatic belt in the event of a collision. These Restraints” section of this manual. The Locking Mode anytime a child restraint is devices may improve the performance of figure below illustrates the locking installed in a seating position that has a the seat belt by removing slack from the feature for each seating position. seat belt early in a collision. seat belt with this feature. Children Pretensioners work for all size 12 years old and under should always be occupants, including those in child properly restrained in the rear seat of a restraints. vehicle with a rear seat. 102 Air Bag System Components Warning! Warning! Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) Air Bag Warning Light Never place a rear-facing child restraint The seat belt assembly must be replaced in front of an air bag. A deploying passenger if the switchable Automatic Locking Steering Wheel and Column front air bag can cause death or serious Retractor (ALR) feature or any other seat Instrument Panel injury to a child 12 years or younger, belt function is not working properly when including a child in a rear-facing child checked according to the procedures in the Knee Impact Bolsters restraint. Service Manual. Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags Only use a rear-facing child restraint in Failure to replace the seat belt assembly the rear seat of a vehicle with a rear seat. could increase the risk of injury in collisions. Seat Belt Buckle Switch Do not use the Automatic Locking Mode Supplemental Side Air Bags How To Engage The Automatic Locking to restrain occupants who are wearing the Supplemental Knee Air Bags Mode seat belt or children who are using booster seats. The locked mode is only used to Front and Side Impact Sensors 1. Buckle the combination lap and install rear-facing or forward-facing child shoulder belt. restraints that have a harness for Seat Belt Pretensioners restraining the child. 2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull Seat Track Position Sensors downward until the entire seat belt is Air Bag Warning Light extracted. Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) 3. Allow the seat belt to retract. As the Some of the safety features described in seat belt retracts, you will hear a clicking this section may be standard equipment sound. This indicates the seat belt is now on some models, or may be optional The ORC monitors the readiness of the in the Automatic Locking Mode. equipment on others. If you are not sure, electronic parts of the air bag system How To Disengage The Automatic ask your authorized dealer. whenever the ignition switch is in the Locking Mode START or ON/RUN position. If the ignition The air bag system must be ready to switch is in the OFF position or in the ACC Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder protect you in a collision. The Occupant position, the air bag system is not on and belt and allow it to retract completely to Restraint Controller (ORC) monitors the the air bags will not inflate. disengage the Automatic Locking Mode internal circuits and interconnecting and activate the vehicle sensitive wiring associated with the electrical Air The ORC contains a backup power supply (emergency) locking mode. Bag System Components. Yourvehicle system that may deploy the air bag may be equipped with the following Air system even if the battery loses power or Bag System Components: it becomes disconnected prior to deployment. 103 The ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning this condition the air bags may not be regarding the Redundant Air Bag Warning Light in the instrument panel for ready to inflate for your protection. Have Light refer to “Getting To Know Your approximately four to eight seconds for a an authorized dealer service the air bag Instrument Panel” section of this manual. self-check when the ignition switch is system immediately. first in the ON/RUN position. After the Front Air Bags SAFETY self-check, the Air Bag Warning Light will This vehicle has front air bags and turn off. If the ORC detects a malfunction Warning! lap/shoulder belts for both the driver and in any part of the system, it turns on the front passenger. The front air bags are a Air Bag Warning Light, either supplement to the seat belt restraint momentarily or continuously. A single Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your instrument panel could mean you won’t have systems. The driver front air bag is chime will sound to alert you if the light mounted in the center of the steering comes on again after initial startup. the air bag system to protect you in a collision. If the light does not come on as a wheel. The passenger front air bag is The ORC also includes diagnostics that bulb check when the ignition is first turned mounted in the instrument panel, above will illuminate the instrument panel Air on, stays on after you start the vehicle, or if the glove compartment. The words “SRS Bag Warning Light if a malfunction is it comes on as you drive, have an authorized AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG” are embossed on detected that could affect the air bag dealer service the air bag system the air bag covers. system. The diagnostics also record the immediately. nature of the malfunction. While the air bag system is designed to be Redundant Air Bag Warning Light maintenance free, if any of the following occurs, have an authorized dealer service the air bag system immediately. The Air Bag Warning Light does not If a fault with the Air Bag Warning Light is come on during the four to eight seconds detected, which could affect the when the ignition switch is first in the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS), ON/RUN position. the Redundant Air Bag Warning Light will illuminate on the instrument panel. The The Air Bag Warning Light remains on Redundant Air Bag Warning Light will 06106S0001EM after the four to eight-second interval. stay on until the fault is cleared. In Driver Air Bag The Air Bag Warning Light comes on addition, a single chime will sound to alert intermittently or remains on while you that the Redundant Air Bag Warning driving. Light has come on and a fault has been detected. If the Redundant Air Bag Note: If the speedometer, tachometer, Warning Light comes on intermittently or or any engine related gauges are not remains on while driving have an working, the Occupant Restraint authorized dealer service the vehicle Controller (ORC) may also be disabled. In immediately. For additional information 104 collisions. A higher energy output is used for more severe collisions. Warning! This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and/or front passenger seat belt Being too close to the steering wheel or buckle switch that detects whether the instrument panel during front air bag driver or front passenger seat belt is deployment could cause serious injury, buckled. The seat belt buckle switch may including death. Air bags need room to adjust the inflation rate of the Advanced inflate. Sit back, comfortably extending Front Air Bags. your arms to reach the steering wheel or instrument panel. This vehicle may be equipped with driver

06106S0002EM and/or front passenger seat track Never place a rear-facing child restraint in position sensors that may adjust the Passenger Air Bag front of an air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can cause death or serious inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air injury to a child 12 years or younger, Bags based upon seat position. including a child in a rear-facing child restraint. Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a Warning! vehicle with a rear seat. No objects should be placed over or near Driver And Passenger Front Air Bag the air bag on the instrument panel or steering wheel because any such objects Features could cause harm if the vehicle is in a The Advanced Front Air Bag system has collision severe enough to cause the air bag to inflate. multistage driver and front passenger air 0502122443US bags. This system provides output Do not put anything on or around the air Front Air Bag/Knee Bolster Locations appropriate to the severity and type of bag covers or attempt to open them manually. Youmay damage the air bags and 1 — Driver And Passenger Front Air Bags collision as determined by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC), which may you could be injured because the air bags 2 — Driver And Passenger Knee Impact may no longer be functional. The protective receive information from the front Bolsters/Supplemental Knee Air Bags covers for the air bag cushions are designed impact sensors (if equipped) or other to open only when the air bags are inflating. system components. Relying on the air bags alone could lead The first stage inflator is triggered to more severe injuries in a collision. The air immediately during an impact that bags work with your seat belt to restrain requires air bag deployment. A low you properly. In some collisions, air bags energy output is used in less severe won’t deploy at all. Always wear your seat belts even though you have air bags. 105 Front Air Bag Operation time than it takes to blink your eyes. The front air bags then quickly deflate while Front Air Bags are designed to provide helping to restrain the driver and front additional protection by supplementing passenger. the seat belts. Front air bags are not SAFETY expected to reduce the risk of injury in Knee Impact Bolsters rear, side, or rollover collisions. The front air bags will not deploy in all frontal The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect collisions, including some that may the knees of the driver and front produce substantial vehicle damage — passenger, and position the front for example, some pole collisions, truck occupants for improved interaction with the front air bags. underrides, and angle offset collisions. 06096S0102NA On the other hand, depending on the type Driver Knee Air Bag and location of impact, front air bags may Warning! deploy in crashes with little vehicle front-end damage but that produce a severe initial deceleration. Do not drill, cut, or tamper with the knee Because air bag sensors measure vehicle impact bolsters in any way. deceleration over time, vehicle speed and Do not mount any accessories to the knee damage by themselves are not good impact bolsters such as alarm lights, indicators of whether or not an air bag stereos, citizen band radios, etc. should have deployed. Seat belts are necessary for your Supplemental Driver And Front protection in all collisions, and also are needed to help keep you in position, away Passenger Knee Air Bags from an inflating air bag. 06096S0103NA This vehicle is equipped with a Front Passenger Knee Air Bag When the ORC detects a collision Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bag requiring the front air bags, it signals the mounted in the instrument panel below Supplemental Side Air Bags inflator units. A large quantity of the steering column and a Supplemental Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the Passenger Knee Air Bag mounted in the Bags (SABs) front air bags. instrument panel below the glove This vehicle is equipped with The steering wheel hub trim cover and compartment. The Supplemental Knee Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air the upper passenger side of the Air Bags provide enhanced protection Bags (SABs). instrument panel separate and fold out of during a frontal impact by working the way as the air bags inflate to their full together with the seat belts, Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air size. The front air bags fully inflate in less pretensioners, and front air bags. Bags (SABs) are located in the outboard side of the front seats. The SABs are 106 marked with a “SRS AIRBAG” or outboard occupants in certain side “AIRBAG” on a label or on the seat trim on impacts, in addition to the injury Warning! the outboard side of the seats. reduction potential provided by the seat The SABs may help to reduce the risk of belts and body structure. occupant injury during certain side Do not use accessory seat covers or place The SABIC deploys downward, covering impacts, in addition to the injury objects between you and the Side Air Bags; the side windows. An inflating SABIC reduction potential provided by the seat the performance could be adversely pushes the outside edge of the headliner belts and body structure. affected and/or objects could be pushed into out of the way and covers the window. you, causing serious injury. The SABICs inflate with enough force to injure occupants if they are not belted Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable and seated properly, or if items are Curtains (SABICs) positioned in the area where the SABICs This vehicle is equipped with inflate. Children are at an even greater Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable risk of injury from a deploying air bag. Curtains (SABICs). The SABICs may help reduce the risk of Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable partial or complete ejection of vehicle Curtains (SABICs) are located above the occupants through side windows in side windows. The trim covering the certain side impact events. SABICs is labeled “SRS AIRBAG” or 06106S0004EM Front Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side “AIRBAG.” Warning! Air Bag

When the SAB deploys, it opens the seam Do not mount equipment, or stack on the outboard side of the seatback’s luggage or other cargo up high enough to trim cover. The inflating SAB deploys block the deployment of the SABICs. The through the seat seam into the space trim covering above the side windows where between the occupant and the door. The the SABIC and its deployment path are SAB moves at a very high speed and with located should remain free from any such a high force that it could injure obstructions. occupants if they are not seated In order for the SABICs to work as properly, or if items are positioned in the intended, do not install any accessory items area where the SAB inflates. Children are 06106S0005EM in your vehicle which could alter the roof. Do at an even greater risk of injury from a Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable not add an aftermarket sunroof to your deploying air bag. Curtain (SABIC) Location vehicle. Do not add roof racks that require permanent attachments (bolts or screws) SABICs may help reduce the risk of head for installation on the vehicle roof. Do not and other injuries to front and rear seat drill into the roof of the vehicle for any reason. 107 Side Impacts Side Air Bags won’t deploy at all. Always The Side Air Bags are designed to Warning! wear your seat belt even though you have activate in certain side impacts. The Side Air Bags. Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) Occupants, including children, who are up SAFETY determines whether the deployment of Note: Air bag covers may not be obvious the Side Air Bags in a particular impact against or very close to Side Air Bags can be seriously injured or killed. Occupants, in the interior trim, but they will open event is appropriate, based on the during air bag deployment. severity and type of collision. The side including children, should never lean on or impact sensors aid the ORC in sleep against the door, side windows, or Rollover Events area where the side air bags inflate, even if Side Air Bags are designed to activate in determining the appropriate response to they are in an infant or child restraint. impact events. The system is calibrated certain rollover events. The ORC to deploy the Side Air Bags on the impact Seat belts (and child restraints where determines whether the deployment of side of the vehicle during impacts that appropriate) are necessary for your the Side Air Bags in a particular rollover require Side Air Bag occupant protection. protection in all collisions. They also help event is appropriate, based on the keep you in position, away from an inflating In side impacts, the Side Air Bags deploy severity and type of collision. Vehicle Side Air Bag. To get the best protection damage by itself is not a good indicator independently; a left side impact deploys from the Side Air Bags, occupants must the left Side Air Bags only and a wear their seat belts properly and sit of whether or not Side Air Bags should right-side impact deploys the right Side upright with their backs against the seats. have deployed. Air Bags only. Vehicle damage by itself is Children must be properly restrained in a The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all not a good indicator of whether or not child restraint or booster seat that is rollover events. The rollover sensing Side Air Bags should have deployed. appropriate for the size of the child. system determines if a rollover event The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all may be in progress and whether side collisions, including some collisions deployment is appropriate. In the event at certain angles, or some side collisions Warning! the vehicle experiences a rollover or near that do not impact the area of the rollover event, and deployment of the passenger compartment. The Side Air Side Air Bags is appropriate, the rollover Bags may deploy during angled or offset Side Air Bags need room to inflate. Do not sensing system will also deploy the seat frontal collisions where the front air bags lean against the door or window. Sit upright belt pretensioners on both sides of the deploy. in the center of the seat. vehicle. Side Air Bags are a supplement to the Being too close to the Side Air Bags The SABICs may help reduce the risk of seat belt restraint system. Side Air Bags during deployment could cause you to be partial or complete ejection of vehicle deploy in less time than it takes to blink severely injured or killed. occupants through side windows in your eyes. Relying on the Side Air Bags alone could certain rollover or side impact events. lead to more severe injuries in a collision. The Side Air Bags work with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In some collisions, 108 Air Bag System Components If you do have a collision which deploys the air bags, any or all of the following Note: The Occupant Restraint Controller Warning! (ORC) monitors the internal circuits and may occur: interconnecting wiring associated with The air bag material may sometimes electrical Air Bag System Components cause abrasions and/or skin reddening to Deployed air bags and seat belt pretensioners listed below: the occupants as the air bags deploy and cannot protect you in another collision. Have the air bags, seat belt pretensioners, and the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) unfold. The abrasions are similar to seat belt retractor assemblies replaced by an friction rope burns or those you might get authorized dealer immediately. Also, have the Air Bag Warning Light sliding along a carpet or gymnasium floor. Occupant Restraint Controller System Steering Wheel and Column They are not caused by contact with serviced as well. chemicals. They are not permanent and Instrument Panel normally heal quickly. However, if you Note: Knee Impact Bolsters haven’t healed significantly within a few days, or if you have any blistering, see Air bag covers may not be obvious in Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags your doctor immediately. the interior trim, but they will open during air bag deployment. Seat Belt Buckle Switch As the air bags deflate, you may see Supplemental Side Air Bags some smoke-like particles. The particles After any collision, the vehicle should are a normal by-product of the process be taken to an authorized dealer Supplemental Knee Air Bags that generates the non-toxic gas used for immediately. Front and Side Impact Sensors air bag inflation. These airborne particles may irritate the skin, eyes, nose, or Enhanced Accident Response Seat Belt Pretensioners throat. If you have skin or eye irritation, System Seat Track Position Sensors rinse the area with cool water. For nose or throat irritation, move to fresh air. If In the event of an impact, if the communication network remains intact, If A Deployment Occurs the irritation continues, see your doctor. If these particles settle on your clothing, and the power remains intact, depending The front air bags are designed to deflate follow the garment manufacturer’s on the nature of the event, the ORC will immediately after deployment. instructions for cleaning. determine whether to have the Enhanced Note: Front and/or side air bags will not Accident Response System perform the Do not drive your vehicle after the air following functions: deploy in all collisions. This does not bags have deployed. If you are involved in mean something is wrong with the air bag another collision, the air bags will not be Cut off fuel to the engine (If Equipped) system. in place to protect you. Cut off battery power to the electric motor (If Equipped)

109 Flash hazard lights as long as the Cut off battery power to the: Note: After an accident, remember to battery has power cycle the ignition to the STOP –Engine (OFF/LOCK) position and remove the key Turn on the interior lights, which –Electric Motor (if equipped) from the ignition switch to avoid draining remain on as long as the battery has the battery. Carefully check the vehicle SAFETY power or for 15 minutes from the –Electric power steering for fuel leaks in the engine compartment intervention of the Enhanced Accident –Brake booster and on the ground near the engine Response System. compartment and fuel tank before –Electric park brake Unlock the power door locks. resetting the system and starting the Yourvehicle may also be designed to –Automatic transmission gear engine. If there are no fuel leaks or perform any of these other functions in selector damage to the vehicle electrical devices (e.g. headlights) after an accident, reset response to the Enhanced Accident –Horn Response System: the system by following the procedure –Front wiper described below. Turn off the Fuel Filter Heater, Turn off the HVAC Blower Motor, Close the HVAC –Headlamp washer pump Circulation Door Enhanced Accident Response System Reset Procedure After the event occurs, when the system is active, a message regarding fuel cutoff is displayed. Turn the ignition switch from ignition AVV/START or MAR/ACC/ON/RUN to ignition STOP/OFF/LOCK. Carefully check the vehicle for fuel leaks in the engine compartment and on the ground near the engine compartment and fuel tank before resetting the system and starting the engine. Depending on the nature of the event the left and right turn signal lights, located in the instrument panel, may both be blinking and will continue to blink. In order to move your vehicle to the side of the road, you must follow the system reset procedure.

Customer Action Customer Will See

Note: Each step MUST BE held for at least two seconds 1. Turn ignition STOP/OFF/LOCK. (Turn Signal Switch Must be placed in Neutral State). Right turn light BLINKS. 2. Turn ignition MAR/ACC/ON/RUN. Left turn light is OFF. 110 Customer Action Customer Will See

Note: Each step MUST BE held for at least two seconds Right turn light is ON SOLID. 3. Turn right turn signal switch ON. Left turn light BLINKS. Right turn light is OFF. 4. Place turn signal in neutral state. Left turn light BLINKS. Right turn light BLINKS. 5. Turn left turn signal switch ON. Left turn light is ON SOLID. Right turn light BLINKS. 6. Place turn signal in neutral state. Left turn light is OFF. Right turn light is ON SOLID. 7. Turn right turn signal switch ON. Left turn light BLINKS. Right turn light is OFF. 8. Place turn signal in neutral state. Left turn light BLINKS. Right turn light is ON SOLID. 9. Turn left turn signal switch ON. Left turn light is ON SOLID. 10. Turn left turn signal switch OFF. (Turn Signal Switch Must be placed Right turn light is OFF. in Neutral State). Left turn light is OFF. 11. Turn ignition STOP/OFF/LOCK. 12. Turn ignition MAR/ACC/ON/RUN. (Entire sequence needs to be System is now reset and the engine may be started. completed within one minute or sequence will need to be repeated). Turn hazard flashers OFF (Manually). If a reset procedure step is not completed within 60 seconds, then the turn signal lights will blink and the reset procedure must be performed again in order to be successful.

111 Maintaining Your Air Bag System Event Data Recorder (EDR) and crash location) are recorded. However, other parties, such as law This vehicle is equipped with an event enforcement, could combine the EDR Warning! data recorder (EDR). The main purpose of data with the type of personally an EDR is to record, in certain crash or identifying data routinely acquired during SAFETY near crash-like situations, such as an air a crash investigation. Modifications to any part of the air bag bag deployment or hitting a road To read data recorded by an EDR, special system could cause it to fail when you need obstacle, data that will assist in it. Youcould be injured if the air bag system equipment is required, and access to the understanding how a vehicle’s systems is not there to protect you. Do not modify vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition performed. The EDR is designed to the components or wiring, including adding to the vehicle manufacturer, other record data related to vehicle dynamics any kind of badges or stickers to the parties, such as law enforcement, that and safety systems for a short period of steering wheel hub trim cover or the upper have the special equipment, can read the right side of the instrument panel. Do not time, typically 30 seconds or less. The information if they have access to the modify the front bumper, vehicle body EDR in this vehicle is designed to record vehicle or the EDR. structure, or add aftermarket side steps or such data as: running boards. Child Restraints How various systems in your vehicle It is dangerous to try to repair any part of were operating; Everyone in your vehicle needs to be the air bag system yourself. Be sure to tell buckled up at all times, including babies anyone who works on your vehicle that it Whether or not the driver and and children. Every state in the United has an air bag system. passenger safety belts were States, and every Canadian province, buckled/fastened; Do not attempt to modify any part of your requires that small children ride in proper air bag system. The air bag may inflate How far (if at all) the driver was restraint systems. This is the law, and you accidentally or may not function properly if modifications are made. Take your vehicle depressing the accelerator and/or brake can be prosecuted for ignoring it. to an authorized dealer for any air bag pedal; and, Children 12 years or younger should ride system service. If your seat, including your How fast the vehicle was traveling. properly buckled up in a rear seat, if trim cover and cushion, needs to be serviced available. According to crash statistics, in any way (including removal or These data can help provide a better children are safer when properly loosening/tightening of seat attachment understanding of the circumstances in restrained in the rear seats rather than in bolts), take the vehicle to your authorized which crashes and injuries occur. the front. dealer. Only manufacturer approved seat Note: EDR data are recorded by your accessories may be used. If it is necessary to modify the air bag system for persons vehicle only if a non-trivial crash situation with disabilities, contact your authorized occurs; no data are recorded by the EDR dealer. under normal driving conditions and no personal data (e.g., name, gender, age,

112 There are different sizes and types of Note: restraints for children from newborn size Warning! For additional information, refer to to the child almost large enough for an www.safercar.gov/parents/index.htm or adult safety belt. Always check the child call: 1–888–327–4236 In a collision, an unrestrained child can seat Owner’s Manual to make sure you become a projectile inside the vehicle. The have the correct seat for your child. Canadian residents should refer to force required to hold even an infant on your Carefully read and follow all the Transport Canada’s website for lap could become so great that you could not instructions and warnings in the child additional information: hold the child, no matter how strong you are. restraint Owner’s Manual and on all the http://www.tc.gc.ca/eng/ The child and others could be badly injured or labels attached to the child restraint. motorvehiclesafety/ killed. Any child riding in your vehicle should safedrivers-childsafety-index-53.htm be in a proper restraint for the child’s size. Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it has a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety Standards. Youshould also make sure that you can install it in the vehicle where you will use it. Summary Of Recommendations For Restraining Children In Vehicles

Child Size, Height, Weight Or Age Recommended Type Of Child Restraint Children who are two years old or younger and Either an Infant Carrier or a Convertible Child Infants and Toddlers who have not reached the height or weight Restraint, facing rearward in the rear seat of limits of their child restraint the vehicle Children who are at least two years old or who Forward-Facing Child Restraint with a Small Children have out-grown the height or weight limit of five-point Harness, facing forward in the rear their rear-facing child restraint seat of the vehicle Children who have out-grown their Belt Positioning Booster Seat and the vehicle Larger Children forward-facing child restraint, but are too seat belt, seated in the rear seat of the vehicle small to properly fit the vehicle’s seat belt Children 12 years old or younger, who have Vehicle Seat Belt, seated in the rear seat of the Children Too Large for Child Restraints out-grown the height or weight limit of their vehicle booster seat

113 Infant And Child Restraints Only use a rear-facing child restraint in the rear seat of a vehicle with a rear seat. Safety experts recommend that children Warning! ride rear-facing in the vehicle until they are two years old or until they reach Older Children And Child Restraints Improper installation can lead to failure SAFETY either the height or weight limit of their of an infant or child restraint. It could come rear-facing child restraint. Two types of Children who are two years old or who have outgrown their rear-facing loose in a collision. The child could be badly child restraints can be used rear-facing: injured or killed. Follow the child restraint infant carriers and convertible child convertible child seat can ride manufacturer’s directions exactly when seats. forward-facing in the vehicle. installing an infant or child restraint. Forward-facing child seats and The infant carrier is only used rear-facing convertible child seats used in the After a child restraint is installed in the in the vehicle. It is recommended for forward-facing direction are for children vehicle, do not move the vehicle seat children from birth until they reach the forward or rearward because it can loosen who are over two years old or who have weight or height limit of the infant carrier. the child restraint attachments. Remove the outgrown the rear-facing weight or Convertible child seats can be used either child restraint before adjusting the vehicle height limit of their rear-facing rear-facing or forward-facing in the seat position. When the vehicle seat has convertible child seat. Children should vehicle. Convertible child seats often been adjusted, reinstall the child restraint. remain in a forward-facing child seat with have a higher weight limit in the When your child restraint is not in use, a harness for as long as possible, up to rear-facing direction than infant carriers secure it in the vehicle with the seat belt or the highest weight or height allowed by do, so they can be used rear-facing by LATCH anchorages, or remove it from the the child seat. children who have outgrown their infant vehicle. Do not leave it loose in the vehicle. In carrier but are still less than at least two All children whose weight or height is a sudden stop or accident, it could strike the above the forward-facing limit for the occupants or seatbacks and cause serious years old. Children should remain personal injury. rear-facing until they reach the highest child seat should use a belt-positioning weight or height allowed by their booster seat until the vehicle’s seat belts convertible child seat. fit properly. If the child cannot sit with Children Too Large For Booster knees bent over the vehicle’s seat Seats cushion while the child’s back is against Warning! the seatback, they should use a Children who are large enough to wear belt-positioning booster seat. The child the shoulder belt comfortably, and whose and belt-positioning booster seat are legs are long enough to bend over the Never place a rear-facing child restraint held in the vehicle by the seat belt. front of the seat when their back is in front of an air bag. A deploying passenger against the seatback, should use the seat front air bag can cause death or serious belt in a rear seat. Use this simple 5-step injury to a child 12 years or younger, test to decide whether the child can use including a child in a rear-facing child the vehicle’s seat belt alone: restraint. 114 1. Can the child sit all the way back 5. Can the child stay seated like this for against the back of the vehicle seat? the whole trip? Warning! 2. Do the child’s knees bend comfortably If the answer to any of these questions over the front of the vehicle seat – while was “no,” then the child still needs to use a the child is still sitting all the way back? booster seat in this vehicle. If the child is Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt using the lap/shoulder belt, check seat under an arm or behind their back. In a crash, 3. Does the shoulder belt cross the belt fit periodically and make sure the the shoulder belt will not protect a child properly, which may result in serious injury or child’s shoulder between their neck and seat belt buckle is latched. A child’s arm? death. A child must always wear both the lap squirming or slouching can move the belt and shoulder portions of the seat belt 4. Is the lap part of the belt as low as out of position. If the shoulder belt correctly. possible, touching the child’s thighs and contacts the face or neck, move the child not the stomach? closer to the center of the vehicle, or use a booster seat to position the seat belt on the child correctly. Recommendations For Attaching Child Restraints

Use Any Attachment Method Shown With An “X” Below Combined Weight LATCH – Lower Restraint Type of the Child + Child LATCH – Lower Seat Belt + Top Seat Belt Only Anchors + Top Restraint Anchors Only Tether Anchor Tether Anchor Rear-Facing Child Up to 65 lbs (29.5 kg) X X Restraint Rear-Facing Child More than 65 lbs (29.5 kg) X Restraint Forward-Facing Child Up to 65 lbs (29.5 kg) X X Restraint Forward-Facing Child More than 65 lbs (29.5 kg) X Restraint

115 Lower Anchors And Tethers For system has three vehicle anchor points LATCH Positions For Installing Child CHildren (LATCH) Restraint System for installing LATCH-equipped child Restraints In This Vehicle seats. There are two lower anchorages located at the back of the seat cushion where it meets the seatback and one top SAFETY tether anchorage located behind the seating position. These anchorages are used to install LATCH-equipped child seats without using the vehicle’s seat belts. Some seating positions may have a 022668173 top tether anchorage but no lower LATCH Label anchorages. In these seating positions, Yourvehicle is equipped with the child the seat belt must be used with the top 06086S0101NA restraint anchorage system called tether anchorage to install the child LATCH Positions LATCH, which stands for Lower Anchors restraint. Please see the following table Lower Anchorage Symbol and Tethers for CHildren. The LATCH for more information. (2 Anchorages Per Seating Position) TopTether Anchorage Symbol

Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With LATCH Use the LATCH anchorage system until the combined weight of the child What is the weight limit (child’s weight + weight of 65 lbs and the child restraint is 65 lbs (29.5 kg). Use the seat belt and tether the child restraint) for using the LATCH anchorage (29.5 kg) anchor instead of the LATCH system once the combined weight is more system to attach the child restraint? than 65 lbs (29.5 kg). Do not use the seat belt when you use the LATCH anchorage system to Can the LATCH anchorages and the seat belt be attach a rear-facing or forward-facing child restraint. used together to attach a rear-facing or No Booster seats may be attached to the LATCH anchorages if allowed by forward-facing child restraint? the booster seat manufacturer. See your booster seat owner’s manual for more information. Can a child seat be installed in the center position Use the seat belt and tether anchor to install a child seat in the center No using the inner LATCH lower anchorage? seating position.

116 Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With LATCH Never “share” a LATCH anchorage with two or more child restraints. If the Can two child restraints be attached using a center position does not have dedicated LATCH lower anchorages, use No common lower LATCH anchorage? the seat belt to install a child seat in the center position next to a child seat using the LATCH anchorages in an outboard position. The child seat may touch the back of the front passenger seat if the child Can the rear-facing child restraint touch the back of Yes restraint manufacturer also allows contact. See your child restraint the front passenger seat? owner’s manual for more information. Can the head restraints be removed? Yes The head restraints can be removed in each seating position.

Locating The LATCH Anchorages Locating The Upper Tether LATCH-compatible child restraint The lower anchorages Anchorages systems will be equipped with a rigid bar are round bars that are or a flexible strap on each side. Each will found at the rear of the There are tether strap have a hook or connector to attach to the seat cushion where it anchorages behind each lower anchorage and a way to tighten the meets the seatback. rear seating position connection to the anchorage. Each anchorage is under located in the panel Forward-facing child restraints and some a cover with the anchorage symbol on it. Lift between the rear rear-facing child restraints will also be the cover to access the lower anchorage. seatback and the rear equipped with a tether strap. The tether window. They are found under a plastic strap will have a hook at the end to attach cover with the tether anchorage symbol to the top tether anchorage and a way to on it. tighten the strap after it is attached to the anchorage. Center Seat LATCH

Warning!

Do not install a child restraint in the center position using the LATCH system. 06086S0009EM LATCH Anchorage Locations This position is not approved for installing 1 — LATCH Anchorage Bar child seats using the LATCH attachments. Youmust use the seat belt and tether 2 — LATCH Anchorage Locations 06086S0104NA Upper Tether Anchorage Location anchor to install a child seat in the center seating position. 117 Never use the same lower anchorage to 2. Place the child seat between the How To Stow An Unused attach more than one child restraint. Please lower anchorages for that seating Switchable-ALR (ALR) Seat Belt: refer to “Installing The LATCH-Compatible position. For some second row seats, you Child Restraint System” for typical may need to recline the seat and / or raise When using the LATCH attaching system installation instructions. the head restraint to get a better fit. If to install a child restraint, stow all ALR SAFETY the rear seat can be moved forward and seat belts that are not being used by other occupants or being used to secure Always follow the directions of the child rearward in the vehicle, you may wish to child restraints. An unused belt could restraint manufacturer when installing move it to its rear-most position to make injure a child if they play with it and your child restraint. Not all child restraint room for the child seat. Youmay also accidentally lock the seat belt retractor. systems will be installed as described move the front seat forward to allow Before installing a child restraint using here. more room for the child seat. the LATCH system, buckle the seat belt To Install A LATCH-Compatible Child 3. Attach the lower hooks or connectors behind the child restraint and out of the of the child restraint to the lower Restraint child’s reach. If the buckled seat belt anchorages in the selected seating interferes with the child restraint If the selected seating position has a position. installation, instead of buckling it behind Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor 4. If the child restraint has a tether the child restraint, route the seat belt (ALR) seat belt, stow the seat belt, strap, connect it to the top tether through the child restraint belt path and following the instructions below. See the anchorage. See the section “Installing then buckle it. Do not lock the seat belt. section “Installing Child Restraints Using Child Restraints Using the TopTether Remind all children in the vehicle that the the Vehicle Seat Belt” to check what type Anchorage” for directions to attach a seat belts are not toys and that they of seat belt each seating position has. tether anchor. should not play with them. 1. Loosen the adjusters on the lower 5. Tighten all of the straps as you push straps and on the tether strap of the child the child restraint rearward and Warning! seat so that you can more easily attach downward into the seat. Remove slack in the hooks or connectors to the vehicle the straps according to the child restraint Improper installation of a child restraint anchorages. manufacturer’s instructions. to the LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of the restraint. The child could be badly 6. Test that the child restraint is injured or killed. Follow the child restraint installed tightly by pulling back and forth manufacturer’s directions exactly when on the child seat at the belt path. It should installing an infant or child restraint. not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) in Child restraint anchorages are designed any direction. to withstand only those loads imposed by correctly-fitted child restraints. Under no circumstances are they to be used for adult seat belts, harnesses, or for attaching other items or equipment to the vehicle. 118 Installing Child Restraints Using The seat belts in the passenger seating Lap/Shoulder Belt Systems For The Vehicle Seat Belt positions are equipped with a Switchable Installing Child Restraints In This Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) that Vehicle Child restraint systems are designed to is designed to keep the lap portion of the be secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or seat belt tight around the child restraint the lap belt portion of a lap/shoulder belt. so that it is not necessary to use a locking clip. The ALR retractor can be “switched” into a locked mode by pulling all of the Warning! webbing out of the retractor and then letting the webbing retract back into the retractor. If it is locked, the ALR will make Improper installation or failure to a clicking noise while the webbing is properly secure a child restraint can lead to pulled back into the retractor. Refer to failure of the restraint. The child could be badly injured or killed. the “Automatic Locking Mode” 06086S0102NA description in “Switchable Automatic Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s Locking Retractors (ALR)” under Locations directions exactly when installing an infant “Occupant Restraint Systems” for ALR = Switchable Automatic Locking or child restraint. additional information on ALR. Retractor Please see the table below and the following sections for more information. TopTether Anchorage Symbol

Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With Seat Belts What is the weight limit (child’s weight + weight of the child Always use the tether anchor when using the seat belt to Weight limit of the restraint) for using the Tether Anchor with the seat belt to install a forward facing child restraint, up to the Child Restraint attach a forward facing child restraint? recommended weight limit of the child restraint. Contact between the front passenger seat and the child Can the rear-facing child restraint touch the back of the Yes restraint is allowed, if the child restraint manufacturer also front passenger seat? allows contact. The head restraints can be removed in each seating Can the head restraints be removed? Yes position. Can the buckle stalk be twisted to tighten the seat belt Do not twist the buckle stalk in a seating position with an No against the belt path of the child restraint? ALR retractor.

119 Installing A Child Restraint With A 3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle Any seat belt system will loosen with Switchable Automatic Locking until you hear a “click.” time, so check the belt occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary. Retractor (ALR): 4. Pull on the webbing to make the lap portion tight against the child seat. Child restraint systems are designed to Installing Child Restraints Using SAFETY be secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or 5. To lock the seat belt, pull down on the The Top Tether Anchorage: the lap belt portion of a lap/shoulder belt. shoulder part of the belt until you have pulled all the seat belt webbing out of the retractor. Then, allow the webbing to Warning! Warning! retract back into the retractor. As the webbing retracts, you will hear a clicking sound. This means the seat belt is now in Do not attach a tether strap for a rear-facing car seat to any location in front Improper installation or failure to the Automatic Locking mode. properly secure a child restraint can lead to of the car seat, including the seat frame or a failure of the restraint. The child could be 6. Try to pull the webbing out of the tether anchorage. Only attach the tether badly injured or killed. retractor. If it is locked, you should not be strap of a rear-facing car seat to the tether anchorage that is approved for that seating Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s able to pull out any webbing. If the position, located behind the top of the directions exactly when installing an infant retractor is not locked, repeat step 5. vehicle seat. See the section “Lower Anchors or child restraint. 7. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing and Tethers for CHildren (LATCH) Restraint System” for the location of approved tether to tighten the lap portion around the child anchorages in your vehicle. 1. Place the child seat in the center of restraint while you push the child the seating position. For some second restraint rearward and downward into row seats, you may need to recline the the vehicle seat. seat and/or raise the head restraint to get a better fit. If the rear seat can be 8. If the child restraint has a top tether moved forward and rearward in the strap and the seating position has a top vehicle, you may wish to move it to its tether anchorage, connect the tether rear-most position to make room for the strap to the anchorage and tighten the child seat. Youmay also move the front tether strap. See the section “Installing 1. Look behind the seating position seat forward to allow more room for the Child Restraints Using the TopTether where you plan to install the child child seat. Anchorage” for directions to attach a restraint to find the tether anchorage. tether anchor. Youmay need to move the seat forward 2. Pull enough of the seat belt webbing to provide better access to the tether from the retractor to pass it through the 9. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by pulling back and forth anchorage. If there is no top tether belt path of the child restraint. Do not anchorage for that seating position, twist the belt webbing in the belt path. on the child seat at the belt path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) in move the child restraint to another any direction. position in the vehicle if one is available. 120 2. Rotate or lift the cover to access the SAFETY TIPS anchor directly behind the seat where Warning! you are placing the child restraint. Transporting Passengers NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN An incorrectly anchored tether strap THE CARGO AREA. could lead to increased head motion and possible injury to the child. Use only the anchorage position directly behind the child Warning! seat to secure a child restraint top tether strap. Do not leave children or animals inside If your vehicle is equipped with a split rear parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat seat, make sure the tether strap does not build-up may cause serious injury or death. slip into the opening between the seatbacks as you remove slack in the strap. It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In 06086S0104NA a collision, people riding in these areas are Upper Tether Anchorage Location Transporting Pets more likely to be seriously injured or killed. 3. Route the tether strap to provide the Air Bags deploying in the front seat could Do not allow people to ride in any area of most direct path for the strap between harm your pet. An unrestrained pet will be your vehicle that is not equipped with seats the anchor and the child seat. If your thrown about and possibly injured, or and seat belts. vehicle is equipped with adjustable rear injure a passenger during panic braking or head restraints, raise the head restraint, Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a in a collision. seat and using a seat belt properly. and where possible, route the tether strap under the head restraint and Pets should be restrained in the rear seat between the two posts. If not possible, in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are lower the head restraint and pass the secured by seat belts. tether strap around the outboard side of the head restraint. 4. Attach the tether strap hook of the child restraint to the top tether anchorage as shown in the diagram. 5. Remove slack in the tether strap according to the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions.

121 Exhaust Gas Whenever a change is noticed in the Front seat belt assemblies must be sound of the exhaust system, when replaced after a collision. Rear seat belt exhaust fumes can be detected inside the assemblies must be replaced after a Warning! vehicle, or when the underside or rear of collision if they have been damaged (i.e., the vehicle is damaged, have a competent bent retractor, torn webbing, etc.). If SAFETY mechanic inspect the complete exhaust there is any question regarding seat belt Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and system and adjacent body areas for or retractor condition, replace the seat odorless. Breathing it can make you broken, damaged, deteriorated, or belt. unconscious and can eventually poison you. To mispositioned parts. Open seams or avoid breathing (CO), follow these safety tips: loose connections could permit exhaust Air Bag Warning Light Do not run the engine in a closed garage fumes to seep into the passenger The Air Bag warning light will turn on or in confined areas any longer than needed compartment. In addition, inspect the to move your vehicle in or out of the area. for four to eight seconds as a bulb check exhaust system each time the vehicle is when the ignition switch is first turned to If you are required to drive with the raised for lubrication or oil change. ON/RUN. If the light is either not on trunk/liftgate/rear doors open, make sure Replace as required. during starting, stays on, or turns on while that all windows are closed and the climate driving, have the system inspected at control BLOWER switch is set at high speed. Safety Checks YouShould Make Inside DO NOT use the recirculation mode. The Vehicle your authorized dealer as soon as possible. After the bulb check, this light If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle Seat Belts will illuminate with a single chime when a with the engine running, adjust your heating fault with the Air Bag System has been Inspect the seat belt system periodically, or cooling controls to force outside air into detected. It will stay on until the fault is the vehicle. Set the blower at high speed. checking for cuts, frays, and loose parts. removed. If the light comes on Damaged parts must be replaced intermittently or remains on while immediately. Do not disassemble or The best protection against carbon driving, have your authorized dealer modify the system. monoxide entry into the vehicle body is a service the vehicle immediately. Refer to properly maintained engine exhaust “Occupant Restraint Systems” in “Safety” system. for further information.

122 Defroster ALWAYS securely attach your floor ALWAYS make sure objects cannot fall or Check operation by selecting the defrost mat using the floor mat fasteners. DO NOT slide into the driver’s side floor area when the vehicle is moving. Objects can become mode and place the blower control on install your floor mat upside down or turn your floor mat over. Lightly pull to confirm trapped under accelerator, brake, or clutch high speed. Youshould be able to feel the mat is secured using the floor mat fasteners pedals and could cause a loss of vehicle air directed against the windshield. See on a regular basis. control. your authorized dealer for service if your defroster is inoperable. ALWAYS REMOVE THE EXISTING FLOOR NEVER place any objects under the floor MATFROM THE VEHICLE before mat (e.g., towels, keys, etc.). These objects Floor Mat Safety Information installing any other floor mat. NEVER install could change the position of the floor mat or stack an additional floor mat on top of an and may cause interference with the Always use floor mats designed to fit existing floor mat. accelerator, brake, or clutch pedals. your vehicle. Only use a floor mat that ONLYinstall floor mats designed to fit If the vehicle carpet has been removed does not interfere with the operation of your vehicle. NEVER install a floor mat that and re-installed, always properly attach the accelerator, brake or clutch pedals. cannot be properly attached and secured to carpet to the floor and check the floor mat Only use a floor mat that is securely your vehicle. If a floor mat needs to be fasteners are secure to the vehicle carpet. attached using the floor mat fasteners so replaced, only use a FCA approved floor mat Fully depress each pedal to check for it cannot slip out of position and interfere for the specific make, model, and year of interference with the accelerator, brake, or with the accelerator, brake or clutch your vehicle. clutch pedals then re-install the floor mats. pedals or impair safe operation of your ONLYuse the driver’s side floor mat on It is recommended to only use mild soap vehicle in other ways. the driver’s side floor area. To check for and water to clean your floor mats. After interference, with the vehicle properly cleaning, always check your floor mat has parked with the engine off, fully depress the been properly installed and is secured to Warning! accelerator, the brake, and the clutch pedal your vehicle using the floor mat fasteners (if present) to check for interference. If your by lightly pulling mat. floor mat interferes with the operation of An improperly attached, damaged, folded, any pedal, or is not secure to the floor, or stacked floor mat, or damaged floor mat remove the floor mat from the vehicle and fasteners may cause your floor mat to place the floor mat in your trunk. interfere with the accelerator, brake, or ONLYuse the passenger’s side floor mat clutch pedals and cause a loss of vehicle on the passenger’s side floor area. control. To prevent SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH:

123 Periodic Safety Checks YouShould Fluid Leaks Make Outside The Vehicle Check area under the vehicle after Warning! Tires overnight parking for fuel, coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks. Also, if gasoline fumes To prevent SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH: SAFETY Examine tires for excessive tread wear are detected or if fuel, or brake fluid and uneven wear patterns. Check for ALWAYS remove any “Track-Use” leaks are suspected. The cause should be equipment before driving on public roads. stones, nails, glass, or other objects located and corrected immediately. lodged in the tread or sidewall. Inspect ALWAYS properly use your three-point the tread for cuts and cracks. Inspect seat belts when driving on public roads. Warning! sidewalls for cuts, cracks, and bulges. In a collision, you and your passengers Check the wheel nuts for tightness. can suffer much greater injuries if you are Check the tires (including spare) for not properly buckled up. Youcan strike the To prevent SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH when proper cold inflation pressure. interior of your vehicle or other passengers, using “Track-Use” parts and equipment: or you can be thrown out of the vehicle. Lights NEVER use any “Track-Use” equipment on public roads. FCA US LLC does not authorize Have someone observe the operation of the use of “Track-Use” equipment on public brake lights and exterior lights while you roads. work the controls. Check turn signal and The intended use of “Track-Use” parts is high beam indicator lights on the for race vehicles on race tracks. To help instrument panel. ensure the safety of the race driver, engineers should supervise the installation Door Latches of “Track-Use” parts. Check for proper closing, latching, and FCA US LLC does not authorize the locking. installation or use of any part noted as “Track-Use” on any new vehicle prior to its first retail sale.

124 STARTING AND OPERATING

Let’s get to the core of the vehicle, and STARTING THE ENGINE ...... 126 see how you can explore its fullest ELECTRIC PARK BRAKE ...... 129 potential. We’ll look at how to drive AUTOMATICTRANSMISSION.....131 safely in any situation, making it a ALFA DNA PRO SELECTOR ...... 137 welcome companion with our comfort ALFA ACTIVE SUSPENSION (AAS) . .140 and wallets in mind. STOP/START SYSTEM ...... 140 SPEED LIMITER ...... 142 SPEED CONTROL (CRUISE CONTROL) ...... 143 ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) — IF EQUIPPED ...... 145 PARK SENSORS SYSTEM ...... 152 LANE DEPARTURE WARNING (LDW) SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED ...... 155 REAR BACK-UP CAMERA / DYNAMIC GRIDLINES ...... 157 REFUELING THE VEHICLE ...... 159 VEHICLE LOADING ...... 160 TRAILER TOWING ...... 161 SUGGESTIONS FOR DRIVING.....162

125 STARTING THE ENGINE Starting Procedure If the vehicle has a discharged battery, Before starting the engine, be sure to Proceed as follows: booster cables may be used to obtain a start from a booster battery or the battery adjust the seat, the interior rear view 1. Apply the electric park brake and set in another vehicle. This type of start can be mirrors, and the door mirrors, and fasten the gear selector to PARK (P) or dangerous if done improperly. Refer to the seat belt correctly. NEUTRAL (N). “Jump Starting” in “In Case Of Emergency” Never press the accelerator pedal before for further information. starting the engine. 2. Fully depress the brake pedal without If necessary, messages indicating the touching the accelerator. Caution! starting procedure can be shown in the 3. Briefly push the ignition button. display. 4. If the engine doesn't start within a few seconds, you need to repeat the To prevent damage to the starter, do not Warning! continuously crank the engine for more than procedure. 25 seconds at a time. Wait 60 seconds If the problem persists, contact an before trying again. When leaving the vehicle, always remove authorized dealer.

STARTING AND OPERATING the key fob from the vehicle and lock your vehicle. Remote Starting System This system uses the key fob to start the Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or Warning! with access to an unlocked vehicle. engine conveniently from outside the vehicle while still maintaining security. Allowing children to be in a vehicle Never pour fuel or other flammable liquid The system has a range of at least 300 unattended is dangerous for a number of into the throttle body air inlet opening in an feet (91 meters). reasons. A child or others could be seriously attempt to start the vehicle. This could or fatally injured. Children should be warned The remote starting system also result in flash fire causing serious personal not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal activates the climate control (if injury. or the transmission gear selector. equipped), the heated seats (if equipped), Do not attempt to push or tow your and the heated steering wheel (if Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle to get it started. Vehicles equipped equipped), depending on temperatures vehicle, or in a location accessible to with an automatic transmission cannot be children. A child could operate power outside and inside of the vehicle. started this way. Unburned fuel could enter windows, other controls, or move the the catalytic converter and once the engine Note: vehicle. has started, ignite and damage the Obstructions between the vehicle converter and vehicle. Do not leave children or animals inside and key fob may reduce this range. parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may cause serious injury or death.

126 How to use Remote Start Remote Start Windshield Wiper De–Icer If Engine Fails To Start Activation — If Equipped All of the following conditions must be Starting the Engine with Key Fob met before the engine will remote start: When remote start is active and the Battery Run Down or Drained outside ambient temperature is less than Gear selector in PARK (P). If the ignition does not respond when the 39°F (4°C), the Windshield Wiper De-Icer Doors closed. button is pushed, the key fob battery will be enabled. Exiting remote start will might be run down or drained. Therefore, Hood closed. resume previous operation, except if the the system does not detect the presence Windshield Wiper De-Icer is active. Trunk closed. of the key fob in the vehicle, and will Hazard switch off. The Windshield Wiper De-Icer timer and display a dedicated message. operation will continue. Brake switch inactive (brake pedal not In this case, follow the instructions pressed). Extended Park Starting outlined in "Starting With A Discharged Key Fob Battery" in the "Getting To Know Battery at an acceptable charge level. If the vehicle has not been started or YourVehicle" chapter, and start the driven for at least 35 days, it is advisable PANIC button not pushed. engine normally. to follow the indications below. System not disabled from previous remote start event. To start the engine, proceed as follows: Vehicle alarm system indicator 1. Briefly push the ignition button Warning! flashing. 2. If the engine does not start, wait five Ignition in the OFF mode. seconds and let the starter cool down and Never pour fuel or other flammable liquid Fuel level meets minimum then repeat the starting procedure into the throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to start the vehicle. This could result requirement. 3. If the engine does not start after eight in flash fire causing serious personal injury. attempts, let the starter cool down for at Remote Start Comfort Systems — If Do not attempt to push or tow your least 10 seconds, and then repeat the Equipped vehicle to get it started. Vehicles equipped starting procedure with an automatic transmission cannot be When Remote Start is activated, the started this way. Unburned fuel could enter heated steering wheel and driver heated If the problem persists, contact your authorized dealer. the catalytic converter and once the engine seat features will automatically turn on in has started, ignite and damage the cold weather. Note: After prolonged vehicle inactivity, converter and vehicle. These features will stay on through the very difficult starting, that can be noticed through rapid fatigue of the starter, If the vehicle has a discharged battery, duration of remote start also until the booster cables may be used to obtain a ignition is cycled to the ON/RUN mode. might also be due to a discharged start from a booster battery or the battery battery. In this case, see the "Jump in another vehicle. This type of start can be Starting" section in the "In Case Of dangerous if done improperly. Refer to Emergency" chapter. “Jump Starting” in “In Case Of Emergency” for further information. 127 2. Engage the PARK (P) mode. When the ignition is in the STOP/OFF mode, the window switches remain active Caution! 3. With engine idling, push the for three minutes. Opening a front door START/STOP button on the steering will cancel this function. wheel to STOP the engine. To prevent damage to the starter, do not After severe driving, idle the engine to continuously crank the engine for more than Note: Do not leave the ignition in ON allow the temperature inside the engine 25 seconds at a time. Wait 60 seconds mode when the engine is off. compartment to cool before shutting off before trying again. To shut off the engine with vehicle speed the engine. greater than 5 mph (8 km/h), you must Turbocharger Cool Down After Starting — Warming Up The push and hold the ignition or push the Engine START/STOP button three times It is recommended before switching the consecutively within a few seconds. The vehicle off, to keep the engine idling for a Proceed as follows: engine will shut down, and the ignition will few minutes so that the turbocharger can Travel slowly, letting the engine run at be placed in the ON mode be suitably lubricated. This procedure is a reduced RPM, without accelerating With the keyless ignition system, it is particularly recommended after severe suddenly. possible to go away from the vehicle driving. STARTING AND OPERATING It is recommended to wait until the taking the key fob with you, without the After a full load operation, keep the digital engine coolant temperature engine switching off. The vehicle will engine idling for three to five minutes indicator starts to rise for maximum inform about the absence of the key on before switching it off. performance. board, only if the doors are closed. This time allows the lubricating oil and Stopping the engine (cycling from the ON the engine coolant to eliminate the Stopping The Engine to the STOP position) the accessories are excessive heat from combustion still powered for about three minutes, or chamber, bearings, inner components and To stop the engine, proceed as follows: until a door is opened. turbocharger. 1. Park the vehicle in a position that is not dangerous for oncoming traffic.

128 ELECTRIC PARK BRAKE "Driver Assistance" and "Automatic If, under exceptional circumstances, the Parking Brake". use of the brake is required with the The vehicle is equipped with electric park vehicle in motion, keep the switch on the brake to guarantee better use and In addition to engaging the electric park brake, along with steering and positioning center console pulled as long as the brake optimal performance compared to a action is necessary. manually operated park brake. chocks in front of the wheels (when on a steep slope), you must always place the The BRAKE warning light may turn on The electric parking brake features a vehicle in the PARK (P) mode before leaving. with the hydraulic system temporarily switch located on the center console, a Should the vehicle battery be faulty, the unavailable, in this case braking is motor with caliper for each rear wheel, controlled by the motors. and an electronic control module. battery must be replaced in order to unlock the electric park brake. The brake lights will also automatically turn on in the same way as for normal Engaging The Park Brake Manually braking with the use of the brake pedal. Briefly pull the switch located on the Release the switch on the center console center console to manually engage the to stop the braking action with the electric park brake when the vehicle is vehicle in motion. stationary. If, through this procedure, the vehicle is Noise may be heard from the rear of the braked until a speed below 1.9 mph vehicle when engaging the electric (3 km/h) is reached and the switch is kept parking brake. pulled, the park brake will definitively A slight movement of the brake pedal engage. may be detected when engaging the 07046S0001EM Note: Driving the vehicle with the electric parking brake with the brake Electric Park Brake Switch electric parking brake engaged, or using pedal pressed. The electric parking brake can be it several times to slow down the vehicle, engaged in two ways: With the electric parking brake engaged, may cause severe damage to the braking the BRAKE warning light on the system. Manually, by pulling the switch on the instrument panel and the switch will center console. illuminate. Disengaging The Electric Park Brake Automatically, in "Safe Hold" or "Auto Manually In order to manually release the park Park Brake" conditions. Caution! brake, the ignition should be in the ON Note: Normally, the electric parking mode. Press the brake pedal, and then brake is engaged automatically when the push the switch on the center console engine is stopped. This function can be With the Electronic Parking Brake failure warning light on, some functions of the briefly. deactivated/activated on the electric parking brake are deactivated. In Information and Entertainment system Noise may be heard from the rear of the this case the driver is responsible for brake vehicle, and a slight movement of the by selecting the following items in activation and vehicle parking in complete sequence on the main menu: "Settings", safety conditions. 129 brake pedal may be detected during "Safe Hold": if the vehicle speed is disengagement. Caution! lower than 1.9 mph (3 km/h), the gear After disengaging the electric parking selector is not in PARK (P) position and brake, the BRAKE warning light on the the driver's intention of leaving the instrument panel and the light on the Never use gear position PARK (P) instead of vehicle is detected, the electric park switch will turn off. the electric parking brake. Always engage brake will automatically engage to hold the electric parking brake when parking the If the BRAKE warning light on the vehicle to prevent injury or damage caused the vehicle in safety conditions. instrument panel remains on with the by the unexpected movement of the vehicle. "Auto Park Brake": if the vehicle speed electric parking brake disengaged, this is below 1.9 mph (3 km/h), the electric indicates a fault: in this case, contact an authorized dealer. Electric Park Brake Operating Modes park brake will automatically engage when the gear selector is in PARK (P) The electric park brake may operate as follows: position. The light on the switch located on the center console switches on Warning! "Dynamic Operating Mode": this mode together with the BRAKE warning light on is activated by pulling the switch the instrument panel when the park brake STARTING AND OPERATING repeatedly while driving. Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or is engaged and applied to the wheels. with access to an unlocked vehicle. "Static Engagement and Release Each automatic park brake engagement Allowing children to be in a vehicle Mode": with the vehicle stationary, the can be cancelled by pressing the switch unattended is dangerous for a number of electric park brake can be activated by on the center console and at the same reasons. A child or others could be seriously pulling the switch on the center console or fatally injured. Children should be warned time moving the gear selector for the not to touch the park brake, brake pedal or once. On the other hand, push the switch transmission to position PARK (P). the gear selector. and the brake pedal at the same time to Do not leave the key fob in or near the disengage the brake. vehicle or in a location accessible to "Drive Away Release": the electric park children. A child could operate power brake will automatically disengage with windows, other controls, or move the the driver side seat belt fastened and the vehicle. detection of an action performed by the Be sure the park brake is fully disengaged driver to move the vehicle (forward gear before driving; failure to do so can lead to brake failure and a collision. or reverse gear). This feature can be turned on or off in the Information and Always fully apply the park brake when Entertainment System. leaving your vehicle, or it may roll and cause damage or injury.

130 Safe Hold AUTOMATICTRANSMISSION Unintended movement of a vehicle could Safe Hold is a safety function that The vehicle can be equipped with an injure those in or near the vehicle. As with all automatically engages the electric park vehicles, you should never exit a vehicle electronically controlled 8-speed while the engine is running. Before exiting a brake in the event of a dangerous automatic transmission where gear vehicle, always apply the park brake, shift condition for the vehicle. shifting automatically takes place, the transmission into PARK, and turn the The electric park brake engages depending on the vehicle usage ignition STOP/OFF.When the ignition is in automatically to prevent vehicle instantaneous parameters (vehicle the STOP/OFF mode, the transmission is movement if: speed, grade, and accelerator pedal locked in PARK, securing the vehicle against unwanted movement. The vehicle speed is below 2 mph position). (3 km/h). The new transmission is an absolute When leaving the vehicle, always make innovation, as it can match the sure the ignition is in the STOP/OFF mode, A transmission operating mode Stop/Start system with the traditional remove the key fob from the vehicle, and different from PARK (P) is activated. automatic transmissions with built-in lock the vehicle. The driver's seat belt is not fastened. torque converter. For further Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or The driver side door is open. information, refer to the “Stop/Start” with access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing section within this chapter. children to be in a vehicle unattended is No attempts to apply pressure on the Manual gear shifting can still occur dangerous for a number of reasons. A child brake pedal have been detected. or others could be seriously or fatally thanks to the "sequential mode" position injured. Children should be warned not to The “Safe Hold” function can be for the gear selector. touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the temporarily disabled by pressing the transmission gear selector. switch located on the center console and the brake pedal at the same time, with Warning! Do not leave the key fob in or near the the vehicle stationary and the driver side vehicle (or in a location accessible to children), and do not leave the ignition in the door open. AVVor ON mode. A child could operate It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or Once disabled, the function will activate power windows, other controls, or move the NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than again when the vehicle speed reaches vehicle. idle speed. If your foot is not firmly pressing 12 mph (20 km/h) or the ignition is cycled the brake pedal, the vehicle could to STOP and then to ON. accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. Youcould lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or something. Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally and your foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal.

131 Caution!

Damage to the transmission may occur if the following precautions are not observed: Shift into or out of PARK or REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop. Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE, NEUTRAL, or DRIVE when the engine is 07076S0001EM 07076S0002EM above idle speed. Gear Display Gear Selector Center Console Before shifting into any gear, make sure Gear Selector 1 — Gear Selector your foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal. The gear functioning is controlled by the 2 — PARK (P) Button gear selector, which can assume the

STARTING AND OPERATING Display following positions: The letter corresponding to the mode The following information is shown on the P = PARK selected on the gear selector lights up dedicated area of the display: R = REVERSE and appears on the instrument cluster In Automatic Mode: the active mode display. N = NEUTRAL (P,R, N, D) and with "D" the current gear To select a mode, move the gear selector number. D = DRIVE, (automatic forward speed) forward or backwards, together with In Manual Drive Mode (Sequential): AutoStick: + manually shift to higher pressing the brake pedal and button to the mode (M), the current gear and the gear; – manually shift to lower gear engage REVERSE (R). double or single gear shift request, both The positions diagram is illustrated on up and down (single or double arrow). the top of the gear selector.

132 (D) or REVERSE (R), the vehicle must be moving at a low speed or stopped, and Warning! the brake pedal must also be pressed. Note: Never use the PARK position as a DO NOT accelerate while shifting substitute for the park brake. Always apply from position PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N) the park brake fully when parked to guard to another position. against vehicle movement and possible injury or damage. After selecting a gear, wait a few seconds before accelerating. This Yourvehicle could move and injure you and others if it is not in PARK. Check by 07076S0005EM precaution is particularly important with trying to move the gear selector out of Gear Selector engine cold. PARK with the brake pedal released. Make 3 — Gear Selector Button sure the transmission is in PARK before Transmission Operating Modes leaving the vehicle. PARK (P) It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or The gear selector is a joystick style The transmission is locked in this mode. NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than shifting mechanism which returns to the The engine can be started in this mode. idle speed. If your foot is not firmly pressing center position automatically. It can be Note: Never try to engage PARK (P) the brake pedal, the vehicle could pushed forward twice and rearward accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. twice, based on the starting condition. mode when the vehicle is moving. Before Youcould lose control of the vehicle and hit leaving the vehicle, make sure this mode someone or something. Only shift into gear The PARK (P) mode can be is engaged (letter P shown on the display enabled/disabled by pushing the PARK when the engine is idling normally and your and gear selector) and that the park foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal. (P) button. brake is engaged. Unintended movement of a vehicle could To transition the vehicle into REVERSE When parking on a flat surface, first (R) mode from DRIVE (D) mode, or into injure those in or near the vehicle. As with all engage the PARK (P) mode and then vehicles, you should never exit a vehicle DRIVE (D) mode from REVERSE (R) engage the electric park brake. while the engine is running. Before exiting a mode, it is necessary to move the gear vehicle, always apply the park brake, shift selector by pushing the gear selector When parking uphill, before activating the PARK (P) mode, engage the electric the transmission into PARK, and turn the button. ignition STOP/OFF.When the ignition is in park brake. Otherwise, it could be the STOP/OFF mode, the transmission is When using AutoStick, activate it by difficult to engage the (P) mode. moving the gear selector from DRIVE (D) locked in PARK, securing the vehicle against to the left and then forward toward the - To check that the PARK (P) mode is unwanted movement. symbol or backward toward the + symbol actually engaged, make sure (P) is When leaving the vehicle, always make and the gear is changed. illuminated on the display and on the gear sure the ignition is in the STOP/OFF mode, selector. To shift out of PARK (P), or to pass from remove the key fob from the vehicle, and lock the vehicle. position NEUTRAL (N) to position DRIVE 133 Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or park brake and shift the transmission AutoStick with access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing into PARK (P) if you must leave the In the case of frequent shifting (e.g. for children to be in a vehicle unattended is vehicle. sport driving, when the vehicle is driven dangerous for a number of reasons. A child with a heavy load or on slopes), it is or others could be seriously or fatally recommended to use the Autostick injured. Children should be warned not to Warning! (sequential shifting) mode to select and touch the park brake, brake pedal or the keep a lower fixed ratio. transmission gear selector. In these conditions, the use of a lower Do not leave the key fob in or near the Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the ignition to coast down a hill. These are gear improves vehicle performance, vehicle (or in a location accessible to preventing overheating. children), and do not leave the ignition in the unsafe practices that limit your response to ON mode. A child could operate power changing traffic or road conditions. You It is possible to shift from DRIVE (D) windows, other controls, or move the might lose control of the vehicle and have a mode to sequential mode regardless of vehicle. collision. vehicle speed. Activation DRIVE (D) Caution! Starting from DRIVE (D), move the STARTING AND OPERATING Use this mode in normal driving selector to the left (– and + indication of conditions. the trim) to activate the sequential drive Before moving the transmission gear Shifting from DRIVE (D) to PARK (P) or mode. The gear engaged will be shown on selector out of PARK, you must push the REVERSE (R) modes must take place the display. ignition button to cycle from STOP/OFF only after releasing the accelerator Shifting is made by moving the gear mode to the ON mode, and also press the pedal, with vehicle at a standstill and selector forwards, towards symbol – or brake pedal. Otherwise, damage to the gear brake pedal pressed. selector could result. backwards, towards symbol +. This mode ensures automatic DO NOT race the engine when shifting engagement of the most suitable gears Steering Column Mounted Shift from PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear for driving needs and maximum fuel Paddles range, as this can damage the drivetrain. economy in terms of consumption. The gear can also be manually shifted by In this position, the transmission shifts using the paddles behind the steering REVERSE (R) the gears automatically, selecting the wheel. Pull the right paddle (+) toward the most suitable for forward driving among steering wheel and release it to engage a Select this mode only with the vehicle at higher gear, and perform the same a standstill. those available as you go. In this way the vehicle's optimal driving characteristics operation with the left paddle (-) to NEUTRAL (N) are provided for all conditions. engage a lower gear. Use this range when the vehicle is standing for prolonged periods with the engine running. The engine may be started in this range. Apply the electric 134 The vehicle will keep the gear 3. Push and hold the ignition until the selected by the driver until the safety engine turns OFF. conditions allow it. 4. Wait for about 10 seconds, then This means, for example, that the restart the engine. system will try to prevent the engine 5. Shift into the desired gear range. If from switching off, automatically the problem is no longer detected, the downshifting if the engine speed is too transmission will return to normal low. operation. Automatic Transmission Limp Home Note: Even if the transmission can be 07076S0006EM Mode reset, we recommend that you visit your Steering Wheel Shift Paddles authorized dealer at your earliest Transmission function is monitored Note: If only one manual shift is possible convenience. Yourauthorized electronically for abnormal conditions. If dealer has diagnostic equipment to necessary, the letter (D) will remain on the a condition is detected that could result display with the engaged gear next to it. determine if the problem could reoccur. If in transmission damage, Transmission the transmission cannot be reset, service Deactivation Limp Home Mode is activated. is required at your authorized dealer. To deactivate the sequential driving mode, In this condition, the transmission stays in fourth gear, regardless of the selected Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock bring the gear selector back in position System DRIVE (D) ("automatic" driving mode). gear. Positions PARK (P), REVERSE (R) and NEUTRAL (N) still work. This vehicle is equipped with a Brake The symbol might light up in the Transmission Shift Interlock system Warning! instrument cluster. (BTSI) that holds the gear selector in PARK (P) unless the brakes are applied. Temporary failure This system prevents you from moving Do not downshift for additional engine braking In the event of a momentary problem, the on a slippery surface. The drive wheels could the gear selector from position PARK (P) transmission can be reset to regain all lose their grip and the vehicle could skid, unless the brakes are applied. causing a collision or personal injury. forward gears by performing the following steps: To shift the transmission out of PARK (P), the ignition must be cycled to the AVV Note: 1. Stop the vehicle. mode (engine running or not) and the brake pedal must be pressed. To select the correct gear for 2. Shift the transmission into PARK (P), maximum deceleration (engine brake), if possible. If not, shift the transmission just keep the gear paddle pulled (–): the to NEUTRAL (N). transmission goes to an operating mode in which the vehicle can slow down easily. 135 Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock Before activating any transmission Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or Disabling operating mode, fully depress the brake with access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing Only if strictly necessary (e.g. pushing the pedal. children to be in a vehicle unattended is vehicle, conveyor vehicle washing dangerous for a number of reasons. A child Note: The unexpected movement of the systems) inhibit the automatic activation or others could be seriously or fatally vehicle can injure the occupants or of PARK (P) mode when stopping the injured. Children should be warned not to people nearby. Do not leave the vehicle touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the engine, or proceed as described below: with engine running: before getting out of transmission gear selector. 1. Vehicle at a standstill. the passenger compartment always Do not leave the key fob in or near the engage the electric park brake, select the vehicle (or in a location accessible to 2. NEUTRAL (N) mode activated. PARK (P) mode, stop the engine. children), and do not leave the ignition in the 3. Push the ignition button for at least AVVor ON mode. A child could operate three seconds. power windows, other controls, or move the Warning! vehicle. The automatic park brake engagement function when the engine is stopped can also be deactivated on the Information It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or Caution! STARTING AND OPERATING and Entertainment system by selecting NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than the following functions on the main menu: idle speed. If your foot is not firmly pressing "Settings", "Driver Assistance" and the brake pedal, the vehicle could Only engage the gear with engine at idling "Automatic Parking Brake". accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. while fully depressing the brake pedal. If the Youcould lose control of the vehicle and hit transmission temperature exceeds the Important Notes someone or something. Only shift into gear normal operating limits, the transmission when the engine is idling normally and your Failure to comply with what is reported control unit may change the gear foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal. engagement order and reduce the drive below may damage the transmission: Unintended movement of a vehicle could torque. If the transmission overheats, it Shift into PARK (P) mode only with the injure those in or near the vehicle. As with all could operate incorrectly until it cools down. vehicle at a standstill. vehicles, you should never exit a vehicle When using the vehicle with extremely Select REVERSE (R) mode, or pass while the engine is running. Before exiting a low external temperatures, the from REVERSE to another mode only vehicle, always apply the park brake, shift transmission operation may change the transmission into PARK, and turn the with the vehicle at a standstill and engine depending on the engine and transmission ignition STOP/OFF.When the ignition is in temperature, as well as vehicle speed. idling. the STOP/OFF mode, the transmission is Activation of the torque converter clutch Do not change between PARK (P), locked in PARK, securing the vehicle against and of the eighth gear is inhibited until the unwanted movement. REVERSE (R), NEUTRAL (N) or DRIVE (D) transmission oil is correctly warmed up. modes with engine running at a speed When leaving the vehicle, always make Complete operation of the transmission will be enabled as soon as the fluid temperature above idling. sure the ignition is in the STOP/OFF mode, remove the key fob from the vehicle, and reaches the predefined value. lock the vehicle. 136 ALFA DNA PRO SELECTOR The symbol of the active mode lights up Activation in red on the selector. Alfa DNA Pro System It is activated by rotating the selector to On the instrument panel display, the the letter "n", the displays light up in blue. This vehicle is equipped with a Alfa DNA different modes are characterized by Pro system selector (located on the different colors: center console). There are four modes of Natural - Blue operation to be selected according to driving style and road conditions: Dynamic - Red Advanced Efficiency - Green RACE - Yellow

07116S0002EM Natural Mode The "Performance" screen graphically reproduces some parameters closely linked to the efficiency of the driving 07076S0004EM Alfa DNA Pro System Selector style, with a view to limiting consumption.

d = Dynamic (sports driving mode). 07076S0003EM n = Natural (mode for driving in normal Mode Display conditions). Each driving mode is graphically different a = Advanced Efficiency (ECO driving in frame color and contents of each mode for maximum fuel savings). individual "performance" screen. RACE = track race driving mode. Driving Modes = Adjusts the calibration of the "Natural" Mode active suspension. “Natural” Mode is characterized by engine and transmission: standard Unlike the other modes, the RACE 07116S0001EM position does not latch; therefore, by response. Natural Mode Performance Display rotating the selector to RACE, it will return to its initial position "d".

137 "Dynamic" Mode "Advanced Efficiency" Mode Activation Warning! Activation It is activated by rotating the selector to It is activated by rotating the selector to the letter "d", the displays light up in red. the letter "a", the displays light up in green. In "Dynamic", the sensitivity of the accelerator pedal increases considerably. Consequently, driving is less fluid and comfortable.

07116S0003EM 07116S0005EM STARTING AND OPERATING Dynamic Mode Advanced Efficiency Mode ESC and ASR systems: intervention ESC and ASR systems: intervention thresholds that ensure more enjoyable, thresholds aimed at ensuring maximum

sportier driving while guaranteeing the 07116S0006EM safety in low-grip driving conditions. It is stability of the car. Dynamic Mode Performance Display advisable to select "Advanced Efficiency" Engine and transmission: adoption of The "Performance" screen displays mode in the presence of low-grip road sports mapping. parameters related to vehicle stability, surfaces. the graphs illustrate the trend of the “Advanced Efficiency” Mode is longitudinal/lateral accelerations characterized by reduced engine (G-meter information), considering performance and ECO shifting strategy gravity acceleration as a reference unit. for the automatic transmission. Lateral acceleration peaks are displayed on the right.

138 The "Performance" screen graphically driving the vehicle normally without displays some parameters closely operating the brakes. Warning! related to the vehicle consumption. Driving Mode Deactivation To deactivate any driving mode, simply It is recommended to activate this mode at the track. move the selector to any other mode. In "RACE", the sensitivity of the Note: accelerator pedal increases considerably. When the engine is next started, the Consequently, driving is less fluid and "Advanced Efficiency", "Dynamic" and comfortable. "Natural" mode selected previously is retained. The system will reactivate in The "Performance" screen displays "Advanced Efficiency", "Dynamic" or parameters related to vehicle stability, "Natural" mode, depending on which the graphs illustrate the trend of the 07116S0008EM mode was selected before the engine Advanced Efficiency Mode Performance longitudinal/lateral accelerations was stopped. Display (G-meter information), considering When the engine is next started, the “RACE” Mode gravity acceleration as a reference unit. "RACE" mode selected previously is not Activation The screen displays the lateral and longitudinal acceleration peaks. retained. The system will reactivate in It is activated by rotating the selector to "Dynamic" mode. position "RACE", the displays light up in yellow. It is not possible to go directly from "Dynamic" mode to "Advanced Efficiency" mode and vice versa. You must always activate the “Natural” mode first and then select the other mode.

05036S0014EM RACE Mode Performance Display

07116S0004EM Note: If the brake system overheats, this RACE Mode is communicated by the Information and Entertainment system. In this case, allow Engine and transmission: adoption of the system to cool for a few minutes by sports mapping. 139 ALFA ACTIVE SUSPENSION STOP/START SYSTEM Engine stopping is signaled by the symbol lighting up on the instrument (AAS) Stop/Start System The vehicle's electronic suspension cluster display. management system is aimed at The Stop/Start system automatically Restarting the Engine optimizing the vehicle's performance. shuts off the engine during a vehicle stop if the required conditions are met. To restart the engine, release the brake The system continuously monitors the Releasing the brake pedal or accelerator pedal. damping of the suspension through the pedal will automatically restart the With the brake pressed and the actuator installed on each shock engine. transmission in automatic mode DRIVE absorber. The calibration of the shock (D), the engine will restart by shifting to absorbers can be adjusted to the The function was developed to increase vehicle efficiency by reducing fuel REVERSE (R), to PARK (P) or to conditions of the road surface and to the "AutoStick". dynamic conditions of the vehicle, consumption, gas emissions, and sound With brake pressed if the gear selector is improving its comfort and road handling. pollution. in "AutoStick" mode, the engine will The driver can choose, even while driving, Operating Mode restart by shifting to PARK (P) or by (only in "d" or "RACE" mode), between two Stopping the Engine moving the selector to + or -. types of suspension calibration: a more STARTING AND OPERATING sporty ride or a more comfortable one. With vehicle at a standstill and brake System Manual Activation/ pedal pressed, the engine switches off if By pushing the button, the system will Deactivation the gear selector is in a position other work with the shock absorber calibration than REVERSE (R). To manually activate/deactivate the which favors driving comfort. system, push the button located in the The system does not operate when the control panel on the left of the steering gear selector is in REVERSE (R), in order wheel. to making parking maneuvers easier. In the event of stops uphill, engine switching off is disabled to make the "Hill Start Assist" function available (works only with running engine). NOTE: The engine can only be automatically stopped after having run at about 6 mph (10 km/h). After an automatic restart, the vehicle only needs 04306S0001EM to exceed a speed of 0.3 mph (0.5 km/h) Alfa Active Suspension Button to stop the engine. If the system fails, the following symbol 07126S0051EM will appear in the instrument cluster Stop/Start Button display . 140 System Activation With the automatic climate control Safety Functions The activation of the system is indicated active, an adequate cabin heating or When the engine is stopped through the by the symbol lighting up on the cooling comfort has not been reached or Stop/Start system, if the driver releases display. In this condition, the light on the with MAX-DEF function active. their seat belt, opens the driver's or button is off. During the first period of use, to passenger's door, or opens the hood from System Deactivation initialize the system. inside the vehicle, the engine can be restarted only by using the ignition. A message will appear on the display Steering angle beyond threshold. when the system is deactivated. In this This condition is indicated to the driver condition, the light on the button is on. Engine Restarting Conditions both through a buzzer and a message on the instrument cluster display. Note: Each time the engine is started, Due to comfort, emission control and the system is activated regardless of safety reasons, the engine can restart Irregular Operation where was when it was previously automatically without any action by the switched off. In the event of malfunction, the driver, under special conditions, such as: Stop/Start system is deactivated. Possible Reasons The Engine Does Not Battery not sufficiently charged. For failure indications, see the "Warning Autostop Reduced braking system vacuum (e.g. Lights and Messages" paragraph, For higher comfort and increased safety, if the brake pedal is pressed repeatedly). "Getting To Know YourInstrument Panel" and to reduce emissions, there are Vehicle moving (e.g. when driving on chapter. certain conditions where the engine will roads with a grade). Vehicle Inactivity not autostop despite the system being Engine stopping by the Stop/Start active, such as: In the event of vehicle inactivity (or if the system for more than approx. three Engine still cold. battery is replaced), special attention minutes. must be paid to the disconnection of the Especially cold outside temperature. With the automatic climate control battery power supply. Battery not sufficiently charged. active, an adjustment in cabin heating or Driver's door not shut. cooling is made or with MAX-DEF Driver's seat belt not fastened. function active. Reverse gear engaged (e.g. for parking maneuvers).

141 Proceed as follows: SPEED LIMITER Remove connector from socket to Description disconnect sensor (battery status monitoring) installed on the negative pole This feature allows the speed of the of the battery. This sensor should never vehicle to be limited to speeds, which can be disconnected from the pole except if be set by the driver. the battery is replaced. The maximum speed can be set with the vehicle stationary or in motion. The minimum speed that can be set is 18 mph (30mk/h).

When this feature is active, the vehicle 07136S0001EM speed depends on the pressing of the Speed Limiter Display accelerator pedal until the programmed Speed Limit Programming speed limit is reached (see "Speed Limit Programming" paragraph). The speed limit can be programmed through the Information and

STARTING AND OPERATING Activation Entertainment System. The feature can be activated/ 07126S0002EM To access the function on the main menu, Battery Power Supply deactivated through the Information and select the following items in sequence: Entertainment System. "Settings", "Safety" and "Speed Limiter 1 — Socket Activating The Device Set Speed". 2 — Sensor By turning the Rotary Pad, the speed 3 — Connector To access this feature on the main menu, select the following items in sequence: increases by 5 mph (5 km/h), from a "Settings", "Safety", “Speed Limiter” and minimum of 18 mph (30 km/h) to a Note: After setting the ignition to STOP “ON”. maximum of 112 mph (180 km/h). and having closed the driver side door, The activation of this feature is signaled Exceeding The Programmed Speed wait at least one minute before by the displaying of the green symbol By fully pressing the accelerator pedal, disconnecting the electrical supply from along with the last speed set. The Speed the programmed speed can be exceeded the battery. When reconnecting the Limiter feature can remain active even with the device active (e.g. in the electrical supply to the battery, make concurrently with the Speed Control event of overtaking). sure that the ignition is in the STOP mode system. If a speed limit below the one and the driver side door is closed. indicated in the Speed Control is The device is disabled until the speed selected, the Speed Control speed will be drops below the set limit, after which it lowered to that of the Speed Limiter. This reactivates automatically. function remains available in RACE mode. 142 Programmed Speed Icon Flashing SPEED CONTROL (CRUISE The programmed speed will flash in the CONTROL) Warning! following scenarios: Speed Control Description When the accelerator pedal has been This is an electronically controlled driving Speed Control can be dangerous where the fully pressed and the vehicle has assistance feature that allows the system cannot maintain a constant speed. exceeded the programmed speed. desired vehicle speed to be maintained, Yourvehicle could go too fast for the conditions, and you could lose control and Activating the system after setting a without having to press the accelerator pedal. This feature can be used at a speed have an accident. Do not use Speed Control limit below the effective speed of the in heavy traffic or on roads that are winding, vehicle. above 25 mph (40 km/h) on long icy, snow-covered or slippery. stretches of dry, straight roads with few In the event of overtake acceleration. variations (highways). Activating Deactivation The speed control buttons are located on the left side of the steering wheel. To activate the Speed Control System, The feature can be activated/ push the on/off button location on the Note: deactivated through the Information and left side of the steering wheel. Entertainment System. To ensure correct operation, the Deactivating The Device speed control is designed to deactivate To access this feature on the main menu, if more than one function is operated select the following items in sequence: simultaneously. In this case, the system "Settings", "Safety", “Speed Limiter” and can be reactivated by pushing the on/off “OFF”. button and setting the desired speed. Automatic Deactivation Of The Device It is not recommended to use this The device deactivates automatically in feature in city traffic. the event of fault in the system. In this case, contact an authorized dealer. While driving downhill, the system could brake the vehicle to keep the set speed 07146S0001EM Temporary Signal Loss the same. Speed Control On/Off Switch When the devices loses the signal, the The activation of the system is signaled white symbol without the speed by the white warning light illuminating indication illuminates on the display. on the instrument cluster. System Failure The Speed Control function can remain If there is a system failure, the amber active at the same time as the Speed symbol illuminates on the display. Limiter System. If the set speed is higher than the speed set with the Speed 143 Limiter, the set speed will be lowered to Increasing/Decreasing Speed that of the Speed Limiter. Increasing Speed This function remains available in RACE Once the Speed Control has been mode. activated, the speed can be increased by Note: The system cannot be engaged in pushing the SET switch upward. FIRST or REVERSE gear. It is advisable to By keeping the switch pushed, the set engage it in THIRD gear or higher if using speed will increase until the switch is the Autostick feature. released. The new speed will then be set. At every movement of the SET switch, the set speed can be adjusted. Warning! 07146S0002EM SET Switch Location Decreasing Speed Leaving the Speed Control system on when If needed (when overtaking for instance), When the system is active, to reduce the not in use is dangerous. Youcould you can accelerate beyond the set speed speed, push the SET switch downward. accidentally set the system or cause it to go by pressing the accelerator. When you By keeping the switch pushed, the set

STARTING AND OPERATING faster than you want. Youcould lose control release the pedal, the vehicle will return speed will decrease until the switch is and have an accident. Always leave the to the previously set speed. released. The new speed will then be set. system OFF when you are not using it. When traveling downhill with the system At every movement of the SET switch, active, the vehicle speed may slightly the set speed can be adjusted. Setting The Desired Speed exceed the set one. Note: Moving the SET switch allows to To set a desired speed, proceed as Note: Before pushing the SET switch, the adjust the speed according to the follows: vehicle must be traveling at a constant selected unit of measurement set on the speed on a flat surface. Information and Entertainment System 1. Turn the Speed Control on. (see dedicated supplement). 2. When the vehicle has reached the Accelerating When Overtaking desired speed, push the SET switch up or Press the accelerator as you would down and release to activate. When the normally. When the pedal is released, the accelerator is released, the vehicle will vehicle will return to the set speed. maintain the selected speed automatically.

144 Use Of The Feature On Hilly Routes In Autostick (sequential) mode, before ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL The system can automatically downshift resuming the previously set speed, you (ACC) — IF EQUIPPED to keep the set speed when driving on should accelerate until you are close to System Description hilly routes. that speed. Then, push and release the On steep grades, the loss or gain in speed RES button. The Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is a may be considerable and is advisable to Deactivating driver assist system that combines the deactivate the Speed Control. speed control functions with controlling Lightly pressing the brake pedal Note: The system keeps the speed set the distance from the vehicle ahead. deactivates the speed control without The system allows to set and hold the even uphill and downhill. A slight variation deleting the set speed. in the speed on slight rises is completely vehicle at the desired speed without normal. The speed control may also be needing to press the accelerator. It also deactivated by applying the electric park allows to set and hold a distance from the Recalling The Speed brake or when the braking system is vehicle ahead (these settings are set by Once the system has been deactivated, operated (e.g. operation of the ESC the driver). but not canceled, the previously set system). The Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) uses a speed can be recalled by pushing the RES The set speed is deleted in the following radar sensor located behind the front button and removing your foot from the cases: bumper and a camera located in the accelerator. The system will be set to the Pushing the on/off button a second center/upper part of the windshield, to last stored speed. time. detect the presence of a vehicle close Note: Before resuming the previously ahead. set speed, you must accelerate to a The ignition is cycled to STOP. speed close to that speed. If there is a malfunction with the Speed Control.

06016S0003EM Front Bumper Radar Location

07146S0003EM Resume Button Location

145 Note: Adaptive Cruise Control The ACC system: performance is not guaranteed under the following circumstances, and it is Does not react to pedestrians, oncoming recommended to turn the system off vehicles, and stationary objects (e.g., a when: stopped vehicle in a traffic jam or a disabled vehicle). Driving in fog, heavy rain, or snow. Cannot take street, traffic, and weather Driving in heavy traffic or conditions into account, and may be limited construction zones. upon adverse sight distance conditions. Does not always fully recognize complex Driving on icy, snowy, slippery roads, driving conditions, which can result in wrong 06016S0004EM roads with steep climbs and descents, or or missing distance warnings. Windshield Camera Location roads with numerous turns and bends. Will bring the vehicle to a complete stop This system enhances driving comfort Entering a turn lane. while following a target vehicle and hold the while on the highway or out of town with vehicle for approximately 3 minutes in the When circumstances do not allow light traffic. stop position. If the target vehicle does not safe driving at a constant speed. start moving within 3 minutes the parking STARTING AND OPERATING If the sensor does not detect a vehicle brake will be activated, and the ACC system ahead, the system will maintain a fixed will be canceled. set speed. Warning! Youshould switch off the ACC system: If the sensor detects a vehicle ahead, the When driving in fog, heavy rain, heavy system automatically intervenes by snow, sleet, heavy traffic, and complex braking (or accelerating) slightly in order Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is a driving situations (i.e., in highway not to exceed the original set speed, so convenience system. It is not a substitute construction zones). that the vehicle keeps the preset for active driving involvement. It is always distance, seeking to adapt to the speed the driver’s responsibility to be attentive of When entering a turn lane or highway off ramp; when driving on roads that are of the vehicle ahead. road, traffic, and weather conditions, vehicle speed, distance to the vehicle ahead; winding, icy, snow-covered, slippery, or have and, most importantly, brake operation to steep uphill or downhill slopes. ensure safe operation of the vehicle under When circumstances do not allow safe all road conditions. Yourcomplete attention driving at a constant speed. is always required while driving to maintain safe control of your vehicle. Failure to follow these warnings can result in a collision and death or serious personal injury.

146 Activation/Deactivation Pausing/Deactivating The system has four operating states: With the feature enabled (speed not set), push the button to disable. Enabled (speed not set) With the feature active (speed set), push Activated (speed set) the button to pause. The display will show the icon in white with the speed in Paused brackets. To deactivate the feature, push Deactivated the button a second time. Enabling/Activating Setting The Desired Speed

To enable the system, push and release 07146S0016EM The speed can be set from a minimum of the button located on the left side on Enabled Icons 20 mph (30 km/h) to a maximum of the steering wheel. 110 mph (180 km/h). Setting a speed activates the system. The display shows the icon in green with When the vehicle reaches the desired the set speed. speed, push the SET switch upward or downward and release it to activate the Note: The system cannot be enabled system. When the accelerator is released, when RACE mode is active. the vehicle will maintain the set speed automatically. Warning!

Leaving the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) system on when not in use is dangerous. You 07146S0010EM could accidentally set the system or cause it On/Off Button to go faster than you want. Youcould lose control and have a collision. Always leave When the system is enabled and ready to the system off when you are not using it. operate, the display shows the white icon above dashes in place of the speed.

07146S0017EM SET Switch

147 While the accelerator pedal is pressed, If the system is set, the conditions Note: the system will not be able to control the described above also cause a Moving the SET switch allows you to distance between the vehicle and the one cancellation or deactivation of the adjust the speed according to the ahead. In this case, the speed will be system. These situations may vary selected unit of measurement ("US" or determined only by the position of the according to the conditions. "Metric") set on the Information and accelerator pedal. Note: The system will not be deactivated Entertainment System (see dedicated The system will return to normal when speeds higher than those set are supplement). operation as soon as the accelerator reached by pressing the accelerator pedal is released. pedal above 110 mph (180 km/h). In When the unit of measurement is set The system cannot be set: these situations, the system may not to Metric, pushing and holding the SET work correctly and it is recommended to switch will adjust the speed in 10 km/h When pressing the brake pedal. deactivate it. increments. When the brakes are overheated. To VaryThe Speed Setting By keeping the accelerator pedal depressed, the vehicle can continue to When the electric park brake has been Increasing Speed operated. accelerate beyond the set speed. In this Once the system has been activated, you case, use the SET switch to set the STARTING AND OPERATING When either PARK (P), REVERSE (R) or can increase the speed by pushing the speed to the vehicle’s current speed. NEUTRAL (N) is engaged. SET switch upward. Each time the switch is pushed, the speed increases by 1 mph. When you push the SET button to When the engine rpm is above a reduce the speed, the braking system maximum threshold. By pushing and holding the switch intervenes automatically if the engine upward, the set speed will increase in brake does not slow the vehicle down When the vehicle speed is not within increments of 5 mph until the switch is the operational speed range. sufficiently to reach the set speed. The released. Then, the new speed will be set. device holds the set speed uphill and When the ESC (or ABS or other Decreasing Speed downhill; however a slight variation is stability control systems) are operating Once the system has been activated, you entirely normal, particularly on slight or have just operated. can decrease the speed by pushing the inclines. When the ESC system is off. SET switch downward. Each time the The transmission could shift to a switch is pushed, the speed decreases by lower gear when driving downhill, or When the Forward Collision Warning 1 mph. system is braking automatically. when accelerating. This is normal and By pushing and holding the switch necessary to maintain the set speed In the event of system failure. downward, the set speed will decrease in The system will disable while driving increments of 5 mph until the switch is When the engine is OFF. if the brakes overheat. released. Then, the new speed will be set. In case of obstruction of the radar sensor (in this case the bumper area where it is located must be cleaned). 148 Accelerating When Overtaking When driving with ACC activated and following a vehicle, the system will provide an additional acceleration up to the ACC set speed to assist in passing the vehicle. This additional acceleration is triggered when the driver utilizes the left turn signal and will only be active when passing on the left hand side. The system detects the direction of traffic automatically when the vehicle 07146S0018EM 07146S0019EM passes from left-hand traffic to RES (Resume) Button Distance Icons right-hand traffic. In this case, the Before returning to the previously set The distances from the vehicle ahead are overtaking assist function is only active speed, bring the speed close to that proportional to speed. when the reference vehicle is overtaken value, then push the RES button and The interval of time with relation to the on the right. The additional acceleration release it. vehicle ahead remains constant and is deactivated when the driver uses the varies from one second (for the short right direction indicator and returns to distance one-bar setting) to two seconds the original lane. Warning! (for the maximum distance four-bar Resuming The Speed setting). Once the system has been canceled but The Resume function should only be used if The set distance is shown on the display not deactivated, to resume a previously traffic and road conditions permit. Resuming by a dedicated icon. set speed, simply push the RES button a set speed that is too high or too low for The setting is four (maximum) the first and remove your foot from the prevailing traffic and road conditions could time the system is used. After the accelerator to recall it. cause the vehicle to accelerate or decelerate distance has been modified by the driver, too sharply for safe operation. Failure to The system will be set to the last stored the new distance will be stored also after follow these warnings can result in a collision the system is deactivated and speed. and death or serious personal injury. reactivated.

Setting The Distance Between Vehicles To Decrease The Distance Push and release the distance button to The distance between your vehicle and decrease the distance setting. The the vehicle ahead may be set to one bar distance setting decreases by one bar (short), two bars (medium), three bars (shorter) every time the button is pushed. (long), or four bars (maximum). 149 Warning! Warning!

The maximum breaking applied by the When the ACC system is resumed, the driver system is limited. The driver may apply the must ensure that there are no pedestrians, brakes in all cases if needed. vehicles or objects in the path of the vehicle. Failure to follow these warnings can result in If the system predicts that the braking a collision and death or serious personal level is insufficient to hold the set distance, injury. either “BRAKE!” or a dedicated message is displayed to warn the driver of approaching 07146S0015EM the vehicle ahead. An acoustic signal is also Deactivation Distance Button emitted. In this case, it is advised to brake The set speed is held if there are no immediately as necessary to hold a safe The system is deactivated and the set vehicles ahead. Once the shortest distance from the vehicle ahead. speed is canceled if: distance has been selected, the next push The driver is responsible for ensuring that The button on the Adaptive Cruise

STARTING AND OPERATING of the button will set the maximum there are no pedestrians, other vehicles or Control is pushed (with the system distance. objectives along the direction of the vehicle. enabled or paused). Failure to comply with these precautions If a slower vehicle is detected in the same may cause serious accidents and injuries. The ignition is cycled to STOP. lane, the vehicle icon on the display illuminates from grey to white. The The driver is fully responsible for holding RACE mode is activated. a safe distance from the vehicle ahead system automatically adjusts the The system is canceled (the set speed vehicle’s speed to keep the set distance, respecting the highway code in force in the respective country. and distance are stored): independently of the set speed. The vehicle holds the set distance until: When the system is paused (refer to “Stop And Go” Function the “Activation / Deactivation” section). The vehicle ahead accelerates to a speed higher than the set speed. The “Stop and Go” operating strategy When the conditions shown in the allows you to maintain a safe distance “Setting The Desired Speed” section The vehicle ahead leaves the lane or from the vehicle ahead until the vehicle occur. the detection field of the Adaptive Cruise has completely stopped. It will also Limited Operation Warning Control system sensor. restart the vehicle automatically if the The distance setting is changed. vehicle ahead drives away within two If the dedicated message is shown on the seconds, otherwise it is necessary to display, a condition limiting the Adaptive The Adaptive Cruise Control system is press the accelerator pedal or push the Cruise Control operation may have deactivated/paused. RES button to restart. occurred.

150 This could be due to an obstruction of the Steering And Curves Lane Change vehicle’s sensor or camera. It could also Driving on curves with the system set The system may not detect the presence be due to a fault in the system. If an could limit speed and acceleration to of a vehicle until it is fully in your lane. obstruction is detected, clean the area of guarantee vehicle stability, even if no the windshield opposite the interior rear vehicles are detected ahead. view mirror, where the camera is located, When leaving the curve, the system as well as the area of the front bumper resets the previously set speed. where the sensor is located. Then check that the message has disappeared. When the conditions limiting the system functions end, normal operation will resume. Should the fault persist, contact an authorized dealer. 07146S0012EM Precautions While Driving Lane Change The system may not work correctly in In this case, sufficient distance from the some driving conditions (see below). The vehicle which is changing lanes may not driver must control the vehicle at all 07146S0011EM be guaranteed. It is advisable to pay the times. Steering And Curves utmost attention at all times and be always ready to apply the brakes if Vehicle Not Aligned Note: needed. The system may not detect a vehicle In cases of narrow curves, the traveling in the same lane, in the same performance of the system could be Small Vehicles direction, but is not aligned. It also may limited. In this case, it is advisable to Some narrow vehicles (e.g. bicycles and not detect a vehicle which is cutting in deactivate the system. motorcycles) traveling near the outer from a side lane. Sufficient distance from edges of the lane or which enter the lane The system only limits the speed the vehicles ahead may not be from curb side are not detected until they DURING a bend and not BEFORE it. guaranteed in these cases. are fully in the lane. The non-aligned vehicle can weave in and Using The System On Slopes out of the driving lane causing the vehicle When driving on roads with a variable to brake or accelerate unexpectedly. incline, the system may not detect the presence of a vehicle in the lane. System performance could be limited according to speed, load, traffic conditions and steep slopes. 151 PARK SENSORS SYSTEM Vehicles With Front And Rear Sensors The parking sensors, located in the front and rear bumpers, detect the presence of any obstacles and warn the driver through an acoustic signal and visual indications will be displayed on the instrument cluster.

07146S0013EM 06016V0008EM Small Vehicles Objects And Vehicles Moving In Opposite Or Crosswise Direction Sufficient distance from the vehicles ahead may not be guaranteed in these General Information cases. This vehicle has systems that operate on STARTING AND OPERATING Stationary Objects And Vehicles radio frequency that comply with Part The system cannot detect the presence 15 of the Federal Communications of stationary vehicles or objects. For Commission (FCC) rules and with example, the system will not operate if Industry Canada Standards RSS- 07176S0003EM the vehicle ahead leaves the lane and a GEN/210/220/310. Front Sensor Location vehicle ahead of that one is stationary in Operation is subject to the following two that lane. Pay the utmost attention at all conditions: times and be always ready to apply the brakes if needed. 1. The device may not cause harmful interference. Objects And Vehicles Moving In Opposite Or Crosswise Direction 2. The device must accept any interference received, including The system cannot detect the presence interference that may cause undesired of objects or vehicles traveling in operation of the device. opposite or crosswise directions and consequently will not activate. Changes or modifications to any of these systems by other than an authorized 07176S0001EM service facility could void authorization Rear Sensor Location to use this equipment.

152 Engagement/Disengagement System Activation/Deactivation When the system emits an acoustic To turn the system off, push the Park When the REVERSE gear is engaged and signal, the volume of the Information and Sensors System switch located to the the system is on, the front and rear Entertainment System, if activated, is left of the headlight switch. The indicator sensors are activated. If the vehicle automatically lowered. light within the switch will illuminate moves from REVERSE to a forward gear, Indication On Display when the system is turned off. Pushing the rear sensors are deactivated, while The driver can select the type of warning the switch a second time will turn the the front sensors remain active until the they would like to be displayed through system back on, and the indicator light speed of 9 mph (15 km/h) is exceeded. the Information and Entertainment will turn off. Note: In certain operating conditions, the System. To access the function on the system could start detecting an obstacle main menu, select in the following order: only after the vehicle has moved slightly (a few inches). 1. “Settings.” Acoustic Signal 2. “Driver Assistance.” In the presence of an obstacle at the 3. “ParkSense.” front or the rear of the vehicle, an acoustic signal with variable frequency 4. “Mode.” will sound: 5. “Sound-Display.” The acoustic signal increases in Visual Indications frequency as the distance between the 07176S0052EM vehicle and the obstacle decreases. The system indicates the presence of an Park Sensors System On/Off Switch obstacle by displaying a single red arc in The indicator light within the Park The acoustic signal becomes the detected areas, in relation to the Sensors System switch will also be on in continuous when the distance between distance of the object and the position of case of system failure. If the switch is the vehicle and the obstacle is less than the vehicle. pushed with a system failure, the 11 inches (30 cm), and stops if the If the obstacle is detected in the front or indicator light will flash for distance increases. rear central area, a single red arc will be approximately five seconds. The light will The acoustic signal is constant if the displayed as the obstacle approaches, then stay on constantly. distance between the vehicle and the first constant, then flashing, in addition Note: When the ignition is cycled to ON, obstacle is unchanged. to an acoustic signal. the Park Sensors system keeps the last Note: If the sensors detect several front If the obstacle is detected in the front or state when the engine was stopped and rear obstacles, the closest obstacle rear left and/or right area, a single red (activated or deactivated) in its memory. is considered. An intermittent signal will flashing arc will be shown in the sound if the obstacles are at the same corresponding area on the display and distance (front and rear). the system will emit an acoustic signal, either at frequent intervals or constantly. 153 If several obstacles are detected Audio System Not Available: If the simultaneously in the front and rear area, display shows a message that the audio Warning! the display will show all of them, system is not available, it means that the regardless of the area in which they were acoustic signal will be emitted by the detected. instrument panel, and not through the Drivers must be careful when backing up In general, the vehicle is closer to the vehicles speakers. even when using the Parking Sensor system. obstacle when a single or several flashing Note: Some conditions may influence Always check carefully behind your vehicle, and be sure to check for pedestrians, arcs are shown on the display and the the performance of the Park Sensors acoustic signal becomes continuous. animals, other vehicles, obstructions, or System: blind spots before backing up. Youare It is not possible to exit from the display Reduced sensor sensitivity could be responsible for the safety of your screen while the vehicle is in REVERSE. due to the presence of ice, snow, mud, or surroundings and must continue to pay attention while backing up. Failure to do so Fault Indication thick paint on the surface of the sensor. can result in serious injury or death. Parking sensor faults, if any, will be The sensors may detect a false indicated by a message on the display on obstacle (echo interference) due to the instrument cluster. Refer to "Warning mechanical interference, for example Caution! STARTING AND OPERATING Lights And Messages" in "Getting To when washing the vehicle or in extreme Know YourInstrument Panel" for further weather. information. The Parking Sensor system is only a The signals sent by the sensors can parking aid and it is unable to recognize Messages On The Display be altered by the presence of ultrasonic every obstacle, including small obstacles. In case of system failure, a dedicated systems (e.g. pneumatic brake systems Parking curbs might be temporarily message appears on the instrument of trucks or pneumatic drills) near the detected or not detected at all. Obstacles cluster for about five seconds. vehicle. located above or below the sensors will not be detected when they are in close Cleaning The Front Or Rear Sensors: System performance can be proximity If the display shows a message requiring influenced by the position of the the sensors to be cleaned, make sure that The vehicle must be driven slowly when sensors. For example, due to a change in using the Parking Sensor system in order to the outer surface and the underside of the ride setting (caused by wear to the be able to stop in time when an obstacle is the front and rear bumpers are free of shock absorbers or suspension), by detected. It is recommended that the driver debris (e.g. snow, mud, ice, etc.). Once changing tires, overloading the vehicle or looks over his/her shoulder when using the these areas are clear, cycle the ignition to operations that require the vehicle to be Parking Sensor system. STOP.Then, return it to ON mode. If the lowered. message is still displayed, contact you authorized dealer. Be sure not to place bumper stickers or other adhesives over the sensors as this will affect system performance.

154 LANE DEPARTURE WARNING vehicles that are driving not aligned with yours, Note: When the engine is started, the (LDW) SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED vehicle driving in a transverse or opposite way system maintains the operating mode on the same lane, bend with a small radius of that was selected when it was turned Description curvature), by road surface conditions and by OFF. driving conditions (e.g. off-road driving). Make The Lane Departure Warning system uses Activation Conditions a forward looking camera located on the sure the windshield is always clean. Use specific detergents and clean cloths to avoid scratching Once turned on, the system becomes windshield to detect lane markings and the windshield. The camera operation may also active only if the following conditions are measure vehicle position within the lane be limited or absent in some driving, traffic and met: boundaries. road surface conditions. When one or both lane limits are The vehicle speed is above 37 mph If the windshield must be replaced due to (60 km/h). detected and the vehicle passes over one scratches, chipping or breakage, contact without an activated turn signal, the exclusively your authorized dealer. Do not The lane limit lines are visible at least system emits a visual as well as an replace the windshield on your own. It is on one side. audible signal. advisable to replace the windshield if it is If the vehicle continues to go beyond the damaged in the area of the camera. There are suitable visibility conditions. line of the lane without any intervention The road is straight or with wide radius from the driver, the surpassed line will System Activation/Deactivation bends. light up on the display (left or right) to urge the driver to bring the vehicle back The system is activated/deactivated by A suitable distance is kept from the into the limits of the lane. pushing the button located on the end of vehicle in front. the multifunction lever. The turn signal is not active. Caution! Symbols And Messages On The Display The Lane Departure Warning system Do not tamper with nor operate on the advises the driver when the vehicle camera. Do not close the openings in the leaves the driving lane by showing aesthetic cover located under the interior symbols and messages on the instrument rear view mirror. In the event of a failure of cluster display. the camera, contact your authorized dealer. The camera may have limited or absent operation due to weather conditions such as: heavy rain, hail, thick fog, heavy snow, formation of ice layers on the windshield. 07226S0001EM Lane Departure Warning System Camera operation may also be compromised Activation/Deactivation Button by the presence of dust, condensation, dirt or ice on the windshield, by traffic conditions (e.g. 155 Exiting A Lane With Detection Of A Single Limit When the system is active and only, for example, the left lane limit has been detected, the detected lane illuminates in white on the display; the system is ready to provide visual warnings on the display in the event of unintentional exiting of the lane (turn signal not activated) to the left.

07226S0002EM 07226S0004EM Vehicle Changing Lanes Left Lane Limit Approached When the system is active and the lane The system operates in the same way, limits have not been detected, the display but mirrored, in the event of exiting the shows a grey vehicle icon with two grey right lane when only the right lane limit

STARTING AND OPERATING lines. has been detected. Exiting A Lane With Detection Of Both Limits When the system is active, both lane lines

07226S0003EM on the display illuminate in white to Left Lane Limit Detected indicate the successful detection of both limits. When the system detects that the vehicle has approached the lane line and is about to pass it, the left line on the display illuminates in yellow.

07226S0007EM Lane Limits Not Detected

07226S0005EM Both Lane Limits Detected 156 When lane limits are detected, the To access the function, from the main REAR BACK-UP CAMERA / system is ready to provide indications in menu select the following in order: DYNAMIC GRIDLINES case the driver unintentionally leaves the lane (turn signal not activated). 1. “Settings.” Description As the Lane Departure Warning system 2. “Safety.” The Rear Back-Up Camera is located just detects the lane limits while the vehicle is under the vehicle’s trunk lid, above the in motion, it will adjust the display 3. “Lane Departure Warning.” rear license plate. accordingly (from white to yellow and 4. “Sensitivity.” vice versa, and increase their thickness). Limited Operation Warning If a message appears on the display, a condition limiting the Lane Departure Warning system operation may have occurred. This could be an obstruction of the camera view, or a fault in the system. If an obstruction is detected, clean the area of the windshield by the interior rear

view mirror. 07186S0001EM Although the vehicle can still be driven in Rear Back-Up Camera Location

07226S0006EM normal conditions, the system may not When the vehicle is in REVERSE, the Right Lane Limit Approached function properly. Information and Entertainment System When the conditions limiting the system display will show the area behind the If a line is crossed, the driver is alerted by are corrected, it will go back to normal vehicle, as seen by the Rear Back-Up an audible signal as well as the visual operation. Should a fault persist, contact Camera, along with a warning message. indication in the instrument cluster. The your authorized dealer. signal is emitted through the speakers on the side of the lane limit which is being System Failure Warning crossed (eg. if the vehicle is exceeding If the system turns off and the warning the left line of the lane, the audible signal light appears on the display, it means will come from the speakers on the left of that there is a system fault. the vehicle). In this case, it is still possible to drive the Changing The System Settings vehicle, but you are advised to contact The system's sensitivity can be set your authorized dealer as soon as through the Information and possible. Entertainment System. Sensitivity “High” 07186S000218 or “Low” can be selected. Rear Back-Up Camera Display 157 Rear Back-Up Camera Features The table below shows the approximate distances for each area: To activate the Rear Back-Up Camera Caution! features, select “Settings” from the Main Menu of the Information and Distance from the Entertainment System. Area To avoid vehicle damage, Rear Back-Up rear of the vehicle Under “Driver Assistance” the following Camera should only be used as a parking aid. The Rear Back-Up Camera is unable to 0–11.8 inches features can be selected: Red view every obstacle or object in your drive (0–30 cm) View path. 11.8 inches to 3.3 feet Yellow Camera Delay To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must (30 cm–1 m) be driven slowly when using the Rear Camera Guidelines 3.3 feet or more Back-Up Camera to be able to stop in time Green Selecting “View” will activate the camera when an obstacle is seen. It is recommended (1mormore) view on the display. that the driver look frequently over his/her Messages On The Display Selecting “Camera Delay” will allow the shoulder when using the Rear Back-Up camera view to remain on the display Camera. If the trunk lid is lifted, the camera will

STARTING AND OPERATING shortly after the vehicle is no longer in not detect any obstacle behind the REVERSE, followed by the previously Symbols And Messages On The Display vehicle. The display will show a dedicated active screen. warning message. Selecting “Camera Guidelines” will Indications On The Display Make sure the trunk lid is closed by activate the display of the dynamic Through the Information and pushing next to the lock until it clicks. guidelines that indicate the route of the Entertainment System settings, by vehicle while in REVERSE. activating the "Camera Guidelines" Important Notes feature, guidelines can be seen on the Ice, snow or mud on the surface of the rear camera display. If activated, the camera may reduce its sensitivity. It is Warning! guidelines are positioned on the image to important to keep the camera surface highlight the width of the vehicle and the clean, and free from debris. expected reverse path based on the Drivers must be careful when backing up steering wheel position. When parking, be aware of obstacles even when using the Rear Back-Up Camera. that may be above or under the camera A superimposed central line indicates the Always check carefully behind your vehicle, range. and be sure to check for pedestrians, center of the vehicle to assist in rear animals, other vehicles, obstructions, or parking maneuvers. The various colored blind spots before backing up. Youare areas indicate the distance from the rear responsible for the safety of your of the vehicle. surroundings and must continue to pay attention while backing up. Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death. 158 REFUELING THE VEHICLE Opening The Fuel Filler Door 5. Remove the fuel filler nozzle, tighten To refuel proceed as follows: the gas cap about ¼ turn until you hear Refueling The Vehicle one click. This is an indication that cap is Before refueling, make sure that the fuel 1. Open fuel filler door by pressing on properly tightened. the point shown by the arrow. type is correct. The label indicates the fuel type Also, stop the engine before refueling. (UNLEADED FUEL = gasoline). Note: An inefficient catalytic converter leads to harmful exhaust emissions, thus contributing to air pollution.

Caution!

Never introduce leaded fuel to the tank, even in small amounts in an emergency, as this would damage the catalytic converter 07206S0001EM beyond repair. Fuel Door 07206S0002EM 2. Remove the fuel filler cap. Fuel Door Label Refueling Capacity 3. Insert the fuel nozzle fully into the Emergency Fuel Door Opening To ensure that you fill the tank filler pipe. In the event of an emergency the fuel completely, top off twice after the first filler door can be opened by operating click of the fuel nozzle. 4. When the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts from inside the trunk. Further top-off could cause faults in the off, before removing the nozzle, wait for Proceed as follows: fuel feeding system. at least 10 seconds in order for the fuel to flow inside the tank. Refueling Procedure 1. Open the trunk and locate the emergency fuel filler release cap on the The fuel filler door is unlocked when the inside lining. central door locking system is unlocked. It is automatically locked when the 2. Open the cap, and pull the cord inside central locking system is applied. to unlock the fuel filler door. 3. Open the fuel filler door by pressing on it (see the previous instructions).

159 VEHICLE LOADING Payload Warning! Certification Label The payload of a vehicle is defined as the As required by National Highway Traffic allowable load weight a truck can carry, including the weight of the driver, all Never have any smoking materials lit in Safety Administration regulations, your or near the vehicle when the fuel door is vehicle has a certification label affixed to passengers, options and cargo. open or the tank is being filled. the driver's side door or pillar. Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) Never add fuel when the engine is running. This label contains the month and year of This is in violation of most state and federal manufacture, Gross Vehicle Weight The GAWR is the maximum permissible fire regulations and may cause the MIL to Rating (GVWR), Gross Axle Weight Rating load on the front and rear axles. The load turn on. (GAWR) front and rear, and Vehicle must be distributed in the cargo area so that the GAWR of each axle is not A fire may result if gasoline is pumped Identification Number (VIN). A into a portable container that is inside of a Month-Day-Hour (MDH) number is exceeded. vehicle. Youcould be burned. Always place included on this label and indicates the Each axle GAWR is determined by the gas containers on the ground while filling. Month, Day and Hour of manufacture. The components in the system with the bar code that appears on the bottom of lowest load carrying capacity (axle, STARTING AND OPERATING Note: If the filler compartment is the label is your VIN. springs, tires or wheels). Heavier axles or suspension components sometimes washed with a pressure washer, keep it at Gross Vehicle Weight Rating a distance of at least 8 inches (20 cm). specified by purchasers for increased (GVWR) durability does not necessarily increase the vehicle's GVWR. The GVWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle including driver, Tire Size passengers, vehicle, options and cargo. The label also specifies maximum The tire size on the Vehicle Certification capacities of front and rear axle systems Label represents the actual tire size on (GAWR). Total load must be limited so your vehicle. Replacement tires must be GVWR and front and rear GAWR are not equal to the load capacity of this tire size. exceeded.

160 Rim Size axles has been exceeded but the total TRAILER TOWING load is within the specified GVWR. If so, This is the rim size that is appropriate for Trailer towing is not recommended for weight must be shifted from front to rear this vehicle. the tire size listed. or rear to front as appropriate until the Inflation Pressure specified weight limitations are met. Store the heavier items down low and be This is the cold tire inflation pressure for sure that the weight is distributed your vehicle for all loading conditions up equally. Stow all loose items securely to full GAWR. before driving. Curb Weight Improper weight distributions can have an adverse effect on the way your vehicle The curb weight of a vehicle is defined as steers and handles and the way the the total weight of the vehicle with all brakes operate. fluids, including vehicle fuel, at full capacity conditions, and with no Caution! occupants or cargo loaded into the vehicle. The front and rear curb weight values are determined by weighing your Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the vehicle on a commercial scale before any GVWR or the maximum front and rear occupants or cargo are added. GAWR. If you do, parts on your vehicle can break, or it can change the way your vehicle Loading handles. This could cause you to lose control. Also overloading can shorten the life of your The actual total weight and the weight of vehicle. the front and rear of your vehicle at the ground can best be determined by weighing it when it is loaded and ready for operation. The entire vehicle should first be weighed on a commercial scale to insure that the GVWR has not been exceeded. The weight on the front and rear of the vehicle should then be determined separately to be sure that the load is properly distributed over the front and rear axle. Weighing the vehicle may show that the GAWR of either the front or rear 161 SUGGESTIONS FOR DRIVING Climate Control System Max. Speed Saving Fuel Using the climate control system will Fuel consumption considerably increases increase consumption: use standard as speed increases. Maintain a constant Below are some suggestions which may ventilation when the temperature speed, avoiding unnecessary braking and help you save fuel and lower the amount outside permits. acceleration, which cost in terms of both of harmful emissions released into the fuel consumption and emissions. atmosphere. Devices for Aerodynamic Control Acceleration Vehicle Maintenance The use of non-certified devices for aerodynamic control may adversely Accelerating violently severely affects Checks and operations should be carried affect air drag and consumption levels. consumption and emissions: acceleration out in accordance with the Maintenance should be gradual and should not exceed Driving Style Plan. Refer to "Scheduled Servicing" in the maximum torque. "Servicing And Maintenance" for further Starting information. Conditions Of Use Do not warm up the engine at low or high Tires revs when the vehicle is stationary; this Cold Starting Check the tire pressures at least once causes the engine to warm up more Short trips and frequent cold starts will

STARTING AND OPERATING every four weeks: if the pressure is too slowly, thereby increasing fuel not allow the engine to reach optimum low, consumption levels increase as consumption and emissions. It is operating temperature. This results in a resistance to rolling is higher. therefore advisable to drive off significant increase in consumption immediately, slowly, avoiding high levels (from +15 to +30% in city driving) Unnecessary Loads speeds: by doing this the engine will and emissions. Do not travel with an overloaded trunk. warm up more quickly. The weight of the vehicle and its Traffic And Road Conditions arrangement greatly affect fuel Unnecessary Actions High fuel consumption is caused by heavy consumption and stability. Avoid revving up when starting at traffic traffic, for instance when travelling in lights or before stopping the engine. This traffic with frequent use of low gears or Electric Devices action is unnecessary and causes in cities with many traffic lights. Winding Use electrical systems only for the increased fuel consumption and mountain roads and rough road surfaces amount of time needed. The rear window pollution. also adversely affect consumption. defroster, additional headlights, windshield wipers and heater blower fan Gear Selection Stops In Traffic require a considerable amount of energy; Use a high gear when traffic and road During prolonged stops (e.g. railway increasing the current uptake increases conditions allow it. Using a low gear for crossings) turn off the engine. fuel consumption (by up to +25% when faster acceleration will increase fuel city driving). consumption. Improper use of a high gear increases consumption, emissions and engine wear. 162 Transporting Passengers Exhaust Gas identified, or if the underbody or rear section of the vehicle is damaged, have Exhaust emissions are very dangerous, the entire exhaust system and bodywork Warning! and may be lethal. They contain carbon areas checked to identify any monoxide, a colorless, odorless gas which components which are broken, damaged, can cause fainting and poisoning if worn or have moved from their correct It is extremely dangerous to leave inhaled. children in a parked vehicle when the fitting position. If any of these things temperature outside is very high. The heat To avoid inhaling carbon monoxide, take occur, contact your authorized dealer. the following measures: inside the passenger compartment may Open welding or loose connections may have serious, or even fatal, consequences. Do not keep the engine running in permit exhaust gas to enter the Never travel in the trunk of the vehicle. In closed spaces. passenger compartment. the event of an accident, anyone inside the If, for some reason (e.g. transporting Check the exhaust system each time the trunk would be at greater risk of serious or bulky loads), it is necessary to drive with vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil even fatal injury. the trunk open, close all the windows and change operations. Replace the Ensure that all the occupants of the run the climate control fan at maximum components if necessary, contact your vehicle wear their seat belts correctly and authorized dealer. that any children are positioned correctly on speed. DO NOT activate air recirculation the dedicated child restraint systems. mode. Performance Should it be necessary to stay in the This vehicle is equipped with an engine Transporting Animals stationary vehicle with engine running, capable of delivering exceptionally fast acceleration and speed: The intervention of the airbags may be adjust the ventilation/heating system dangerous for an animal on the front and operate the fan in such a way that Peak power: 505 HP at 6500 rpm. seat. It is therefore advised to arrange outside air will enter the passenger Peak torque: 443 ft-lbs at animals on the rear seat inside dedicated compartment. Activate the maximum fan 2500–5000 rpm. cages restrained by the vehicle’s seat speed. Top speed: 191 mph (307 km/h). belts. Maintenance of the exhaust system Acceleration from 0 to 60 mph (0 to Keep in mind that, in the event of a provides the best protection against 100 km/h): 3.8 seconds. sudden braking or an accident, an leaks of carbon monoxide into the inadequately restrained animal may be passenger compartment. For safe driving, it is essential, projected within the passenger particularly during the first days of use, Should an unusual noise from the exhaust compartment, risking injury to the animal to get to know the car by driving carefully system or the presence of exhaust gas in itself and the other occupants of the and gradually discovering its the passenger compartment be vehicle. performance.

163 Brakes In case of intensive, high-performance on the instrument panel display by The car braking system may be available use of the car, have the efficiency of the setting RACE mode and selecting the with four carbon-ceramic material brake carbon-ceramic material braking system “Performance” page) with 20 second discs, one on each wheel. inspected as shown on the Maintenance intervals between brake applications; In order to guarantee the maximum Plan at your authorized dealer. keep the car at a speed comprised braking capacity for the first use, Alfa Driving On Race Tracks between 37 mph and 62 mph (60 km/h Romeo performs a "run-in" procedure for Before driving on a track using a racing and 100 km/h) and do not brake for discs and pads directly at the factory. style, it is necessary to: 4 minutes to allow the brakes to cool The use of carbon-ceramic material Attend a race track driving course. down; brake discs guarantees braking features Then brake three times from 124 mph (better deceleration/pedal load ratio, Check the liquid levels in the engine braking distances, fading resistance) compartment. For more information, see to 18 mph (200 km/h to 30 km/h) with proportional to the dynamic features of the “Checking Levels” section in the deceleration equal to 1.1g (ABS the car in addition to considerably “Servicing And Maintenance” chapter. operation) with 30 second intervals decreasing the unsprung component Have the car inspected at your between brake applications; keep the car weight. at a speed comprised between 37 mph

STARTING AND OPERATING authorized dealer. The materials used and the structural and 62 mph (60 km/h and 100 km/h) and features of the system could generate Remember that the car was not designed do not brake for 5 minutes to allow the to be driven exclusive on the race track unusual noises which have absolutely no brakes to cool down. adverse effect on correct operation and and that this use increases stress and reliability of the braking system. component wear. Greater pressure may need to be applied Preheating The Carbon Ceramic to the brake pedal the first time to keep Material Brake Discs the same braking capacities in presence The brake discs must be warmed up to of condensation or salt on the braking make them fully efficient. Youare surfaces, for example after washing or if advised to perform the following the car is not used for a long time. procedure: Note: Given the high technological level Brake nine times from 80 mph to of this system, any servicing on it must be 18 mph (130 km/h to 30 km/h) with performed by your authorized dealer deceleration equal to 0.7g (the which exclusively has the skills needed longitudinal acceleration value is shown for the repair operations.

164 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

Have a flat tire or a burnt-out bulb? HAZARD WARNING LIGHTS .....166 At times, a problem such as these may BULB REPLACEMENT ...... 166 interfere with your driving experience. FUSES ...... 171 TIRE SERVICE KIT ...... 177 The section on emergencies can help you JUMP STARTING ...... 180 to deal with critical situations REFUELING IN EMERGENCY .....183 independently. ENGINE OVERHEATING ...... 183 In an emergency, we recommend that you TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE . . .184 call the phone number found in the TOW EYES ...... 185 Warranty Book. ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE Youmay also consider contacting an SYSTEM (EARS) ...... 186 authorized dealer. EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR) . . .186

165 HAZARD WARNING LIGHTS When you must leave the vehicle to seek BULB REPLACEMENT assistance, the hazard warning flashers The Hazard Warning switch is located in will continue to operate even though the General Instructions the switch bank below the radio screen. ignition is cycled to OFF. Before replacing a bulb, check the Push the switch once to contacts for oxidation. turn the hazard warning Replace blown bulbs with others of the flashers on. When the same type and power. switch is activated, all directional turn signals After replacing a headlight bulb, will flash on and off to always check its alignment. warn oncoming traffic When a light is not working, check that of an emergency. Push the switch a the corresponding fuse is intact before second time to turn the hazard warning changing the bulb. For the location of flashers off. fuses, refer to “Fuses” in this chapter. This is an emergency warning system and IN CASE OF EMERGENCY it should not be used when the vehicle is 08016S0001EM1 Note: In some particular climate in motion. Use it when your vehicle is Hazard Warning Switch conditions, such as low temperature, disabled and is creating a safety hazard humidity, or after washing the car, a thin for other motorists. condensation layer may form on the Caution! internal surfaces of the front and rear headlights. This condensation will disappear after switching on the Prolonged use of the hazard warning headlights. flashers may discharge the vehicle’s battery.

166 Types Of Bulbs

The vehicle may be equipped with the following bulbs

Glass Bulbs (Type A): They are press-fitted. Pull to extract.

Bayonet-Type Bulbs (Type B): To remove them from their holder, press the bulb and turn it counterclockwise, then extract it.

Tubular Bulbs (Type C): Release them from their contacts to remove.

Halogen Bulbs (Type D): To remove the bulb, turn the connector to the side and pull it out.

Xenon Gas Discharge Bulb (Type F): To remove the bulb, contact an authorized dealer.

167 Replacement Bulbs

Light bulbs Type Power Front direction indicators PY24W 24 W Rear Fog lights H11 55 W Main beam headlights (Xenon gas discharge) D5S 25 W Main beam headlights (Xenon gas discharge) D3S 35 W Sun visor light 1.5CP 2.1 W Glove compartment light W5W 4 W Trunk lid light W5W 5 W IN CASE OF EMERGENCY Puddle lights (under door panel) W5W 5 W

168 Replacing Exterior Bulbs 3. Turn the bulb/connector assembly counterclockwise, and then slide it off Note: Only replace the bulb when the Caution! engine is off. Also ensure that the engine the headlight body. is cold, to prevent the risk of burns. Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Direction Indicators Oil contamination will severely shorten bulb To change the bulb of these lights, life. If the bulb comes in contact with any oily proceed as follows: surface, clean the bulb with rubbing alcohol. 1. Operating inside the engine compartment, remove the protective Replacing Interior Bulbs cover. Courtesy Mirror Light To replace the bulbs, proceed as follows:

08026S0007EM 1. Lift the mirror cover and remove the Bulb/Connector lens, using a suitable tool. 4. Remove the bulb by sliding it off the bulb holder. 5. Install the new bulb, making sure it is correctly inserted in the bulb holder.

08026S0023EM 6. Insert the bulb/connector assembly in Protective Cover Location the housing on the headlight body and turn it clockwise, making sure that it is 2. Remove protective cover. locked correctly. 7. Install the protective cover. 08026S0008EM Front Light Cluster with Main Beam Sun Visor Xenon Gas Discharge Headlights 1 — Mirror Cover To replace the bulbs of the main beam 2 — Lens headlights, contact your authorized dealer. 2. Change the bulb, releasing it from the side contacts, then insert the new bulb, making sure that it is correctly fastened 08026S0006EM between the contacts. Protective Cover 169 3. Install the lens, inserting it firstly on 4. Install bulb, making sure that it is one side and then pressing on the other correctly inserted fully. side until it clicks into place. 5. Close the protective cover on the lens. Glove Compartment Light 6. Install courtesy light, inserting it first To replace the bulb, proceed as follows: on one side and then pressing on the 1. Open the glove compartment. other side until it clicks into place. 2. Remove the courtesy light assembly, Luggage Compartment Courtesy Lights using a suitable tool. To replace the bulbs, proceed as follows:

1. Open the trunk, and remove the trunk 08026S0011EM lamp assembly using a suitable tool. Cover And Bulb Removal Direction 3. Install bulb, making sure that it is correctly inserted fully. IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 4. Close the protective cover on the lens. 5. Install trunk lamp in the correct position, inserting it firstly on one side, and then pressing on the other side until

08026S0009EM it clicks into place. Courtesy Lamp Indent Puddle Lights On Door Panel 3. Open protective cover up and remove To replace the bulb, proceed as follows: the bulb pulling out of the connector. 08026S0010EM Ceiling Light Indent 1. Open the door and remove the puddle 2. Open protective cover up and remove light assembly, using a suitable tool. the bulb pulling out of the connector.

08026S0011EM Cover And Bulb Removal Direction 170 FUSES General Information The fuses protect electrical systems against excessive current. When a device does not work, you must check the electrical circuit inside of the fuse for a break/melt. Also, please be aware that using power outlets for extended periods of time with

08026S0012EM the engine off may result in vehicle 08036S0002EM Puddle Light Indent battery discharge. J-CASE Fuse 2. Open protective cover up and remove 1 1 — Electrical Circuit the bulb pulling out of the connector. 2 — Case Fuse With Good Electrical Cir- cuit 2 3 — Case Fuse With Bad Electrical Cir- cuit

3

0726067916 Blade Fuses

08026S0011EM 1 — Electrical Circuit Cover And Bulb Removal Direction 2 — Blade Fuse With Good Electrical Circuit 3. Install bulb, making sure that it is correctly inserted fully. 3 — Blade Fuse With Bad Electrical Cir- cuit 4. Close the protective cover on the lens. 5. Install puddle light in the correct position, inserting it firstly on one side and then pressing on the other side until it clicks into place. 171 Fuse Extracting Pliers To replace a fuse, use the pliers hooked Warning! to the fuse box.

When replacing a blown fuse, always use an appropriate replacement fuse with the same amp rating as the original fuse. Never replace a fuse with another fuse of higher amp rating. Never replace a blown fuse with metal wires or any other material. Do not place a fuse inside a circuit breaker cavity

08036S0005EM or vice versa. Failure to use proper fuses Fuse Extracting Pliers may result in serious personal injury, fire and/or property damage. 1 — MINI fuse Before replacing a fuse, make sure that 08036S0053EM 2 — J-CASE fuse IN CASE OF EMERGENCY Fuse Box the ignition is off and that all the other services are switched off and/or Grab the pliers from the upper tabs, After use, return the pliers to their proper disengaged. press them, and extract the pliers pulling position by following the below If the replaced fuse blows again, contact upwards. procedures: an authorized dealer. The pliers have two different ends, both If a general protection fuse for safety of which are specifically designed to Grasp the pliers from the upper tabs and insert them into their housing. systems (air bag system, braking system), remove the different types of fuses power unit systems (engine system, present in the vehicle: Push downward on the pliers into their transmission system) or steering system housing until they click into place. blows, contact an authorized dealer.

172 Fuse Location The fuses, which can be replaced by the user, are grouped in two boxes below the passenger side foot board and inside the trunk. Control Unit Under Passenger Side Footboard To access the fuses, proceed as follows: 1. Lift the upper end of the footboard on the passenger side, pulling to release the 08036S0011EM 08036S0014EM Control Unit two buttons. Release Hooks On Footboard The fuses are freely accessible on the 2 — Panel control unit. The number identifying the electrical The fuses are freely accessible on the component corresponding to each fuse is control unit. shown on the cover. After replacing the fuse, make sure that After replacing a fuse, make sure that panel and footboard are correctly locked. you have closed cover correctly. Luggage Compartment Fuse Box To access the fuses, proceed as follows:

08036S0010EM 1. Lift the luggage compartment cover. Release Buttons On Footboard 2. Remove the control unit cover.

1 — Footboard

2. Unscrewing the two hooks, remove the panel pulling downward.

173 Control Unit Under Passenger Side Footboard IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

08036S0013EM Passenger Side Control Unit

174 FUNCTION FUSE AMPERAGE Front power window (driver side) F33 25 Front power window (passenger side) F34 25 Supply for Information and Entertainment system, Climate Control F36 15 system, Alarm, Power door mirror folding, EOBD system, USB port Safe Lock device (driver side door unlock – if equipped), Doors F38 20 unlock, Central lock Windshield washer pump F43 20 Rear left power window F47 25 Rear right power window F48 25 Heater rear window coil F94 15

175 Luggage Compartment Fuse Box IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

08036S0015EM Luggage Compartment Control Unit

FUNCTION FUSE AMPERAGE Tow hook module (TTM) F1 40 Hi-Fi system F8 30 KL15/a USB Recharge (C070) F17 7.5 I-Drive / USB / AUX port F21 10 KL15/a 12V Power outlet (R053) F22 20

176 TIRE SERVICE KIT An instruction pamphlet for reference To use the Tire Service Kit, proceed as in prompt and correct use of the Tire follows: Description Service Kit, which must be then given to 1. Stop the vehicle in a position where If a tire is punctured, you can make an the personnel dealing with the you can repair the tire safely. Youshould emergency repair using the Tire Service sealant-treated tire. be as far as possible from the side of the Kit located in the trunk beneath the load A pair of protective gloves. road, and in a position that is not floor. Adaptors for inflating different dangerous for oncoming traffic. Activate elements. the hazard warning flashers, remove the safety triangle from the trunk, and place it at a suitable distance from the vehicle to make other drivers aware of your presence. 2. Verify that the valve stem (on the wheel with the deflated tire) is in a position that is near to the ground. This will allow the tire service kit hoses to reach the valve stem and keep the tire 08066S0001EM repair kit flat on the ground. Tire Service Kit Location 3. Place the gear selector to PARK (P). The Tire Service Kit includes: 08066S0002EM Tire Service Kit Components 4. Apply the electric park brake and Sealant cartridge containing the cycle the engine OFF. sealing fluid. 1 — Sealant Cartridge 2 — Filler Tube Filler tube. 3 — Adhesive Label Adhesive label with the writing "Max. 4 — Air Compressor 50 mph (80 km/h)”, to be attached in a position easily visible to the driver (eg. on Note: The sealant is effective with the dashboard) after repairing the tire. external temperatures of between -40°F Air compressor, complete with (-40°C) and 122°F (50°C). The sealant pressure gauge and connectors. has an expiration date.

177 Inflation Procedure Take care not to allow the contents of Tire Service Kit to come in contact with hair, eyes, or clothing. Tire Service Kit sealant is Warning! harmful if inhaled, swallowed, or absorbed through the skin. It causes skin, eye, and respiratory irritation. Flush immediately Do not attempt to seal a tire on the side with plenty of water if there is any contact of the vehicle closest to traffic. Pull far with eyes or skin. Change clothing as soon enough off the road to avoid the danger of as possible, if there is any contact with being hit when using the Tire Service Kit. clothing. Do not use Tire Service Kit or drive the Tire Service Kit Sealant solution contains vehicle under the following circumstances: latex. In case of an allergic reaction or rash, 08066S0004EM consult a physician immediately. Keep Tire Attaching Filler Tube To Deflated Tire If the puncture in the tire tread is Service Kit out of reach of children. If approximately 1/4 inch (6 mm) or larger. swallowed, rinse mouth immediately with 1 — Sealant Cartridge plenty of water and drink plenty of water. 2 — Filler Tube IN CASE OF EMERGENCY If the tire has any sidewall damage. Do not induce vomiting! Consult a physician If the tire has any damage from driving immediately. with extremely low tire pressure. 3. Make sure the power switch of the compressor is in the O (off) position. If the tire has any damage from driving on To use your Tire Service Kit, proceed as a flat tire. follows: 4. Insert the plug into the power outlet in If the wheel has any damage. the center console, then start the engine. 1. Apply the electric park brake. If you are unsure of the condition of the tire or the wheel. 2. Insert the sealant cartridge containing Keep Tire Service Kit away from open the sealing fluid in the proper flames or heat sources. compressor holder, pushing down hard. Unscrew the tire valve cap, take out the A loose Tire Service Kit thrown forward in filler tube and tighten the fitting on the a collision or hard stop could endanger the tire valve. occupants of the vehicle. Always stow the Tire Service Kit in the place provided. Failure to follow these warnings can result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your

passengers, and others around you. 08066S0006EM Center Console Power Outlet 5. Start the compressor by placing the power switch in the I (on) position. 178 6. Inflate the tire to the pressure 8. If you still cannot obtain a pressure of 12. Apply the adhesive label from the indicated on the tire placard, located on at least 26 psi (1.8 bar) within sealant bottle where it can be easily seen the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge 15 minutes of turning the compressor on, by the driver as a reminder that the tire of the driver’s side door. Refer to “Tires” do not drive the vehicle, and contact your has been treated with a Tire Service Kit, in “Servicing And Maintenance” for more authorized dealer. as well as not to exceed the speed information. In order to obtain a more restriction for the treated tire. precise reading, check the pressure value 9. Drive the vehicle for about 5 miles on pressure gauge with the compressor (8 km), stop, apply the electric park Warning! off. brake, and recheck the tire pressure. 10. If the pressure is less than 26 psi (1.8 bar), DO NOT drive the vehicle, and Do not adhere the speed restriction sticker see your authorized dealer. to the padded area on the steering wheel. Adhering the speed restriction sticker to the 11. If a pressure value of at least 26 psi padded area on the steering wheel is (1.8 bar) is detected, restore the correct dangerous because the air bag may not pressure (with engine running and operate (deploy) normally resulting in electric park brake applied), and drive serious injury. In addition, do not adhere the immediately with great care to your sticker to areas where warning lights or the authorized dealer. speedometer cannot be viewed.

08066S0005EM Air Compressor Warning! 5 — Power Switch 6 — Pressure Gauge Tire Service Kit is not a permanent flat tire repair. Have the tire inspected and repaired or replaced after using Tire Service Kit. Do 7. If the pressure is not at least 26.1 psi not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h) until the tire is (1.8 bar) after 15 minutes, disengage the repaired or replaced. Failure to follow this compressor from the valve and power warning can result in injuries that are serious outlet. Then, move the vehicle forwards or fatal to you, your passengers, and others approximately five tire turns in order to around you. Have the tire checked as soon as distribute the sealant inside the tire possible at your authorized dealer. evenly, and then repeat the inflation operation.

179 Checking And Restoring Tire Pressure Sealant Cartridge Replacement JUMP STARTING The compressor can also be used to Note: Only use original cartridges, which If your vehicle has a discharged battery, it check and, if necessary, restore the tire can be purchased at an authorized dealer. can be jump started using a set of jumper pressure. Proceed as follows: cables and a battery in another vehicle, or Proceed as follows: by using a portable battery booster pack. 1. Remove the sealant cartridge by Jump starting can be dangerous if done 1. Release the quick connector and pushing the release button located on the improperly, so please follow the connect it directly to the valve of the tire side of the compressor. procedures in this section carefully. to be inflated. 2. Insert the new sealant cartridge by Note: When using a portable battery 2. Push the air release button. pushing downward firmly. booster pack, follow the manufacturer's operating instructions and precautions.

Warning! IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

Do not attempt jump starting if the battery is frozen. It could rupture or explode and cause personal injury.

Caution! 08066S0008EM 08066S0009EM Air Compressor Components Sealant Cartridge Replacement Do not use a portable battery booster pack 7— Air Release Button 1 — Sealant Cartridge or any other booster source with a system 8— Quick Connector 9 — Release Button voltage greater than 12 Volts or damage to 9— Release Button the battery, starter motor, alternator or electrical system may occur.

180 Remote Battery Connection Posts Jump Starting The negative terminal (-) is positioned next to the passenger side hood lock. Warning!

Failure to follow this jump starting procedure could result in personal injury or property damage due to battery explosion.

08076S0004EM Caution! Protective Flap Opening

Failure to follow these procedures could 08076S0006EM result in damage to the charging system of Remote Post Location the booster vehicle or the discharged vehicle.

Warning! Preparation For Jump Starting: 1. Firmly apply the park brake, and cycle the ignition to OFF. Do not connect the jumper cable to the negative (-) post of the discharged battery. 2. Turn off all electrical features in the The resulting electrical spark could cause the vehicle. battery to explode and could result in serious injury. Only use the specific ground point, do 08076S0005EM 3. If using another vehicle to jump start Remote Post Location not use any other exposed metal parts. the battery, park the vehicle within the To carry out the operation, you need to jumper cables reach, apply the park brake The positive post (+) can be accessed by have the correct cables to connect to the and make sure the ignition is OFF. lifting the protective flap. battery of another vehicle or a portable battery booster pack to the remote posts of the discharged battery. Usually, these Warning! cables have terminals at the ends and are identified by different sheath colors (red = positive, black = negative). Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as this could establish a ground connection and personal injury could result. 181 Cable Connection 5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster battery, let the engine idle a Proceed as follows to perform a jump Caution! starting procedure: few minutes, and then start the engine in the vehicle with the discharged battery. If 1. Connect the positive (+) end of the using a portable battery booster pack, Accessories plugged into the vehicle power jumper cable to the positive (+) post of before starting the vehicle, wait a few outlets draw power from the vehicle’s the vehicle with the discharged battery. seconds after completing the connection. battery, even when not in use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if plugged in long 2. Connect the opposite end of the Cable Disconnection enough without engine operation, the positive (+) jumper cable to the positive Once the engine is started, remove the vehicle’s battery will discharge sufficiently (+) post of the booster battery. connection cables in reverse sequence, to degrade battery life and/or prevent the engine from starting. 3. Connect the negative end (-) of the as described below: jumper cable to the negative (-) post of 1. Disconnect the negative (-) jumper the booster battery. Bump Starting cable from the remote negative (-) post

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 4. Connect the opposite end of the of the discharged vehicle. Never jump start the engine by pushing, negative (-) jumper cable to the remote towing or coasting downhill. 2. Disconnect the negative end (-) of the negative (-) post of the discharged Note: Youcannot start a vehicle with an jumper cable from the negative (-) post of vehicle. automatic transmission by pushing it. the booster battery.

Warning! 3. Disconnect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper cable from the positive (+) post of the booster battery. Do not connect the jumper cable to the negative (-) post of the discharged battery. 4. Disconnect the positive (+) end of the The resulting electrical spark could cause jumper cable from the positive (+) post of the battery to explode and could result in the vehicle with the discharged battery. serious injury. Only use the specific ground If frequent jump starting is required to point, do not use any other exposed metal start your vehicle, you should have the parts. battery and charging system inspected at your authorized dealer.

182 REFUELING IN EMERGENCY ENGINE OVERHEATING Youcan also turn the temperature control to maximum heat, the mode Refueling in an emergency is described in Engine overheating may occur in control to floor and the blower control to "Refueling The Vehicle" in "Starting And situations of extreme environmental high. This allows the heater core to act Operating". temperatures, frequent engine as a supplement to the radiator and aids stops/starts, or driving in heavy traffic. If in removing heat from the engine cooling the engine becomes overheated, the system. Engine TemperatureWarning Light in the instrument cluster will illuminate along with a dedicated message. Refer to Warning! "Warning Lights And Messages" in the "Getting To Know YourInstrument Panel" for more information. Youor others can be badly burned by hot engine coolant (antifreeze) or steam from In any of the following situations, you can your radiator. If you see or hear steam coming reduce the potential for overheating by from under the hood, do not open the hood taking the appropriate action. until the radiator has had time to cool. Never On the highways — slow down. try to open a cooling system pressure cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot. In city traffic — while stopped, place the transmission in NEUTRAL, but do not increase engine idle speed. Caution! Note: There are steps that you can take to slow down an impending overheat Driving with a hot cooling system could condition: damage your vehicle. If temperature gauge If your air conditioner (A/C) is on, turn reads “H”, pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the air conditioner turned it off. The A/C system adds heat to the off until the pointer drops back into the engine cooling system and turning the normal range. If the pointer remains on the A/C off can help remove this heat. “H”, turn the engine off immediately, and call for service.

183 If Steam Is Coming From The Engine TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE The following image illustrates the front Compartment and rear attachment corners of the This section describes procedures for Do not go near the front of the vehicle. vehicle, which are to be taken into towing a disabled vehicle using a consideration when loading your vehicle Stop the engine. Wait until the steam commercial towing service. dissipates. Then, open the hood and start onto the assistance vehicle. the engine. If Neither Coolant Nor Steam Is Caution! Escaping Open the hood and idle the engine until it The vehicle should be transported with all cools. four wheels OFF the ground on the flatbed of a roadside assistance vehicle. Avoid Note: towing with only the front (or rear) wheels If the cooling fan does not operate lifted. When towing with only the front (or while the engine is running, the engine rear) wheels lifted, in addition to damaging the body, it could damage the transmission. IN CASE OF EMERGENCY temperature will increase. Stop the

engine and contact your authorized Do not use sling-type equipment when 08126S0001EM dealer. towing. Vehicle damage may occur. Front And Rear Loading Angles If the engine continues to overheat or When securing the vehicle to a flatbed frequently overheats, have the cooling truck, do not attach to front or rear system inspected. The engine could be suspension components. Damage to your Loading seriously damaged unless repairs are vehicle may result from improper towing. Angles made. Contact your authorized dealer. Ensure that the Electric Park Brake is A — Front Loading Angle 12.045° released, and remain released, while being towed. B — Rear Loading Angle 11.830° Damage from improper towing is not Rear Wheel Drive (RWD) Models covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. It is recommended to tow the vehicle with all four wheels OFF the ground on the flatbed of a roadside assistance The operators of the assistance vehicle vehicle. must be informed of your vehicle's minimum required height from the ground, in order to avoid contact between the ends of the bumpers and the equipment of the breakdown truck.

184 TOW EYES 3. Tighten the vehicle's tow eye in place (about 11 turns). Caution! If the vehicle has been in an accident or has broken down, a tow eye is provided in Note: The largest work angle of a tow the tools container located inside the cable to fix on the tow hook must not Do not use sling type equipment when trunk for vehicle towing. Two locations on exceed 15°. towing. Vehicle damage may occur. the front bumper are available for Tow When securing the vehicle to a flat bed Eye installation. Towing is meant only for truck, do not attach to front or rear short distances on a paved road surface. suspension components. Damage to your Proceed as follows to use the tow eye: vehicle may result from improper towing. 1. Unhook the cap on the left or right Ensure that the Electric Park Brake is released, and remains released, while being side of the front bumper, pushing on the towed. upper part.

If an assistance vehicle with a flatbed is not available, the vehicle must be towed 08136S0002EM with the rear wheels lifted from the Work Angle Of Tow Cable ground using a trailer or special equipment allowing lifting of the rear wheels. Warning!

Stand clear of vehicles when pulling with tow 08136S0001EM eyes. Front Tow Eye Cap Locations Do not use a chain with a tow eye. Chains may break, causing serious injury or death. 2. Remove the tow eye from its housing in the trunk and carefully clean the Do not use a tow strap with a tow eye. Tow threaded housing on the vehicle before straps may break or become disengaged, using it. causing serious injury or death. Failure to follow proper tow eye usage may cause components to break resulting in serious injury or death.

185 ENHANCED ACCIDENT EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR) Caution! RESPONSE SYSTEM (EARS) This vehicle is equipped with an Event This vehicle is equipped with an Data Recorder (EDR). The main purpose Enhanced Accident Response System. of an EDR is to record data that will The tow eye must be used exclusively for Please refer to “Occupant Restraint assist in understanding how a vehicle’s roadside assistance operations. Only use systems performed under certain crash the tow eye with an appropriate device in Systems” in “Safety” for further accordance with the highway code (a rigid information on the Enhanced Accident or near crash-like situations, such as an bar or rope) to flat tow the vehicle for a Response System (EARS) function. air bag deployment or hitting a road short distance to the nearest service obstacle. location. Please refer to “Occupant Restraint Tow eyes MUST NOT be used to tow Systems” in “Safety” for further vehicles off the road or where there are information on the Event Data Recorder obstacles. (EDR).

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY In compliance with the above conditions, towing with a tow eye must take place with two vehicles (one towing, the other towed) aligned as much as possible along the same center line. Damage to your vehicle may occur if these guidelines are not followed. When towing, only use a facility that can tow vehicles with low ground clearances as extensive damage can result by using a standard tow truck platform.

186 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

Correct servicing permits the SCHEDULED SERVICING ...... 188 performance of the vehicle to be ENGINE COMPARTMENT ...... 192 maintained over time, as well as limited BATTERY RECHARGING ...... 195 running costs and safeguarding the DEALER SERVICE ...... 196 efficiency of the safety systems. RAISING THE VEHICLE ...... 202 This chapter explains how. TIRES ...... 203 DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES ...... 218 STORING THE VEHICLE ...... 219 BODYWORK...... 220 INTERIORS ...... 222

187 SCHEDULED SERVICING Periodic Checks The following checks must be carried out more often than indicated in the Every month or every 600 miles Correct servicing is crucial for Scheduled Servicing Plan: guaranteeing a long life for the vehicle ( 1,000 km) or before long trips check under the best conditions. and, if necessary, top off: Check cleanliness of hood and trunk locks, cleanliness and lubrication of For this reason, Alfa Romeo has planned Engine coolant level. a series of checks and services for your linkage. Brake fluid level (if insufficient, see an vehicle at fixed intervals based on Visually inspect conditions of: engine, authorized dealer as soon as possible). distance and time, as described in the transmission, pipes and hoses Scheduled Servicing Plan. Windshield washer fluid level. (exhaust/fuel system/brakes) and rubber Before each service, it is always elements (sleeves/bushes, etc.). Tire inflation pressure and condition. necessary to carefully follow the Check battery charge and battery fluid instructions in the Scheduled Servicing Operation of lighting system level (electrolyte). Plan (e.g. periodically check level of (headlights, direction indicators, hazard fluids, tire pressure, etc.). warning lights, etc.). Visually inspect conditions of the accessory drive belts. Scheduled Servicing is offered by an Operation of windshield authorized dealer according to a set time washing/wiping system and Check and, if necessary, change engine schedule. If, during each operation, in positioning/wear of wiper blades. oil and replace oil filter. addition to the ones scheduled, the need SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE arises for further replacements or Every 2,000 miles ( 3,000 km), check and Check and, if necessary, replace cabin repairs, these may be carried out with the top off if required: air filter. owner’s explicit consent only. Engine oil level. Check and, if necessary, replace air Note: Scheduled Servicing intervals are cleaner. required by the Manufacturer. Failure to Heavy Usage Of The Vehicle Severe Duty All Models have them carried out may invalidate the If the vehicle is used under one of the Change Engine Oil at 4,000 miles New Vehicle Limited Warranty. following conditions: (6,500 km) if the vehicle is operated in a Youare advised to inform your authorized Dusty roads. dusty and off-road environment or is dealer of any small operating irregularities operated predominately at idle or only without waiting for the next service. Short, repeated journeys less than very low engine RPM’s. This type of 4 miles (7-8 km) at sub-zero outside vehicle use is considered Severe Duty. temperatures. Engine often idling or driving long distances at low speeds or long periods of inactivity. In the event of a long period of inactivity. 188 Maintenance Plan (2.9 V6 Engine) 10 30 50 60 70 80 90 Thousands of miles 20 40 100 110 120 130 140 150

Years 123456789101112131415 16 48 80 96 32 64 112 128 144 160 Thousands of kilometers 176 192 208 224 240

Check battery charge status with the proper instrument. ●●●●●●●●●●●●●●● Check tire condition/wear and adjust pressure, if necessary. Check the tire repair kit recharge condition and expiration ●●●●●●●●●●●●●●● date. Check operation of lighting system (headlights, direction indicators, hazard warning lights, trunk lid, passenger ●●●●●●●●●●●●●●● compartment, glove compartment, instrument panel warning lights, etc.). Check and, if necessary, top up fluid levels.(1) ●●●●●●●●●●●●●●● Check engine control system operation (via diagnostic tool). ●●●●●●●●●●●●●●● Visually inspect conditions of: exterior bodywork, underbody protection, pipes and hoses (exhaust, fuel system, brakes), ●●●●●●● rubber elements (sleeves, bushes, etc.). Check position/wear of front windshield wiper blade. ●●●●●●●● Check operation of the windshield wiper/washer system and ●●●●●●●● adjust nozzles, if necessary. Check cleanliness of hood and luggage compartment locks, ●●●●●●● cleanliness and lubrication of linkage.

(1) Top up using the fluids indicated in the “Fluids And Lubricants” section of the “Technical Specifications” chapter only after checking that the system is intact. 189 10 30 50 60 70 80 90 Thousands of miles 20 40 100 110 120 130 140 150

Years 123456789101112131415 16 48 80 96 32 64 112 128 144 160 Thousands of kilometers 176 192 208 224 240

Visually inspect conditions and wear of front/rear disc brake ●●●●●●●●●●●●●●● pads and operation of pad wear indicators. Brake disc wear status check with diagnostic tool. ●●●●●●●●●●●●●●● Visually inspect the brake discs surface and edge. ●●●●●●●●●●●●●●● Brake pads/brake discs replacement. (2) Visually inspect the condition and tensioning of the ●●● ●●● ●●● ●●● accessory drive belt(s).

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE Change engine coolant ● Change engine oil and replace oil filter. ●●●●●●●●●●●●●●● Replace accessory drive belt/s. (3) Replace air cleaner cartridge (4) ●●●●●●● Replace the additional fuel filter (if equipped). ●●●●●●●●●●●●●●● Change the brake fluid. (5)

(2) The actual interval for changing the brake pads and the carbon ceramic brake discs depends on the vehicle usage conditions and is signaled by the warning light or message on the instrument panel. It is advisable to check brake disc weight and thickness after each intensive use. (3) Areas that are not dusty: recommended maximum mileage 36,000 miles (60,00 km). Regardless of the mileage, the belt must be replaced every 4 years. Dusty areas and/or demanding use of the vehicle (cold climates, town use, long periods of idling): advised maximum mileage 18,000 miles (30,000 km). Regardless of the mileage, the belt must be replaced every 2 years. (4) If the vehicle is used in dusty areas, this cleaner must be replaced every 10,000 miles (16,000 km). (5) The brake fluid replacement has to be done every two years, irrespective of the mileage. 190 10 30 50 60 70 80 90 Thousands of miles 20 40 100 110 120 130 140 150

Years 123456789101112131415 16 48 80 96 32 64 112 128 144 160 Thousands of kilometers 176 192 208 224 240

Replace the cabin air filter (6) o ● o ● o ● o ● o ● o ● o ● o Spark plug replacement.* ●●●●●

(6) If the vehicle is used in dusty areas, this cleaner must be replaced every 10,000 miles (16,000 km). * The spark plug change interval is mileage-based only. Yearlyintervals do not apply. (o) Recommended operations (●) Mandatory operations

Warning!

Youcan be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you have the knowledge and the right equipment. If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic. Failure to properly inspect and maintain your vehicle could result in a component malfunction and effect vehicle handling and performance. This could cause an accident.

191 ENGINE COMPARTMENT Checking Levels 2.9L V6 engine, SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

09026S0001EM 1 – Engine Oil Dipstick 4 – Windshield/Headlight Washer Fluid Reservoir Cap 2 – Engine Oil Filler 5 – Brake Fluid Reservoir Cap Access Cover 3 – Engine Coolant Reservoir Cap 6 – Intercooler Coolant Reservoir Cap

192 Engine Oil Note: Always reinstall the oil cap and tighten to proper torque whenever it is The engine oil level can be seen on the Warning! instrument cluster display every time the removed to add oil to engine. Never run engine is started, or on the Information the engine with cap removed this could and Entertainment system display by cause oil to leak from engine. If the engine oil is being topped up, wait for activating on the main menu (MENU Manual oil level checking procedure the engine to cool down before loosening the button) the following functions in filler cap, particularly for vehicles with Check that the oil level is between the sequence: “Apps”; “My Car” and “Oil aluminium cap (if equipped). WARNING: risk MIN and MAX marks on dipstick, clean it Level”. of burns! with a lint-free cloth and reinsert it. Check on the display using the 6 notches Extract the dipstick again and check that that the oil level is between the MIN and the level is between the MIN and MAX Caution! MAX level: 1 notch MIN level, 6 notches marks. MAX level. If the oil level is close to or below the MIN Top-Up And Oil Level Indication Update The oil level must never exceed the MAX mark, add oil gradually through the filler, On Display mark. (refer to “Top-Up And Oil Level Indication If a engine oil top-off is needed, in order to ensure the correct indication of the oil If the MAX mark is exceeded MAX (last Update On Display” in this section) notch on the right turns red) after the fill-up, considering that each notch shown on the level on the display, leave the vehicle on go to your authorized dealer as soon as display corresponds to approximately flat ground with the engine running for possible to have the oil in excess removed. 8.8floz(250ml). approximately 5 minutes (temperature higher than 176°F (80°C)) and shut the Do not add oil with specifications The oil level can also be checked different from those of the oil already in the manually. engine off then proceed with the process below: engine. Wait for five minutes, turn the ignition Used engine oil and oil filters contain Caution! substances which are harmful to the to the ON mode without starting the environment. To change the oil and filters, engine and wait for a few seconds. we advise you to contact your authorized Make sure not to add too much oil when Note: If you have added the specified dealer. topping off the engine. Engine oil in excess amount of oil and the indicator is not may damage the engine. Have the vehicle checked. Never exceed the MAX level when reading “Full”, please contact you Engine Coolant Fluid authorized dealer. topping off engine oil. It is advisable to If the level is too low, unscrew the cap of check the oil level in intermediate steps reservoir and add the fluid described in using the oil dipstick. the "Technical Specifications" chapter. The oil level is not refreshed immediately on the display after topping off. Consequently, wait for the oil level to be refreshed on the display and follow the procedure below. 193 Washer Fluid For Windshield/ Useful Advice For Extending The Life Headlights Of YourBattery Caution! The windshield and headlights washer To avoid draining your battery and make fluid reservoir has a telescopic filler. it last longer, observe the following If the level is too low, remove reservoir instructions: If the charge level remains under 50% for a long time, the battery may be damaged by cap and lift the filler. Then, add the fluid When you park the car, ensure that the described in the "Technical sulphation, reducing its capacity and doors and trunk are closed properly to efficiency at start the vehicle. The battery is Specifications" chapter. prevent any lights from remaining on also more prone to the risk of freezing (at Note: The headlight washing system will inside the passenger's compartment. temperatures as high as 14°F (-10°C). not work if the liquid level is low (as indicated by the symbol on the Do not keep accessories (e.g. radio, Note: After the battery is disconnected, instrument cluster display). The hazard warning lights, etc.) switched on the steering must be initialized. The windshield washer will keep working. On for a long time when the engine is not warning light on the instrument panel vehicles equipped with headlight running. switches on to indicate this. To carry out washers, if equipped, there is a reference Before performing any operation on this procedure, simply turn the steering notch on the dipstick: ONLYthe the electrical system, disconnect the wheel all the way from one end to the windshield/rear window washer operates negative battery cable. other, and then turn it back to the central with the level below this reference. position.

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE If you wish to install electrical Brake Fluid accessories after purchasing the car that Battery Check that the fluid is at the maximum require permanent electrical supply (e.g. The battery does not require the level. If the fluid level in the tank is low, alarm, etc.), or accessories which electrolyte to be topped up with distilled contact your authorized dealer to have influence the electrical supply water. A periodic check carried out at an the system checked. requirements, contact your authorized authorized dealer, however, is necessary Automatic Transmission Activation dealer, whose qualified staff will evaluate to check efficiency. System Oil the overall electrical consumption. Follow the battery manufacturer's The transmission control oil level should instructions for maintenance. only be checked at your authorized dealer.

194 Replacing The Battery BATTERY RECHARGING If necessary, replace the battery with Important Notes another original battery with the same specifications. Follow the battery manufacturer’s instructions for Warning! maintenance.

Warning! Never charge or recharge a frozen battery: it may explode because of the nitrogen trapped inside the ice crystals. Battery acid is a corrosive solution and can burn or even blind you. Do not allow At all times while charging or recharging 09036S0001EM battery acid to contact your eyes, skin, or the battery, make sure that any sparks or Battery Access Panel clothing. Do not lean over a battery when open flames are kept sufficiently far away attaching clamps. If acid splashes in eyes or from the battery. Remove the protective cover and on skin, flush the area immediately with connect the positive cable terminal of the large amounts of water. Refer to “Jump charger (usually red) to the positive Starting” in “In Case Of Emergency” for Note: terminal (+) of the battery. further information. Before using the charging device, Connect the negative terminal of the Battery gas is flammable and explosive. always make sure that it is appropriate charger (usually black) to nut next to the Keep flame or sparks away from the for the installed battery, with constant negative terminal (-) of the battery. battery. Do not use a booster battery or any voltage (below 14.8 V) and low other booster source with an output greater amperage (maximum 15 A). than 12 Volts. Do not allow cable clamps to touch each other. Recharge the battery in a well ventilated environment. Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories contain lead and lead Before using any devices to charge or compounds. Wash hands after handling. to maintain the charge of the battery, carefully follow the instructions Note: It will not be possible to open the provided with the device in order to trunk with a key or by pressing the button properly and safely connect it to the car in the passenger compartment when the battery. battery is disconnected. So, always Youcan recharge the battery without 09036S0002EM position the manual trunk opening strap Battery on the trunk lock before disconnecting disconnecting the wires of the vehicle's the battery. The procedure is described in electrical system. 1 — Protective Cover the "Storing The Vehicle" paragraph in To reach the battery, remove the 2 — Negative Post (Nut) this chapter. access panel inside the trunk. 195 The vehicle is equipped with an IBS DEALER SERVICE Choice Of Engine Oil Type (Intelligent Battery Sensor), which is able To ensure optimal performance and to measure the charge and discharge The following pages contain instructions on the required maintenance from the maximum protection in all operating voltage and calculate the charge level conditions, it is advisable to use solely and the general condition of the battery. technical personnel who designed the vehicle. certified engine oils (see description in The sensor is placed next to the negative "Fluid And Lubricants" in the "Technical terminal (-) of the battery. In addition to these specific maintenance Specifications" chapter). For a correct charge/discharge instructions specified for routine Additives For Engine Oil procedure, the charge voltage must go scheduled servicing, there are other through the IBS sensor. components which may require periodic It is strongly recommended not to use maintenance or replacement over the additives (other than leak detection dyes) 1. Turn the charger on and follow the vehicle’s life cycle. with the engine oil. instructions on the user's manual to Engine Oil The engine oil is a product designed completely recharge the battery. specially for the vehicle and its Engine Oil Level Check 2. When the battery is charged, turn the performance may be deteriorated charger off before disconnecting it from To ensure correct engine lubrication, the through the use of further additives. the battery. oil must always be kept at the prescribed level (see "Engine Compartment" in this Disposal Of Used Engine Oil And Filters 3. Disconnect the black cable terminal of chapter). For the disposal of the engine oil and SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE the battery charger and then the red Check the oil level at regular intervals, for filters, contact the appropriate body to cable terminal. example every 1864 miles (3000 km). determine local regulations. Note: Used engine oil disposed of 4. Refit the protective cover of the It must be checked once full operating temperature is reached. incorrectly may seriously harm the positive terminal of the battery and the environment. access cover to the battery The vehicle must also be parked on as compartment. level a surface as possible. Engine Oil Filter Note: If a "quick-type" battery charger is The engine oil level can be checked using Replacing The Engine Oil Filter used with the battery fitted on the the Information and Entertainment The engine oil filter must be replaced vehicle, before connecting it disconnect system. To access the function, activate each time the engine oil is changed. It is both cables of the battery itself. Do not the main menu (MENU button) and select advised to replace it with a genuine spare use a "quick-type" battery charger to the following options in sequence: part, specifically designed for this provide the starting voltage. “Applications”; “My Car”; “Oil level”. vehicle. Changing The Engine Oil See the "Maintenance Plan" for the correct servicing intervals.

196 Air Filter Lubricate the external lock barrels twice a year. Apply a small amount of Replacing The Air Cleaner Warning! high-quality lubricant directly into the See the "Maintenance Plan" for the lock barrel. correct servicing intervals. It is advised to Use only refrigerants and compressor If necessary, contact your authorized replace it with a genuine spare part, lubricants approved by the manufacturer for dealer as soon as possible. specifically designed for this vehicle. your air conditioning system. Some Windshield Wiper Air Conditioning System Maintenance unapproved refrigerants are flammable and can explode, injuring you. Other unapproved Periodically clean the windshield and rear To ensure the best possible performance, refrigerants or lubricants can cause the window and rubber profile of the the air conditioning system must be system to fail, requiring costly repairs. Refer windshield wiper blades, using a sponge checked and undergo maintenance at an to Warranty Information Book, located in or a soft cloth and a non-abrasive authorized dealer at the beginning of the your owner’s information kit, for further detergent. This eliminates the salt or summer. warranty information. impurities accumulated when driving. Lubricating Moving Parts Of The Prolonged operation of the windshield Caution! Bodywork window wipers with dry glass may cause the deterioration of the blades, in Ensure that the locks and bodywork addition to abrasion of the surface of the Do not use chemicals to clean the air junction points, including components glass. To eliminate the impurities on the conditioning system, since the internal such as the seat guides, door hinges (and components may be damaged. This kind of dry glass, always operate the windshield damage is not covered by warranty. rollers), trunk and hood are periodically washers. lubricated with lithium-based grease to In the event of very low outdoor ensure correct, silent operation and to Replace The Cabin Air Filter temperatures, below zero degrees, protect them from rust and wear. ensure that the movement of the rubber See the "Maintenance Plan" for the Thoroughly clean the components, part in contact with the glass is not correct servicing intervals. For cleaner eliminating every trace of dirt and dust. obstructed. Use a suitable deicing replacement, contact an authorized After lubricating, eliminate excess oil and product to release it if required. dealer. grease. Also pay particular attention to Avoid using the windshield wipers to the hood closing devices, to ensure remove frost or ice. correct operation. During operations on the hood, to be carried out with the Also avoid contact of the rubber profile engine cold, also remember to check, of the blades with petroleum derivatives clean and lubricate the locking, release such as engine oil, gas, etc. and safety devices.

197 To activate this function, move the lever Replacing The Windshield Wiper Blades upward for at least three seconds. Warning! Proceed as follows: 1. Raise the wiper arm, press tab of the Driving with worn windshield wiper blades is attachment spring and remove the blade a serious hazard, because visibility is from the arm. reduced in bad weather conditions.

Note: The life of the windshield wiper blades varies according to the usage frequency. In any case, it is advised to replace the blades approximately once a year. When the blades are worn, noise, 09046S0001EM marks on the glass or streaks of water Windshield Wiper Stalk may be noticed. In the presence of these conditions, clean the windshield wiper Function Deactivation blades or, if necessary, replace them. The function is deactivated if: 09046S0002EM Wiper Release Tab Raising The Windshield Wiper Blades More than two minutes passes before

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE ("Service Position" Function) cycling the ignition to the STOP position 2. Fit the new blade, inserting the tab in The "service position" function allows the after having raised the lever and putting the dedicated housing in the arm and driver to replace the windshield wiper the wipers into service position. checking that it is locked. blades more easily. It is also The ignition is cycled to the ON 3. Lower the wiper arm onto the recommended to activate this function position and the windshield wiper control windshield. when it is snowing and to make it easier is used. to remove any dirt deposits in the area Note: Do not operate the windshield where the blades are normally If, after using the function, the ignition is wiper with the blades lifted from the positioned, when washing. set back to ON with the blades in a windshield. position other than rest position (at the Windshield Washer Activation Of The Function base of the windshield), they will only The window washer nozzles are fixed. If To activate this function, disable the return to rest position following a there is no jet of fluid, first check that windshield wiper before setting the command given using the stalk (stalk there is fluid in the reservoir (see ignition device to STOP. upwards, into unstable position) or when paragraph “Engine Compartment” in this a speed of 3 mph (5 km/h) is exceeded. This function can only be activated within chapter). two minutes of cycling the ignition to STOP. 198 Open welding or loose connections may A hot exhaust system can start a fire if permit exhaust gas to enter the you park over materials that can burn. Such passenger compartment. materials might be grass or leaves coming Have the exhaust system checked every into contact with your exhaust system. Do time the vehicle is raised. Replace the not park or operate your vehicle in areas components where necessary (for these where your exhaust system can contact operations, contact an authorized anything that can burn. dealer). In normal operating conditions, the Cooling System catalytic converter does not require maintenance. To ensure that it operates 09046S0003EM Warning! Windshield Washers correctly, however, and prevent it from getting damaged, it is extremely 1 — Washer Nozzles important that the engine operates Youor others can be badly burned by hot perfectly. engine coolant (antifreeze) or steam from Then, check that the nozzle holes are not To minimize the risk of damaging the your radiator. If you see or hear steam clogged; use a needle to unblock them if catalytic converter, proceed as follows: coming from under the hood, do not open the necessary. hood until the radiator has had time to cool. Do not stop the engine or deactivate Never open a cooling system pressure cap Exhaust System the ignition with gear engaged and when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot. vehicle in motion. Adequate maintenance of the engine Keep hands, tools, clothing, and jewelry exhaust system represents the best Do not attempt to start the engine by away from the radiator cooling fan when the protection against leaks of carbon bump starting. hood is raised. The fan starts automatically and may start at any time, whether the monoxide into the passenger Do not persist in using the vehicle if engine is running or not. compartment. idling is very irregular or the operating If an unusual noise from the exhaust or When working near the radiator cooling conditions are very notably irregular. fan, disconnect the fan motor lead or turn the presence of smoke in the passenger the ignition to the OFF mode. The fan is compartment is identified, or if the temperature controlled and can start at any underbody or rear section of the vehicle Warning! time the ignition is in the ON mode. have been damaged, have the entire exhaust system and adjoining bodywork Coolant Check areas checked at your authorized dealer Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They to identify any components which are contain carbon monoxide (CO), which is Yourvehicle has two cooling systems and broken, damaged, worn or have moved colorless and odorless. Breathing it can they both need to be checked to ensure from their correct fitting position. make you unconscious and can eventually they are at proper fill levels. Refer to the poison you. “Engine Compartment” section for the locations. 199 Check the engine coolant and intercooler Note: coolant level every oil change or before Warning! For topping up, use a fluid with the long trips. same characteristics as those indicated If there are impurities in the engine in the "Fluids And Lubricants" table (see coolant, the system must be drained, Do not open hot engine cooling system. "Technical Specifications" chapter). flushed and refilled: contact an Never add engine coolant (antifreeze) when authorized dealer. the engine is overheated. Do not loosen or Do not use pure water, alcohol-based remove the cap to cool an overheated coolants, corrosions inhibitors or Check the front part of the condenser to engine. Heat causes pressure to build up in check for any build-up of insects, leaves additional anti-rust products because the cooling system. To prevent scalding or they may be incompatible with the or other debris. Should it be dirty, clean it injury, do not remove the pressure cap while by spraying delicately with water. the system is hot or under pressure. engine coolant and cause the clogging of the radiator. The use of propylene Check the hoses of the engine/ Do not use a pressure cap other than the intercooler cooling system to ensure that one specified for your vehicle. Personal glycol-based coolant is also not the rubber has not deteriorated and that injury or engine damage may result. recommended. there are no cracks, tears, cuts or obstructions in the expansion tank side Engine Cooling/Intercooler System Cap Note: Before removing the coolant and radiator side connectors. Should To prevent loss of engine coolant, make reservoir cap, wait for the system to cool there be any doubt regarding leaks from sure that the expansion tank cap is down. closed. If it is open, screw it completely SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE the system (e.g. if frequent top ups are required), have the seal checked at an Topping Up / Draining / Flushing The until you reach/hear the click. authorized dealer. Engine/Intercooler Coolant Periodically check the cap and clean it With the engine off and at normal If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty, from any foreign bodies that may have operating temperature, check that the have cleaning and flushing carried out at deposited on the external surface. cooling system radiator cap is closed an authorized dealer. properly. See the "Maintenance Plan" for the correct servicing intervals. Warning!

Never add coolant with the engine hot or overheated. Do not attempt to cool an overheated engine by loosening or removing the cap. The heat causes a considerable increase in pressure in the cooling system. To prevent damage to the engine, only use the engine cooling circuit caps provided. 200 Disposal Of Used Coolant Braking System Disposal of engine/intercooler coolant is In order to guarantee the efficiency of Warning! subject to legal requirements: contact the braking system, periodically check its the appropriate body to determine local components; for this operation, contact regulations. an authorized dealer. Use only manufacturer's recommended brake fluid. Refer to “Fluids And Lubricants” Note: See the "Maintenance Plan" for the in “Technical Specifications” for further To prevent the fluid from being correct servicing intervals. information. Using the wrong type of brake ingested by children or animals, do not fluid can severely damage your brake Note: Driving with your foot resting on system and/or impair its performance. The keep it in open containers or pour it on the brake pedal may compromise its proper type of brake fluid for your vehicle is the ground. If ingested, contact a doctor efficiency, increasing the risk of also identified on the original factory immediately. Eliminate any traces of accidents. When driving, never keep your installed hydraulic master cylinder fluid from the ground immediately. foot on the brake pedal and don’t put reservoir. unnecessary strain on it to prevent the When the vehicle stops after a short To avoid contamination from foreign brakes from overheating: excess pad trip, steam may be seen coming out matter or moisture, use only new brake fluid wear may cause damage to the braking or fluid that has been in a tightly closed from front of the hood. This is a normal system. container. Keep the master cylinder phenomenon which is due to the When an insufficient oil level is reservoir cap secured at all times. Brake presence of rain, snow or a lot of detected, contact an authorized dealer fluid in a open container absorbs moisture moisture on the surface of the radiator. from the air resulting in a lower boiling point. to have the system checked. This may cause it to boil unexpectedly With engine and system cold, do not Always keep the cap of the brake during hard or prolonged braking, resulting top up with coolant beyond the fluid reservoir (in the engine in sudden brake failure. This could result in a collision. maximum level indicated on the compartment) completely closed. reservoir in the engine compartment. Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts, causing the brake fluid to catch fire. Brake fluid can also damage painted and vinyl surfaces, care should be taken to avoid its contact with these surfaces. Do not allow petroleum based fluid to contaminate the brake fluid. Brake seal components could be damaged, causing partial or complete brake failure. This could result in a collision.

201 Automatic Transmission RAISING THE VEHICLE Use only a transmission oil with the same Caution! If the vehicle requires lifting, visit an characteristics as those indicated in the authorized dealer which is equipped with "Fluids and Lubricants" table (see shop jacks or jack arms. "Technical Specifications" chapter). If a transmission fluid leak occurs, visit an The vehicle lifting points are marked on authorized dealer immediately. Severe the side skirts with the symbols. Special Additives transmission damage may occur. An Do not use any type of additive with the authorized dealer has the proper tools to automatic transmission oil. The adjust the fluid level accurately. automatic transmission oil is a product designed specially for this vehicle and its Replacing The Battery performance may be compromised If necessary, replace the battery with through the use of further additives. another battery with the same specifications. It is advised to contact an Caution! authorized dealer for replacement. Follow the battery manufacturer's instructions for maintenance. Do not use chemical flushes in your 09056S0001EM transmission as the chemicals can damage Note: It will not be possible to open the Vehicle Lift Point Locations SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE your transmission components. Such trunk with a key or by pressing the button damage is not covered by the New Vehicle in the passenger compartment when the Limited Warranty. battery is disconnected. So, always position the manual trunk opening strap Frequency Of Oil Changes on the trunk lock before disconnecting the battery. The procedure is described in In normal vehicle operating conditions, it the "Storing The Vehicle" section in this is not necessary to change the chapter. transmission oil.

202 TIRES Note: Temporary spare tires are designed for temporary emergency use only. Temporary P (Passenger) — Metric tire sizing is Tire Safety Information high pressure compact spare tires have the based on U.S. design standards. P-Metric letter “T” or “S” molded into the sidewall Tire safety information will cover aspects tires have the letter “P” molded into the preceding the size designation. Example: of the following information: Tire sidewall preceding the size designation. T145/80D18 103M. Markings, Tire Identification Numbers, Example: P215/65R15 95H. Tire Terminology and Definitions, Tire High flotation tire sizing is based on European — Metric tire sizing is Pressures, and Tire Loading. U.S. design standards and it begins with based on European design standards. the tire diameter molded into the Tire Markings Tires designed to this standard have the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT. tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with the section width. The letter "P" is absent from this tire size designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H. LT(Light Truck) — Metric tire sizing is based on U.S. design standards. The size designation for LT-Metric tires is the same as for P-Metric tires except for the letters “LT” that are molded into the 0601085395US sidewall preceding the size designation. Tire Markings Example: LT235/85R16. 1 — U.S. DOT 4 — Maximum Safety Standards Load Code (TIN) 5 — Maximum 2 — Size Pressure Designation 6 — Treadwear, 3 — Service Traction and Description Temperature Grades

203 Tire Sizing Chart

EXAMPLE: Example Size Designation: P215/65R15XL 95H, 215/65R15 96H, LT235/85R16C, T145/80D18 103M, 31x10.5 R15 LT P = Passenger car tire size based on U.S. design standards, or "....blank...." = Passenger car tire based on European design standards, or LT = Light truck tire based on U.S. design standards, or TorS= Temporary spare tire or 31 = Overall diameter in inches (in) 215, 235, 145 = Section width in millimeters (mm) 65, 85, 80 = Aspect ratio in percent (%) Ratio of section height to section width of tire, or 10.5 = Section width in inches (in) SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE R = Construction code "R" means radial construction, or "D" means diagonal or bias construction 15, 16, 18 = Rim diameter in inches (in) Service Description: 95 = Load Index A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry H = Speed Symbol A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to its load index under certain operating conditions The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions, and posted speed limits)

204 EXAMPLE: Load Identification: Absence of the following load identification symbols on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) tire: XL = Extra load (or reinforced) tire, or LL = Light load tire or C, D, E, F, G = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure Maximum Load – Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry Maximum Pressure – Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire

Tire Identification Number (TIN) The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire; however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires with white sidewalls will have the full TIN, including the date code, located on the white sidewall side of the tire. Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on the outboard side, then you will find it on the inboard side of the tire.

EXAMPLE: DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301 DOT = Department of Transportation This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tire safety standards and is approved for highway use MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits) L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits) ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits) 03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits) 03 means the 3rd week

205 EXAMPLE: 01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits) 01 means the year 2001 Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year in which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991

Tire Terminology And Definitions

Term Definition B-Pillar The vehicle B-Pillar is the structural member of the body located behind the front door. Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for Cold Tire Inflation Pressure a minimum of three hours. Inflation pressure is measured in units of PSI (pounds per square inch) or kPa (kilopascals). SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible cold tire inflation Maximum Inflation Pressure pressure for this tire. The maximum inflation pressure is molded into the sidewall. Vehicle manufacturer's recommended cold tire inflation pressure as shown on the tire Recommended Cold Tire Inflation Pressure placard. A label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the vehicle’s loading capacity, Tire Placard the original equipment tire sizes and the recommended cold tire inflation pressures.

206 Tire Loading And Tire Pressure Tire And Loading Information Placard Loading Note: The proper cold tire inflation The vehicle maximum load on the tire pressure is listed on the driver’s side must not exceed the load carrying B-Pillar or the rear edge of the driver's capacity of the tire on your vehicle. You side door. will not exceed the tire's load carrying Check the inflation pressure of each tire, capacity if you adhere to the loading including the spare tire (if equipped), at conditions, tire size, and cold tire least monthly and inflate to the inflation pressures specified on the Tire recommended pressure for your vehicle. and Loading Information placard in “Vehicle Loading” in the “Starting And GUID-054900418-high.tif Operating” section of this manual. Tire And Loading Information Placard Note: Under a maximum loaded vehicle This placard tells you important condition, gross axle weight ratings information about the: (GAWRs) for the front and rear axles 1. Number of people that can be carried must not be exceeded. For further in the vehicle. information on GAWRs, vehicle loading, and trailer towing, refer to “Vehicle 2. Total weight your vehicle can carry. Loading” in the “Starting And Operating” section of this manual. 0806115150US 3. Tire size designed for your vehicle. Example Tire Placard Location (Door) To determine the maximum loading 4. Cold tire inflation pressures for the conditions of your vehicle, locate the front, rear, and spare tires. statement “The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs” on the Tire and Loading Information placard. The combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage and trailer tongue weight (if applicable) should never exceed the weight referenced here.

0806115151US Example Tire Placard Location (B-Pillar)

207 Steps For Determining Correct Load available cargo and luggage load available cargo and luggage load capacity Limit— capacity is 650 lbs. (1400-750 is 295 kg (635-340 (5x68) = 295 kg) as shown in step 4. (1) Locate the statement “The (5x150) = 650 lbs.) combined weight of occupants and (5) Determine the combined weight Note: cargo should never exceed XXX kg or of luggage and cargo being loaded on If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, XXX lbs.” on your vehicle's placard. the vehicle. That weight may not load from your trailer will be transferred safely exceed the available cargo and to your vehicle. The following table (2) Determine the combined weight shows examples on how to calculate of the driver and passengers that will luggage load capacity calculated in total load, cargo/luggage, and towing be riding in your vehicle. Step 4. capacities of your vehicle with varying (3) Subtract the combined weight of (6) If your vehicle will be towing a seating configurations and number and trailer, load from your trailer will be size of occupants. This table is for the driver and passengers from XXX illustration purposes only and may not kg or XXX lbs. transferred to your vehicle. Consult be accurate for the seating and load (4) The resulting figure equals the this manual to determine how this carry capacity of your vehicle. reduces the available cargo and available amount of cargo and For the following example, the luggage load capacity. For example, luggage load capacity of your vehicle. combined weight of occupants and

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE if “XXX” amount equals 1400 lbs. and Metric Example For Load Limit cargo should never exceed 865 lbs there will be five 150 lb passengers For example, if “XXX” amount equals (392 kg). in your vehicle, the amount of 635 kg and there will be five 68 kg passengers in your vehicle, the amount of

208 GUID-054900419-high.tif

Warning!

Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the recommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never overload them.

209 Tires — General Information Always drive with each tire inflated to the At least once a month: Tire Pressure recommended cold tire inflation pressure. Check and adjust tire pressure with a good quality pocket-type pressure gauge. Proper tire inflation pressure is essential Both under-inflation and over-inflation Do not make a visual judgement when to the safe and satisfactory operation of affect the stability of the vehicle and can determining proper inflation. Tires may your vehicle. Four primary areas are produce a feeling of sluggish response or look properly inflated even when they are affected by improper tire pressure: over responsiveness in the steering. under-inflated. Safety and Vehicle Stability Note: Inspect tires for signs of tire wear or Economy visible damage. Unequal tire pressures from side to Tread Wear side may cause erratic and unpredictable steering response. Caution! Ride Comfort Safety Unequal tire pressure from side to side may cause the vehicle to drift left or After inspecting or adjusting the tire right. pressure, always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent moisture and dirt from Warning! Fuel Economy entering the valve stem, which could Underinflated tires will increase tire damage the valve stem.

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE rolling resistance resulting in higher fuel Improperly inflated tires are dangerous consumption. and can cause collisions. Inflation pressures specified on the Tread Wear Underinflation increases tire flexing and placard are always “cold tire inflation can result in overheating and tire failure. Improper cold tire inflation pressures can pressure”. Cold tire inflation pressure is cause abnormal wear patterns and defined as the tire pressure after the Overinflation reduces a tire's ability to reduced tread life, resulting in the need vehicle has not been driven for at least cushion shock. Objects on the road and for earlier tire replacement. three hours, or driven less than 1 mile chuckholes can cause damage that result in tire failure. Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability (1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of Proper tire inflation contributes to a three hours. The cold tire inflation Overinflated or underinflated tires can comfortable ride. Over-inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum affect vehicle handling and can fail inflation pressure molded into the tire suddenly, resulting in loss of vehicle control. produces a jarring and uncomfortable ride. sidewall. Unequal tire pressures can cause steering Check tire pressures more often if problems. Youcould lose control of your Tire Inflation Pressures subject to a wide range of outdoor vehicle. The proper cold tire inflation pressure is temperatures, as tire pressures vary with Unequal tire pressures from one side of listed on the driver's side B-Pillar or rear temperature changes. the vehicle to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the right or left. edge of the driver's side door. 210 Tire pressures change by approximately vehicle loading may be required for When driving at speeds 100 mph 1 psi (7 kPa) per 12°F (7°C) of air high-speed vehicle operation. Refer to (160 km/h) and above, increased tire temperature change. Keep this in mind your authorized tire dealer or original pressures and reduced vehicle loading when checking tire pressure inside a equipment vehicle dealer for are required for high-speed vehicle garage, especially in the Winter. recommended safe operating speeds, operation. Example: If garage temperature = 68°F loading and cold tire inflation pressures. For driving speeds above 100 mph (20°C) and the outside temperature = (160 km/h) recommended cold tire 32°F (0°C) then the cold tire inflation inflation pressures are listed below pressure should be increased by 3 psi Warning! under "High Speed Tire Inflation (21 kPa), which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for Pressure". Vehicle loading condition must every 12°F (7°C) for this outside not exceed 688 lbs. (312 kg) (driver + temperature condition. High speed driving with your vehicle under three passengers + 88 lbs. (40kg) maximum load is dangerous. The added Tire pressure may increase from 2 to strain on your tires could cause them to fail. luggage). 6 psi (13 to 40 kPa) during operation. DO Youcould have a serious collision. Do not NOT reduce this normal pressure build up drive a vehicle loaded to the maximum or your tire pressure will be too low. capacity at continuous speeds above Warning! 75 mph (120 km/h). Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation High speed driving with your vehicle under Recommended Cold Tire Inflation maximum load is dangerous. The added The manufacturer advocates driving at Pressures strain on your tires could cause them to fail. safe speeds and within posted speed For vehicle speeds below 100 mph Youcould have a serious collision. limits. Where speed limits or conditions (160 km/h), recommended cold tire are such that the vehicle can be driven at inflation pressures are listed on the Tire high speeds, maintaining correct tire And Loading Information Placard located inflation pressure is very important. on driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge Increased tire pressure and reduced of the driver's side door.

211 Recommended Cold High Speed Tire Tire Inflation Inflation Pressure Tires Wheel Pressure

Front Rear Front Rear 35 psi/ 42 psi/ 245/35Z R19 93Y XL 19x8.5J – – 240kpa 290kpa Original Equipment 32 psi/ 42 psi/ 285/30Z R19 98Y XL 19x10J – – 220kpa 290kpa 35 psi/ 42 psi/ 245/35R19 93V XL M+S 19x8.5J – – 240kpa 290kpa Snow Tires 285/30R19 98V XL M+S or 32 psi/ 42 psi/ 19x10J – – 265/35R19 98V XL M+S 220kpa 290kpa

Radial Ply Tires The damage is only on the tread referred to as the Run Flat mode. A Run section of your tire (sidewall damage is Flat mode occurs when the tire inflation

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE not repairable). pressure is of/or below 14 psi (96 kPa). Once a Run Flat tire reaches the run flat Warning! The puncture is no greater than a ¼ of mode it has limited driving capabilities an inch (6 mm). and needs to be replaced immediately. A Combining radial ply tires with other types Consult an authorized tire dealer for tire Run Flat tire is not repairable. of tires on your vehicle will cause your repairs and additional information. It is not recommended driving a vehicle vehicle to handle poorly. The instability could Damaged Run Flat tires, or Run Flat tires loaded at full capacity or to tow a trailer cause a collision. Always use radial ply tires that have experienced a loss of pressure in sets of four. Never combine them with while a tire is in the run flat mode. other types of tires. should be replaced immediately with See the tire pressure monitoring section another Run Flat tire of identical size and for more information. service description (Load Index and Tire Repair Speed Symbol). Tire Spinning If your tire becomes damaged, it may be repaired if it meets the following criteria: Run Flat Tires — If Equipped When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, do not spin your vehicle's The tire has not been driven on when Run Flat tires allow you the capability to wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h) or for flat. drive 50 miles (80 km) at 50 mph longer than 30 seconds continuously (80 km/h) after a rapid loss of inflation without stopping. pressure. This rapid loss of inflation is 212 becomes a 1/16 of an inch (1.6 mm). Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place When the tread is worn to the tread wear with as little exposure to light as Warning! indicators, the tire should be replaced. possible. Protect tires from contact with Refer to “Replacement Tires” in this oil, grease, and gasoline. Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces section for further information. generated by excessive wheel speeds may Replacement Tires Life Of Tire cause tire damage or failure. A tire could The tires on your new vehicle provide a explode and injure someone. Do not spin The service life of a tire is dependent balance of many characteristics. They your vehicle's wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) for more than 30 seconds upon varying factors including, but not should be inspected regularly for wear continuously when you are stuck, and do not limited to: and correct cold tire inflation pressures. The manufacturer strongly recommends let anyone near a spinning wheel, no matter Driving style. what the speed. that you use tires equivalent to the Tire pressure - Improper cold tire originals in size, quality and performance inflation pressures can cause uneven when replacement is needed. Refer to the Tread Wear Indicators wear patterns to develop across the tire paragraph on “Tread Wear Indicators” in Tread wear indicators are in the original tread. These abnormal wear patterns will this section. Refer to the Tire and Loading equipment tires to help you in reduce tread life, resulting in the need for Information placard or the Vehicle determining when your tires should be earlier tire replacement. Certification Label for the size designation of your tire. The Load Index replaced. Distance driven. and Speed Symbol for your tire will be Performance tires, tires with a speed found on the original equipment tire rating of V or higher, and Summer tires sidewall. typically have a reduced tread life. See the Tire Sizing Chart example found Rotation of these tires per the vehicle in the “Tire Safety Information” section of scheduled maintenance is highly this manual for more information relating recommended. to the Load Index and Speed Symbol of a tire. It is recommended to replace the two

0806104865NA Warning! front tires or two rear tires as a pair. Tire Tread Replacing just one tire can seriously affect your vehicle’s handling. If you ever 1 — Worn Tire Tires and the spare tire should be replaced replace a wheel, make sure that the 2 — New Tire after six years, regardless of the remaining tread. Failure to follow this warning can wheel’s specifications match those of the result in sudden tire failure. Youcould lose original wheels. These indicators are molded into the control and have a collision resulting in It is recommended you contact an bottom of the tread grooves. They will serious injury or death. authorized tire dealer or original appear as bands when the tread depth 213 equipment dealer with any questions you Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped may have on tire specifications or Caution! capability. Failure to use equivalent The compact spare is for temporary replacement tires may adversely affect emergency use only. Youcan identify if your vehicle is equipped with a compact the safety, handling, and ride of your Replacing original tires with tires of a vehicle. different size may result in false spare by looking at the spare tire speedometer and odometer readings. description on the Tire and Loading Information Placard located on the Warning! driver’s side door opening or on the Spare Tires — If Equipped sidewall of the tire. Compact spare tire Note: For vehicles equipped with Tire descriptions begin with the letter “T” or Do not use a tire, wheel size, load rating, Service Kit instead of a spare tire, please “S” preceding the size designation. or speed rating other than that specified for refer to “Tire Service Kit” in “In Case Of Example: T145/80D18 103M. your vehicle. Some combinations of Emergency” for further information. T, S = Temporary Spare Tire unapproved tires and wheels may change suspension dimensions and performance Since this tire has limited tread life, the characteristics, resulting in changes to Caution! original equipment tire should be steering, handling, and braking of your repaired (or replaced) and reinstalled on vehicle. This can cause unpredictable your vehicle at the first opportunity. Because of the reduced ground clearance, handling and stress to steering and Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE do not take your vehicle through an suspension components. Youcould lose mount a conventional tire on the compact control and have a collision resulting in automatic car wash with a compact or serious injury or death. Use only the tire and limited use temporary spare installed. spare wheel, since the wheel is designed wheel sizes with load ratings approved for Damage to the vehicle may result. specifically for the compact spare tire. your vehicle. Do not install more than one compact spare tire and wheel on the vehicle at any Never use a tire with a smaller load index Spare Tire Matching Original given time. or capacity, other than what was originally Equipped Tire And Wheel — If equipped on your vehicle. Using a tire with a smaller load index could result in tire Equipped overloading and failure. Youcould lose control and have a collision. Yourvehicle may be equipped with a spare tire and wheel equivalent in look Failure to equip your vehicle with tires and function to the original equipment having adequate speed capability can result tire and wheel found on the front or rear in sudden tire failure and loss of vehicle axle of your vehicle. This spare tire may control. be used in the tire rotation for your vehicle. If your vehicle has this option, refer to an authorized tire dealer for the recommended tire rotation pattern. 214 equipped tire on the front or rear axle of Yourwheels are susceptible to your vehicle, but it is not. Installation of deterioration caused by salt, sodium Warning! this limited use spare tire affects vehicle chloride, magnesium chloride, calcium handling. Since it is not the same as your chloride, etc., and other road chemicals Compact and collapsible spares are for original equipment tire, replace (or used to melt ice or control dust on dirt temporary emergency use only. With these repair) the original equipment tire and roads. Use a soft cloth or sponge and mild spares, do not drive more than 50 mph reinstall on the vehicle at the first soap to wipe away promptly. Do not use (80 km/h). Temporary use spares have opportunity. harsh chemicals or a stiff brush. They can limited tread life. When the tread is worn to damage the wheel’s protective coating the tread wear indicators, the temporary use that helps keep them from corroding and spare tire needs to be replaced. Be sure to tarnishing. follow the warnings, which apply to your Warning! spare. Failure to do so could result in spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control. Limited use spares are for emergency use Caution! only. Installation of this limited use spare Full Size Spare — If Equipped tire affects vehicle handling. With this tire, do not drive more than the speed listed on Avoid products or automatic car washes The full size spare is for temporary the limited use spare wheel. Keep inflated to that use acidic solutions or strong alkaline additives or harsh brushes. Many emergency use only. This tire may look the cold tire inflation pressures listed on your Tire and Loading Information Placard aftermarket wheel cleaners and automatic like the originally equipped tire on the car washes may damage the wheel's front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is located on the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the driver’s side door. Replace protective finish. Such damage is not not. This spare tire may have limited (or repair) the original equipment tire at the covered by the New Vehicle Limited tread life. When the tread is worn to the first opportunity and reinstall it on your Warranty. Only car wash soap, Mopar Wheel tread wear indicators, the temporary use vehicle. Failure to do so could result in loss Cleaner or equivalent is recommended. full size spare tire needs to be replaced. of vehicle control. Since it is not the same as your original When cleaning extremely dirty wheels equipment tire, replace (or repair) the Wheel And Wheel Trim Care including excessive brake dust, care must original equipment tire and reinstall on be taken in the selection of tire and wheel the vehicle at the first opportunity. All wheels and wheel trim, especially cleaning chemicals and equipment to aluminum and chrome plated wheels, Limited Use Spare — If Equipped prevent damage to the wheels. Mopar should be cleaned regularly using mild Wheel Treatment or Mopar Chrome The limited use spare tire is for (neutral Ph) soap and water to maintain Cleaner or their equivalent is temporary emergency use only. This tire their luster and to prevent corrosion. recommended or select a non-abrasive, is identified by a label located on the Wash wheels with the same soap solution non-acidic cleaner for aluminum or limited use spare wheel. This label recommended for the body of the vehicle chrome wheels. contains the driving limitations for this and remember to always wash when the spare. This tire may look like the original surfaces are not hot to the touch. 215 Tire Types Caution! All Season Tires — If Equipped Warning! All Season tires provide traction for all Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a seasons (Spring, Summer, Fall, and Do not use Summer tires in snow/ice bristle brush, metal polishes or oven cleaner. Winter). Traction levels may vary conditions. Youcould lose vehicle control, These products may damage the wheel's between different all season tires. All resulting in severe injury or death. Driving protective finish. Such damage is not season tires can be identified by the M+S, too fast for conditions also creates the covered by the New Vehicle Limited possibility of loss of vehicle control. Warranty. Only car wash soap, Mopar Wheel M&S, M/S or MS designation on the tire Cleaner or equivalent is recommended. sidewall. Use all season tires only in sets of four; failure to do so may adversely Snow Tires affect the safety and handling of your Note: If you intend parking or storing vehicle. Some areas of the country require the your vehicle for an extended period after use of snow tires during the Winter. Snow cleaning the wheels with wheel cleaner, Summer Or Three Season tires can be identified by a drive your vehicle and apply the brakes to Tires — If Equipped “mountain/snowflake” symbol on the tire remove the water droplets from the sidewall. brake components. This activity will Summer tires provide traction in both If you need snow tires, remove the red rust on the brake rotors wet and dry conditions, and are not select tires equivalent SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE and prevent vehicle vibration when intended to be driven in snow or on ice. If in size and type to the braking. your vehicle is equipped with Summer original equipment Dark Vapor Chrome, Black Satin tires, be aware these tires are not tires. Use snow tires Chrome, or Low Gloss Clear Coat Wheels designed for Winter or cold driving only in sets of four; conditions. Install Winter tires on your failure to do so may vehicle when ambient temperatures are adversely affect the safety and handling Caution! less than 45°F (7°C) or if roads are of your vehicle. covered with ice or snow. For more Snow tires generally have lower speed information, contact an authorized ratings than what was originally equipped If your vehicle is equipped with these dealer. specialty wheels, DO NOT USE wheel with your vehicle and should not be cleaners, abrasives, or polishing compounds. Summer tires do not contain the all operated at sustained speeds over They will permanently damage this finish season designation or mountain/ 75 mph (120 km/h). For speeds above and such damage is not covered by the New snowflake symbol on the tire sidewall. 75 mph (120 km/h) refer to original Vehicle Limited Warranty. HAND WASH Use Summer tires only in sets of four; equipment or an authorized tire dealer ONLYUSING MILD SOAP AND WATERWITH failure to do so may adversely affect the for recommended safe operating speeds, A SOFT CLOTH. Used on a regular basis; this safety and handling of your vehicle. is all that is required to maintain this finish. loading and cold tire inflation pressures. While studded tires improve performance on ice, skid and traction 216 capability on wet or dry surfaces may be Tire Rotation Recommendations poorer than that of non-studded tires. Caution! Tire Rotations - Do Not Rotate Tires Some states prohibit studded tires; therefore, local laws should be checked Due to different size tires and wheels on front and rear axles tire rotation is not before using these tire types. To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires, possible for: Tire Chains (Traction Devices) observe the following precautions: Because of restricted traction device 2.9 L V6 Engine Equipped with 19” Use of traction devices require sufficient clearance between tires and other tires and wheels tire-to-body clearance. Follow these suspension components, it is important that recommendations to guard against only traction devices in good condition are damage. used. Broken devices can cause serious Caution! damage. Stop the vehicle immediately if Note: noise occurs that could indicate device Traction device must be of proper breakage. Remove the damaged parts of Damage to the vehicle may occur if 19” front the device before further use. size for the tire, as recommended by the and rear tires are rotated traction device manufacturer Install device as tightly as possible and then retighten after driving about ½ mile Use on Rear Tires Only In the case of irregular wear of the tires (0.8 km). identify the cause and correct it as soon Due to limited clearance, the Do not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h). as possible, by contacting an authorized following traction devices are dealer. recommended: Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and large bumps, especially with a loaded For a 265/35R19 98V tire, use of a vehicle. zero-clearance snow traction device Do not drive for a prolonged period on dry recommended. pavement. It is not possible to install traction Observe the traction device devices on 285/30R19 tires. manufacturer’s instructions on the method of installation, operating speed, and conditions for use. Always use the suggested operating speed of the device manufacturer’s if it is less than 30 mph (48 km/h). Do not use traction devices on a compact spare tire.

217 DEPARTMENT OF practices, and differences in road laboratory test wheel. Sustained high TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM characteristics and climate. temperature can cause the material TIRE QUALITY GRADES Traction Grades of the tire to degenerate and reduce The following tire grading categories tire life, and excessive temperature The Traction grades, from highest to were established by the National can lead to sudden tire failure. The lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. These Highway Traffic Safety grade C corresponds to a level of grades represent the tire's ability to Administration. The specific grade performance, which all passenger stop on wet pavement, as measured rating assigned by the tire's vehicle tires must meet under the under controlled conditions on manufacturer in each category is Federal Motor Vehicle Safety specified government test surfaces shown on the sidewall of the tires on Standard No. 109. Grades B and A of asphalt and concrete. A tire your vehicle. represent higher levels of marked C may have poor traction performance on the laboratory test All passenger vehicle tires must performance. conform to Federal safety wheel, than the minimum required by requirements in addition to these law. grades. Warning! Warning! SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE Treadwear The Treadwear grade is a The traction grade assigned to this The temperature grade for this tire comparative rating, based on the tire is based on straight-ahead is established for a tire that is wear rate of the tire when tested braking traction tests, and does not properly inflated and not under controlled conditions on a include acceleration, cornering, overloaded. Excessive speed, specified government test course. hydroplaning, or peak traction under-inflation, or excessive For example, a tire graded 150 would characteristics. loading, either separately or in wear one and one-half times as well combination, can cause heat on the government course as a tire Temperature Grades buildup and possible tire failure. graded 100. The relative The temperature grades are A (the performance of tires depends upon highest), B, and C, representing the the actual conditions of their use, tire's resistance to the generation of however, and may depart heat and its ability to dissipate heat, significantly from the norm due to when tested under controlled variations in driving habits, service conditions on a specified indoor 218 STORING THE VEHICLE compact plastic sheets, as they do not allow humidity to evaporate from the If the vehicle is left inactive for longer than a month, the following precautions surface of the vehicle. should be observed: Inflate tires to +7.25 psi (+0.5 bar) Park the vehicle in an area that is above the standard prescribed pressure covered and dry, and well-ventilated if and check it periodically. possible. Slightly open the windows. Do not drain the engine cooling Check that the electric park brake is system. not activated. Any time the vehicle is left inactive for Carry out the procedure: “manual trunk two weeks or more, operate the air 09086S0001EM opening device” procedure described in conditioning system with engine idling Trunk Compartment this paragraph. for at least five minutes, setting external Disconnect the negative battery air and with fan set to maximum speed. terminal and check the battery charge. This operation will ensure appropriate Repeat this check once every three lubrication for the system, thus months during storage. minimizing the possibility of damage to the compressor when the system is If the battery is not disconnected from operated again. the electrical system, check its state of charge every thirty days. Note: After cycling the ignition to STOP and having closed the driver side door, Clean and protect the painted parts wait at least one minute before using protective wax. disconnecting the electrical supply from Clean and protect the shiny metal the battery. When reconnecting the 0318134892US parts using special compounds available electrical supply to the battery, make Trunk Manual Release Cord sure that the ignition is in the STOP commercially. 2. Make sure the free end of the cord position and the driver side door is Sprinkle talcum powder on the remains outside the trunk when closing closed. windshield wiper rubber blades, and lift the trunk lid. them off the glass. Manual Trunk Opening Device Cover the vehicle with a fabric or Proceed as follows if the battery needs perforated plastic sheet, paying to be disconnected: particular care not to damage the painted 1. From the trunk interior covering, surface by dragging any dust that may rotate the plug counterclockwise of the have accumulated on it. Do not use lock and extract the cord connected to it. 219 BODYWORK Corrosion Warranty Protection Against Atmospheric Yourvehicle is covered by Corrosion Agents Warranty against perforation due to rust of any original element of the structure The vehicle is equipped with the best or bodywork. For the general terms of available technological solutions to this warranty, refer to the Warranty protect the bodywork against corrosion. Booklet. These include: Preserving The Bodywork Painting products and systems which give the vehicle resistance to corrosion Paint 0318135355US and abrasion. Touch up abrasions and scratches Manual Release Cord Shown With Trunk Use of galvanized (or pre-treated) immediately to prevent the formation of Closed steel sheets, with high resistance to rust. 3. The trunk can now be opened corrosion. Maintenance of paintwork consists of manually by pulling the cord. washing the car: the frequency depends Spraying of plastic parts, with a on the conditions and environment where 4. After releasing the trunk, rewind the protective function in the more exposed the car is used. For example, it is strap around the plug, put it back into its points: underdoor, inner wing, edges, etc. advisable to wash the vehicle more often

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE housing and turn it clockwise. Use of “open” boxed sections to in areas with high levels of atmospheric prevent condensation and pockets of pollution or salted roads. Caution! moisture which could favor the formation Some parts of the vehicle may be of rust inside. covered with a matte paint which, in order to be maintained intact, requires Use of special films to protect against The Manual Trunk Opening Device allows the special care. trunk to be opened without a key, even if the abrasion in exposed areas (e.g. rear wing, vehicle is locked. Do not use this Device doors, etc.). unless the vehicle is parked in a secure area.

220 To correctly wash the vehicle, follow Exterior plastic parts must be cleaned in Note: these instructions: the same way as the rest of the vehicle. Never use aromatic substances (e.g. If high pressure jets or cleaners are If washing the car in a service that moves gasoline) or ketones (e.g. acetone) for used to wash the vehicle, keep a distance the car, for cars with automatic cleaning the plastic lenses of the of at least 15 inches (40 cm) from the transmissions, PARK (P) must be cut out. headlights. bodywork to avoid damage or alteration. Youhave to shut off the engine in the When cleaning with a pressure Build up of water could cause damage to following conditions: car stopped, transmission in NEUTRAL (N), push the washer, keep the pressure washer at the vehicle in the long term. starter button for at least three seconds. least eight inches (20 cm) away from the To make it easier to remove any dirt Note: Avoid parking under trees; the headlights. deposits in the area where the blades are resin dropped by trees makes the Engine Compartment normally located it is recommended to paintwork go opaque and increases the At the end of every winter, wash the position the windshield wipers vertically possibility of corrosion. engine compartment thoroughly, taking (service position), for more information, Windows care not to aim the jet of water directly at refer to “Dealer Service” in this chapter. Use specific detergents and clean cloths the electronic control units or at the Wash the bodywork using a low to prevent scratching or altering the windshield wiper motors. Have this pressure jet of water if possible. transparency. operation performed at a specialized Wipe a sponge with a slightly soapy workshop. Note: The washing should take place solution over the bodywork, frequently Caution! rinsing the sponge. with the engine cold and the ignition device in the STOP position. After the Rinse well with water and dry with a Wipe the rear window inside gently with a washing operation, make sure that the leather chamois. cloth following the direction of the filaments various protections (e.g. rubber caps and Dry the less visible parts (e.g. door to avoid damaging the heating device. guards) have not been removed or frames, hood, headlight frames, etc.) with damaged. special care, as water may stagnate more Front Headlights easily in these areas. Do not wash the car Use a soft cloth soaked in water and after it has been left in the sun or with the detergent for washing cars. hood hot: this may alter the shine of the paintwork.

221 INTERIORS Plastic And Coated Parts Carbon Fiber Parts Periodically check the cleanliness of the Clean interior plastic parts with a damp To eliminate small scratches and marks interior, beneath the mats, which could cloth (if possible made from microfiber), on the carbon, contact your authorized cause oxidation of the sheet metal. and a solution of water and neutral, dealer. An improperly performed non-abrasive detergent. operation may irreparably damage the Seats And Fabric Parts To clean oily or persistent stains, use carbon. Remove dust with a soft brush or a specific products free from solvents and vacuum cleaner. It is advised to use a designed to maintain the original moist brush on velvet upholstery. Rub the appearance and color of the components. seats with a sponge moistened with a Remove any dust using a microfiber solution of water and neutral detergent. cloth, if necessary moistened with water. Leather Seats The use of paper tissues is not recommended as these may leave Remove the dry dirt with a chamois or residues. slightly damp cloth, without exerting too much pressure. Genuine Leather Parts Remove any liquid or grease stains using Use only water and mild soap to clean an absorbent dry cloth, without rubbing. these parts. Never use alcohol or

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE Then clean with a soft cloth or buckskin alcohol-based products. cloth dampened with water and mild Before using a specific product for soap. If the stain persists, use specific cleaning interiors, make sure that it does products and observe the instructions not contain alcohol and/or alcohol based carefully. substances. Note: Never use alcohol. Make sure that the cleaning products used contain no alcohol or alcohol derivatives, even in small quantities.

222 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

For the enthusiasts, the technician, or IDENTIFICATION DATA ...... 224 those who just want to know every detail ENGINE ...... 225 of their vehicle, useful information on POWER SUPPLY ...... 226 understanding how your vehicle works is TRANSMISSION ...... 227 contained in this chapter and illustrated BRAKES ...... 228 with data, tables and graphics. SUSPENSION ...... 229 STEERING SYSTEM...... 230 DIMENSIONS...... 231 WEIGHTS ...... 232 FUEL REQUIREMENTS ...... 233 FLUID CAPACITIES ...... 235 FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS ...... 236 PERFORMANCE ...... 238

223 IDENTIFICATION DATA This number is also printed on the chassis Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) at the front left shock absorber and can Plate Vehicle Identification Number be seen by opening the engine The plates are located on the left side A The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) compartment hood. is stamped on a plate on the front left pillar and contain the data about: corner of the dashboard cover, which can Chassis number (VIN). be seen from outside the vehicle, through Vehicle type (USA and Canada only). the windshield. Color code. Place of manufacturing of the vehicle (USA and Mexico only). Vehicle manufacturing date. Maximum permitted weights. Permitted tire inflation pressure (USA

10016S0002EM and Canada only). Vehicle Identification Number TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

10016S0001EM Vehicle Identification Number

224 ENGINE

2.9L V6 Engine Cycle Four Number and position of cylinders 6/V Piston bore and stroke (mm) 86.5 × 82 Total displacement (cm³) 2891 Compression ratio 9.3:1 Maximum power (SAE) (kW) 375 Maximum power (SAE) (HP) 505 Corresponding engine speed (rpm) 6500 Maximum torque (SAE) (Nm) 600 Maximum torque (SAE) (ft. lb) 443 Corresponding engine speed (rpm) 2500 87 Octane Minimum, 91 Recommended, ethanol percentage is Fuel 0–15%.

225 POWER SUPPLY

Power supply Phased sequential electronic injection with knock control and variable 2.9L V6 Engine intake valve actuation TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

226 TRANSMISSION

Model Transmission Traction 2.9L V6 Engine Eight forward gears plus reverse Rear

227 BRAKES

Model Front brakes Rear brakes Parking brake Disc Disc 2.9L V6 Engine or or Electric Carbon Ceramic disc Carbon Ceramic disc

Caution!

Water, ice and salt spread on the roads may deposit on the brake discs, reducing braking efficiency the first time the brakes are applied. To obtain the maximum efficiency of the braking system, a bedding-in period of about 300 miles (500 km) is needed: during this period it is better to avoid sharp, repeated and prolonged braking. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

228 SUSPENSION

Model Front Rear Independent wheel double-wishbone 2.9L V6 Engine Independent wheel with multilink system suspension

229 STEERING SYSTEM

Model Curb-to-curb turning circle Type Rack and pinion with electric power 2.9L V6 Engine 37.10 ft (11.30 m) steering TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

230 DIMENSIONS

Dimensions Dimensions are expressed in inches and refer to the vehicle equipped with its standard-supplied tires. Height is measured with vehicle unladen.

10106S0002EM

A C D E H I B F G Front Rear Overall Overall Overall Width Overall Width Wheelbase Front Track Rear Track Overhang Overhang Length Height (Incl. Mirrors) (Excl. Mirrors) 31.30 Inches 111.02 Inches 40.31 Inches 182.64 Inches 56.14 Inches 61.22 Inches 63.27 Inches 79.69 Inches 73.74 Inches 231 WEIGHTS

Weights (lbs) 2.9 V6 Engine Unladen weight (with all fluids, fuel tank filled to 90% and 3810 without optional equipment) Payload including the driver (*) 905 Maximum permitted loads (**) 155 – front axle 2260 – rear axle 2646 – total 4774 (*) If special equipment is fitted (trailer towing equipment, etc.) the empty weight will increase and consequently the payload will decrease in relation to the maximum permitted loads.

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS (**) Loads not to be exceeded. The user is responsible for arranging goods in the luggage compartment and/or on the load platform within the maximum permitted loads.

232 FUEL REQUIREMENTS Reformulated Gasoline Problems that result from using gasoline containing more than 15% ethanol (E-15) Many areas of the country require the This engine is designed or gasoline containing methanol are not use of cleaner burning gasoline referred to meet all emission the responsibility of the manufacturer to as “Reformulated Gasoline”. regulations, and and may void or not be covered under Reformulated gasoline contains provide satisfactory New Vehicle Limited Warranty. fuel economy and oxygenates and are specifically blended performance when to reduce vehicle emissions and improve CNG And LP Fuel System Modifications air quality. using high-quality Modifications that allow the engine to unleaded “Regular” The use of reformulated gasoline is run on compressed natural gas (CNG) or gasoline having a posted octane number recommended. Properly blended liquid propane (LP) may result in damage of 87 as specified by the (R+M)/ reformulated gasoline will provide to the engine, emissions, and fuel system 2 method. For optimal performance the improved performance and durability of components. Problems that result from use of 91 or higher octane “Premium” engine and fuel system components. running CNG or LP are not the gasoline is recommended in these Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends responsibility of the manufacturer and engines. may void or not be covered under the While operating on gasoline with the Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded New Vehicle Limited Warranty. required octane number, hearing a light gasoline with oxygenates such as knocking sound from the engine is not a ethanol. cause for concern. However, if the engine is heard making a heavy knocking sound, Caution! see your dealer immediately. Use of gasoline with a lower than recommended octane number can cause engine failure DO NOT use E-85, gasoline containing and may void or not be covered by the methanol, or gasoline containing more than New Vehicle Limited Warranty. 15% ethanol (E-15). Use of these blends Poor quality gasoline can cause problems may result in starting and drivability problems, damage critical fuel system such as hard starting, stalling, and components, cause emissions to exceed the hesitations. If you experience these applicable standard, and/or cause the symptoms, try another brand of gasoline “Malfunction Indicator Light” to illuminate. before considering service for the Please observe pump labels as they should vehicle. clearly communicate if a fuel contains greater than 15% ethanol (E-15).

233 MMT In Gasoline Designated TOP TIER Fuel System Cautions Detergent Gasoline Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese contains a higher level Tricarbonyl (MMT) is a manganese- Caution! of detergents to containing metallic additive that is further aide in blended into some gasoline to increase minimizing engine and octane. Gasoline blended with MMT Follow these guidelines to maintain your fuel system deposits. provides no performance advantage vehicle’s performance: When available, the usage of TOP TIER beyond gasoline of the same octane The use of leaded gasoline is prohibited Detergent gasoline is recommended. by Federal law. Using leaded gasoline can number without MMT. Gasoline blended Visit www.toptiergas.com for a list of impair engine performance and damage the with MMT reduces spark plug life and TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline Retailers. emissions control system. reduces emissions system performance in some vehicles. The manufacturer Indiscriminate use of fuel system An out-of-tune engine or certain fuel or recommends that gasoline without MMT cleaning agents should be avoided. Many ignition malfunctions can cause the be used in your vehicle. The MMT content of these materials intended for gum and catalytic converter to overheat. If you varnish removal may contain active notice a pungent burning odor or some light of gasoline may not be indicated on the smoke, your engine may be out of tune or gasoline pump; therefore, you should ask solvents or similar ingredients. These can harm fuel system gasket and diaphragm malfunctioning and may require immediate your gasoline retailer whether the service. Contact an authorized dealer for TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS gasoline contains MMT. MMT is materials. service assistance. prohibited in Federal and California reformulated gasoline. The use of fuel additives, which are now being sold as octane enhancers, is not Materials Added To Fuel recommended. Most of these products contain high concentrations of methanol. Besides using unleaded gasoline with the Fuel system damage or vehicle proper octane rating, gasolines that performance problems resulting from the contain detergents, corrosion and use of such fuels or additives is not the stability additives are recommended. responsibility of the manufacturer and may Using gasolines that have these additives void or not be covered under the New will help improve fuel economy, reduce Vehicle Limited Warranty. emissions, and maintain vehicle performance. Note: Intentional tampering with the emissions control system can result in civil penalties being assessed against you.

234 FLUID CAPACITIES 2.9L V6 Engine

U.S. Metric Fuel tank 15.3 Gallons 58 Liters Fuel tank reserve 2.3 Gallons 9 Liters Engine cooling system 2.95 Gallons 11.2 Liters Intercooler cooling system 1.4 Gallons 5.5 Liters Engine sump and filter 7.2 Quarts 7 Liters Hydraulic brake circuit 0.9 Quarts 0.9 Liters Windshield washer fluid reservoir 1.1 Gallons 4.2 Liters Automatic transmission – – Differentials and reduction gears RDU 195 – – Main body: 0.8 Quarts Main body: 0.8 Liters Differentials and reduction gears RDU 230-TV Left TV: 0.5 Quarts Left TV: 0.5 Liters Right TV: 0.6 Quarts Right TV: 0.6 Liters RDU 230-LSD differential – – RDU 210-eLSD differential (if equipped) – – RDU 210/215-LSD differential – –

235 FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS Yourvehicle is equipped with an engine oil that has been thoroughly developed and tested in order to meet the requirements of the Scheduled Servicing Plan. Constant use of the prescribed lubricants guarantees the fuel consumption and emission specifications. Lubricant quality is crucial for engine operation and duration. 2.9L V6 — Engine Lubrication

Features Specification Replacement interval 0W-40 FPT 9.55535-Z2 Pennzoil Ultra According to the Maintenance Plan MS-12991 API SN

If lubricants conforming to the specific request are not available, products that meet the indicated specifications can be used to top up; in this case optimal performance of the engine is not guaranteed. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

236 Chassis Lubrication

Use Features Specification Applications ZF 8HP 50 - Synthetic ATF – Automatic transmission Lubricants and greases SAE 75W-85 API GL-5 synthetic Differential and reduction units FPW9.55550-DA8 lubricant RDU 230-TV / 2.9 V6 engine Brake fluid DOT 4 MS.90039 Hydraulic brakes CUNA NC 956-16 Use rate 50% Not mixable with Engine coolant MS.90032 ASTMD3306 different formulation products. (*) To be used diluted or undiluted in Windshield washer fluid CUNA NC 956-11 MS.90043 windshield washer/wiper systems R1234yf or R134yf (depending on HVAC –– market) (*) For particularly harsh climate conditions, a mixture of 60% product and 40% distilled water is recommended.

237 PERFORMANCE Top performance after the initial period of vehicle usage.

Acceleration from 0–60 mph/0-100 km/h Model Maximum speed mph sec. 2.9L V6 Engine 191 3.8 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

238 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE

SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR YOUR VEHICLE . . . .240 IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE ...... 240 WARRANTY INFORMATION .....241 REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS . . .242 PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS . . . .242

239 SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE Any communication to the SERVICE FOR YOUR VEHICLE manufacturer's customer center should The manufacturer and its authorized include the following information: Prepare For The Appointment dealer are vitally interested in your satisfaction. We want you to be happy Owner's name and address If you are having warranty work done, be with our products and services. sure to bring the right papers with you, as Owner's telephone number (home and well as your warranty folder. All work to Warranty service must be done by an office) authorized dealer. We strongly be performed may not be covered by the Authorized dealer name warranty. Discuss additional charges with recommend that you take the vehicle to the service manager. Keep a maintenance an authorized dealer. They know your Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) vehicle the best, and are most concerned log of your vehicle's service history, as Vehicle delivery date and mileage this can often provide a clue to the that you get prompt and high quality current problem. service. The manufacturer's authorized Alfa Romeo Customer Center dealer have the facilities, factory-trained Prepare A List technicians, special tools, and the latest P.O.Box 21–8004 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE Make a written list of your vehicle's information to ensure the vehicle is fixed Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004 problems or the specific work you want correctly and in a timely manner. Phone: 1-844-Alfa-USA done. If you've had an accident or work This is why you should always talk to an (1-844-253-2872) authorized dealer service manager first. done that is not on your maintenance log, Alfa Romeo Customer Center (Canada) let the service advisor know. Most matters can be resolved with this process. P.O.Box 1621 Be Reasonable With Requests If for some reason you are still not Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6 If you list a number of items and you must satisfied, talk to the general manager or Phone: 1-800-465-2001 (English) have your vehicle by the end of the day, owner of the authorized dealer. They Phone: 1-800-387-9983 (French) discuss the situation with the service want to know if you need assistance. advisor and list the items in order of priority. At many authorized dealers, you If an authorized dealer is unable to may obtain a rental vehicle at a minimal resolve the concern, you may contact the daily charge. If you need a rental, it is manufacturer's customer center. advisable to make these arrangements when you call for an appointment.

240 Customer Assistance For The Hearing call (800) 465-2001 English / (800) WARRANTY INFORMATION Or Speech Impaired (TDD/TTY) 387-9983 French). See the Warranty Information Booklet, To assist customers who have hearing The manufacturer will not stand behind for the terms and provisions of FCA US difficulties, the manufacturer has installed any service contract that is not the LLC and FCA Canada Inc. warranties special TDD (Telecommunication Devices manufacturer's service contract. It is not applicable to this vehicle and market. for the Deaf) equipment at its customer responsible for any service contract center. Any hearing or speech impaired other than the manufacturer's service customer, who has access to a TDD or a contract. If you purchased a service conventional teletypewriter (TTY) in the contract that is not a manufacturer's United States, can communicate with the service contract, and you require service manufacturer by dialing 1-800-380-2479. after the manufacturer's New Vehicle Limited Warranty expires, please refer to Canadian residents with hearing the contract documents, and contact the difficulties that require assistance can use person listed in those documents. the special needs relay service offered by Bell Canada. For TTY teletypewriter users, We appreciate that you have made a dial 711 and for Voice callers, dial major investment when you purchased 1-800-855-0511 to connect with a Bell the vehicle. An authorized dealer has also Relay Service operator. made a major investment in facilities, tools, and training to assure that you are Service Contract absolutely delighted with the ownership Youmay have purchased a service experience. Youwill be pleased with their contract for a vehicle to help protect you sincere efforts to resolve any warranty from the high cost of unexpected repairs issues or related concerns. after the manufacturer's New Vehicle Limited Warranty expires. The Warning! manufacturer stands behind only the manufacturer's service contracts. If you purchased a manufacturer's service Engine exhaust (internal combustion engines contract, you will receive Plan Provisions only), some of its constituents, and certain and an Owner Identification Card in the vehicle components contain, or emit, mail within three weeks of the vehicle chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects, or other delivery date. If you have any questions reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids about the service contract, call the contained in vehicles and certain products of manufacturer's Service Contract component wear contain, or emit, chemicals National Customer Hotline at known to the State of California to cause 1-800-521-9922 (Canadian residents, cancer and birth defects, or other reproductive harm. 241 REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS In Canada PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS In The 50 United States And If you believe that your vehicle has a To order the following manuals, you may Washington, D.C. safety defect, you should contact the use either the website or the phone Customer Service Department numbers listed below. Visa, Mastercard, If you believe that your vehicle has a American Express, and Discover orders defect that could cause a crash or immediately. Canadian customers are accepted. cause injury or death, you should who wish to report a safety defect to Service Manuals immediately inform the National the Canadian government should These comprehensive Service Manuals Highway Traffic Safety contact Transport Canada, Motor provide the information that students Administration (NHTSA) in addition Vehicle Defect Investigations and and professional technicians need in to notifying FCA US LLC. Recalls at 1-800-333-0510 or go to diagnosing/troubleshooting, problem http://www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety/ . solving, maintaining, servicing, and If NHTSA receives similar repairing FCA US LLC vehicles. A complaints, it may open an complete working knowledge of the CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE investigation, and if it finds that a vehicle, system, and/or components is safety defect exists in a group of written in straightforward language with illustrations, diagrams, and charts. vehicles, it may order a recall and Diagnostic Procedure Manuals remedy campaign. However, NHTSA Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled cannot become involved in individual with diagrams, charts and detailed problems between you, your illustrations. These practical manuals authorized dealer or FCA US LLC. make it easy for students and technicians To contact NHTSA, you may call the to find and fix problems on computer-controlled vehicle systems and Vehicle Safety Hotline toll free at features. They show exactly how to find 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: and correct problems the first time, using 1-800-424-9153); or go to step-by-step troubleshooting and http://www.safercar.gov ; or write to: drivability procedures, proven diagnostic Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New tests and a complete list of all tools and equipment. Jersey Avenue, SE., West Building, Washington, D.C. 20590. Youcan also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov . 242 Owner's Manuals These Owner's Manuals have been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with specific FCA US LLC vehicles. Included are starting, operating, emergency and maintenance procedures as well as specifications, capabilities and safety tips. Call toll free at: 1-800-890-4038 (U.S.) 1-800-387-1143 (Canada) Or Visit us on the Worldwide Web at: www.techauthority.com

243 This page is intentionally left blank

244 INDEX Air Pressure Certification Label ...... 160 Accessories Purchased By The Tires...... 210 Changing A Flat Tire ...... 202 Owner...... 3 Alarm (Security Alarm) ...... 19 Chart, Tire Sizing ...... 204 Active Aerodynamics ...... 54 Alfa Active Suspension (AAS) .....140 Check Engine Light (Malfunction Active Safety Systems ...... 86 Alfa DNA System...... 137 Indicator Light) ...... 83 Active TorqueVectoring (ATV) Anti-Lock Braking (ABS) System ....86 Checking Levels ...... 192 System ...... 88 Automatic Dimming Mirror ...... 31 Checking YourVehicle For Safety . . .121 Adaptive Cruise Control...... 145 Automatic Headlights ...... 32 Checks, Safety ...... 121 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Automatic Temperature Control Child Restraint ...... 112 (Cruise Control) ...... 145 (ATC)...... 41 Child Restraints Additives, Fuel ...... 234 Automatic Transmission ...... 131 Booster Seats ...... 114 AFS Function ...... 33 Auxiliary Driving Systems ...... 89 Child Seat Installation ...... 120 AirBag...... 104 How To Stow An unused ALR Seat Air Bag Operation ...... 106 B-Pillar Location ...... 207 Belt ...... 118 Air Bag Warning Light ...... 103 Battery ...... 194 Infants And Child Restraints . . . .114 Driver Knee Air Bag ...... 106 Battery Recharging ...... 195 LATCH Positions ...... 116 Enhanced Accident Response . . .109 Belts, Seat ...... 122 Lower Anchors And Tethers For Children ...... 116 Enhanced Accident Response . . .186 Blind Spot Monitoring ...... 89 Older Children And Child Event Data Recorder (EDR) .....186 Bodywork (Cleaning And Restraints ...... 114 Front Air Bag ...... 104 Maintenance) ...... 220 Seating Positions ...... 115 If Deployment Occurs ...... 109 Brakes ...... 228 Using The TopTether Anchorage . .120 Knee Impact Bolsters ...... 106 Brake Fluid Level ...... 194 Clean Air Gasoline ...... 233 Maintaining YourAir Bag Brightness, Interior Lights ...... 37 Cleaning System ...... 112 Bulbs, Light ...... 124 Wheels ...... 215 Maintenance ...... 112 Climate Control ...... 39,42 Redundant Air Bag Warning Camera, Rear ...... 157 Close The Hood...... 48 Light ...... 104 Carbon Fiber Active Aero Front Side Air Bags ...... 106 Spoiler ...... 54 Compact Spare Tire ...... 214 Transporting Pets ...... 121 Carbon Monoxide Warning ...... 122 Contract, Service...... 241 Air Bag Light...... 103,122 Cargo Tie-Downs ...... 49 Courtesy Mirror Light (Bulb Emergency, In Case Of...... 177 Exterior Lights ...... 32,124 Replacement) ...... 169 Hazard Warning Flasher ...... 166 External Lights ...... 32 Cruise Control Jacking ...... 202

INDEX (Speed Control) ...... 143,145 Jump Starting ...... 180,181 Flashers Cupholder ...... 54 Overheating ...... 183 Hazard Warning ...... 166 Cupholders ...... 54 Tow Hooks ...... 185 Turn Signal ...... 34,124 Customer Assistance ...... 240 Towing...... 184 Fluid Leaks ...... 124 Emission Control System Fluids And Lubricants ...... 236 Daytime Running Lights...... 32 Maintenance...... 83 Forward Collision Warning ...... 91 Daytime Running Lights (DRL) ...... 32 Engine ...... 225 Front Light Cluster With Main Beam Defroster, Windshield ...... 123 Engine Coolant Level ...... 193 Xenon Gas Discharge Headlights Dimensions ...... 231 (Bulb Replacement)...... 169 Exhaust Gas Caution ...... 122 Direction Indicators (Changing A Front Mobile Spoiler (Alfa Active Fuel Requirements ...... 233 Bulb)...... 169 Aero) ...... 54 Jump Starting ...... 180,181 Disabled VehicleTowing...... 184 Front Seat Electric Heating ...... 27 Overheating ...... 183 Door Locks Front Seats (Power Seats) ...... 26 Child-Protection Door Lock — Starting ...... 182 Front Wipers Rear Doors ...... 24 Temperature Gauge ...... 57 Wiper Operation ...... 38 Doors...... 20 Engine Compartment ...... 192 Fuel Driving Modes ...... 137 Engine Compartment (Washing) . . . .221 Additives ...... 234 Dynamic Steering Torque (DST) Engine Oil Clean Air ...... 233 System ...... 88 Level Check ...... 193 Ethanol ...... 233 Engine Overheating ...... 183 Gauge ...... 57 Electric Park Brake...... 129 Enhanced Accident Response Materials Added ...... 234 Electric Remote Mirrors ...... 31 Feature ...... 109,186 Methanol ...... 233 Electric Steering Wheel Heating.....30 Environmental Protection Systems. . .54 Fuse Boxes ...... 173 Electronic Speed Control (Cruise Ethanol ...... 233 Fuses (Replacement) ...... 171 Control) ...... 143,145 Exhaust Gas Caution...... 122 Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Exhaust System ...... 122 Garage Door Opener (HomeLink) ....51 System ...... 86 Exterior Lighting ...... 32,33 Gasoline, Clean Air ...... 233 Emergency Refuelling ...... 183 Gasoline, Reformulated ...... 233 Reconfigurable Instrument Types Of Bulbs ...... 167 Gauges Cluster Display ...... 58 Light Switch...... 32 Speedometer ...... 57 Instrument Panel Features Lights...... 124 Instrument Panel Features ...... 56 Tachometer ...... 57 AirBag...... 103 Interior Ambient Lighting ...... 36 General Information ...... 152 AirBag...... 122 Interior Lights...... 35 Glove Compartment ...... 50 Automatic Headlights ...... 32 Interiors (Cleaning)...... 222 Glove Compartment Light ...... 36 Courtesy/Reading ...... 35,36 Internal Equipment ...... 50 Glove Compartment Light (Bulb Daytime Running ...... 32 Replacement) ...... 170 Exterior ...... 124 Jack Operation ...... 202 GVWR...... 160 Hazard Warning Flasher ...... 166 Jump Starting ...... 180,181 Headlight Switch ...... 32,33 Hazard Warning Flasher...... 166 Headlights ...... 32,33 Head Restraints ...... 28 Key Fob Remote Keyless Entry ...... 14 High Beam ...... 33 Head Rests ...... 28 Keyless Entry System/Immobilizer Instrument Cluster ...... 32,33 Headlights System ...... 18 Intensity Control ...... 37 Switch ...... 32,33 Interior ...... 36 Headlights (Cleaning) ...... 221 Lane Change ...... 34 Map Reading ...... 35 Heated Mirrors ...... 31 Lane Change And Turn Signals ...... 34 Park...... 32 High Beam Headlights...... 33 Lane Departure Warning System . . .155 Reading ...... 35 Automatic...... 33 High Beam Headlights LaneSense...... 155 Turn Signal ...... 34,124 Hill Start Assist (HSA) System...... 88 Lap/Shoulder Belts ...... 99 Loading Vehicle ...... 160 Hood ...... 47 Latches...... 124 Tires...... 207 Hood Release ...... 47 Leaks, Fluid ...... 124 Luggage Compartment Light (Bulb Life Of Tires ...... 213 Replacement) ...... 170 Identification Data ...... 224 Lifting The Vehicle ...... 202 Luggage/Cargo Capacity ...... 48 Ignition...... 16 Light Bulbs...... 124 Installing Electrical/Electronic Malfunction Indicator Light (Check Devices...... 3 Engine) ...... 83 Instrument Cluster Display Instrument Cluster Display ...... 58 Manual, Service...... 242 Prolonged Vehicle Inactivity ...... 219 Safety Information, Tire...... 203 Methanol...... 233 Safety Tips ...... 121 Mirrors Radial Ply Tires ...... 212 Safety, Exhaust Gas ...... 122 INDEX Automatic Dimming ...... 31 Radio Frequency Saving Fuel ...... 162 Electric Powered ...... 31 General Information ...... 16,18,24 SBL Function ...... 34 Electric Remote ...... 31 Radio Transmitters And Mobile Scheduled Servicing ...... 188 Phones ...... 4 Heated ...... 31 Scheduled Servicing Program Rear Camera ...... 157 (2.9 V6 Gasoline Engine OBD System ...... 83 Rear Cross Path ...... 89 Versions) ...... 189 Occupant Restraints...... 97 Rear Seats...... 28 Seat Belt Overheating, Engine ...... 183 Rear View Mirrors ...... 31 Energy Management Feature . . . .102 Owner's Manual (Operator Manual) . .242 Reformulated Gasoline ...... 233 Lap/Shoulder Belts ...... 99 Refueling Procedure ...... 159 Pregnant Women ...... 102 Paintwork (Cleaning And Refueling The Vehicle ...... 159 Seat Belt Pretensioner ...... 102 Maintenance) ...... 220 Refuelling ...... 235 Seat Belt Reminder ...... 98 Panic Brake Assist (PBA) System ....87 Reminder, Seat Belt ...... 98 Seat Belt Reminder ...... 98 Park Sensors System ...... 152 Remote Starting System ...... 126 Seat Belts ...... 98,122 Passive Entry (System) ...... 21 Replacement Tires ...... 213 Child Restraints ...... 112 Performance (Top Speed)...... 238 Replacing A Bulb ...... 166 Front Seat ...... 98 Pets...... 121 Replacing An External Bulb ...... 169 Front Seat ...... 99 Placard, Tire And Loading Replacing An Internal Bulb ...... 169 Inspection ...... 122 Information ...... 207 Reporting Safety Defects ...... 242 Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting . . .100 Power Restraint, Head...... 28 Pregnant Women ...... 102 Mirrors ...... 31 Restraints, Child ...... 112 Pretensioners ...... 102 Seats ...... 26 Rims And Tires ...... 203 Rear Seat ...... 99 Power Supply ...... 226 Untwisting Procedure ...... 100 Power Windows ...... 46 Safety Checks Inside Vehicle...... 122 Seats ...... 25 Pregnant Women And Seat Belts . . .102 Safety Checks Outside Vehicle.....124 Adjustment ...... 25 Pretensioners Safety Defects, Reporting ...... 242 Head Restraints ...... 28 Seat Belts ...... 102 Height Adjustment ...... 26 Steering System ...... 230 Inflation Pressure ...... 210 Power...... 26 Steering Wheel ...... 30 Jacking ...... 202 Tilting ...... 26 Stop/Start System...... 140 Life Of Tires ...... 213 Service Assistance...... 240 Storage ...... 53 Load Capacity ...... 207 Service Contract ...... 241 Suggestions For Driving...... 162 Load Capacity ...... 207 Service Manuals ...... 242 Sun Visors ...... 50 Quality Grading ...... 218 Servicing Procedures ...... 196 Supplemental Restraint System - Air Radial ...... 212 Shoulder Belts ...... 99 Bag...... 104 Replacement ...... 213 Signals, Turn...... 34,124 Suspension ...... 229 Safety ...... 203,210 Snow Chains...... 217 Symbols ...... 6 Sizes ...... 204 Snow Tires...... 216 Snow Tires ...... 216 Telescoping Steering Column ...... 30 Spare Tire ...... 214 Spare Tire ...... 214 Tie Down Hooks, Cargo ...... 49 Spare Tires ...... 214,215 Spare Tires ...... 214,215 Tilt Steering Column...... 30 Speed Control Spinning ...... 212 Tire And Loading Information Accel/Decel ...... 144 Tread Wear Indicators ...... 213 Placard ...... 207 Cancel ...... 145 To Open Hood...... 47 Tire Markings ...... 203 Resume ...... 145 Tow Hooks, Emergency ...... 185 Tire Safety Information ...... 203 Set...... 144 Towing Tire Service Kit ...... 177 Speed Control Disabled Vehicle ...... 184 Tires ...... 124,210,214,218 (Cruise Control) ...... 143,145 TowingTrailers ...... 161 Aging (Life Of Tires) ...... 213 Speed Limiter...... 142 TPMS (Tire Pressure Monitoring Starting ...... 182 Air Pressure ...... 210 System)...... 95 Starting And Operating ...... 182 Changing ...... 202 Traction Control System (TCS)...... 87 Starting Procedures ...... 182 Compact Spare ...... 214 Transmission ...... 227 Starting The Engine ...... 126 Flat Changing ...... 177 Transporting Animals ...... 163 Steering General Information ...... 210,214 Transporting Passengers ...... 163 Tilt Column ...... 30 General Information ...... 214 Transporting Pets ...... 121 Wheel, Heated ...... 30 High Speed ...... 211 Tread Wear Indicators ...... 213 Wheel, Tilt ...... 30 Turn Signals ...... 34 Uniform Tire Quality Grades ...... 218 Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt. . . .100 Use Of The Owner’s Manual ...... 5 INDEX

Vehicle Changes/Alterations ...... 3 Vehicle Identification Number .....224 Vehicle Loading ...... 160,207 Vent Operation ...... 39

Warning Flasher, Hazard ...... 166 Warranty Information ...... 241 Washer Fluid For Windshield/Headlights...... 194 Washers, Windshield...... 37 Weights ...... 232 Wheel And Wheel Tire Care ...... 215 Wheel And Wheel Tire Trim ...... 215 Wheels And Tires ...... 203 Windows (Cleaning) ...... 221 Windshield Defroster ...... 123 Windshield Wiper ...... 37 Replacing Blades ...... 198 Windshield Wiper/Washer Smart Washing Function ...... 38 Windshield Wipers ...... 37 Wrecker Towing...... 184

VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA This manual illustrates and describes the operation of With respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada, the name features and equipment that are either standard or op- INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING The antenna cable should be as short as practical and FCA US LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name tional on this vehicle. This manual may also include a EQUIPMENT routed away from the vehicle wiring when possible. Use FCA Canada Inc. used in substitution therefore. description of features and equipment that are no longer Special design considerations are incorporated into this only fully shielded coaxial cable. available or were not ordered on this vehicle. Please vehicle’s electronic system to provide immunity to radio DRIVING AND ALCOHOL Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio to disregard any features and equipment described in this frequency signals. Mobile two-way radios and telephone Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of ensure a low Standing Wave Ratio (SWR). accidents. manual that are not on this vehicle. equipment must be installed properly by trained person- nel. The following must be observed during installation. Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood FCA US LLC reserves the right to make changes in design normal may require special precautions. alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are and specifications, and/or make additions to or improve- The positive power connection should be made directly drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non- ments to its products without imposing any obligation to the battery and fused as close to the battery as possible. All installations should be checked for possible interfer- drinking driver, call a cab, a friend, or use public trans- upon itself to install them on products previously manu- The negative power connection should be made to body ence between the communications equipment and the portation. factured. sheet metal adjacent to the negative battery connection. vehicle’s electronic systems. This connection should not be fused. WARNING! Antennas for two-way radios should be mounted on the Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. roof or the rear area of the vehicle. Care should be used Your perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are in mounting antennas with magnet bases. Magnets may slower, and your judgment is impaired when you affect the accuracy or operation of the compass on have been drinking. Never drink and then drive. vehicles so equipped. Copyright © 2017 FCA US LLC 18GA-126-AC ALFA ROMEO GIULIA Third Edition ©2017 FCA US LLC. All Rights Reserved. Owner’s Manual ALFA ROMEO is a registered trademark of FCA Group Marketing S.p.A., used with permission. Printed in U.S.A. 2018 QUADRIFOGLIO OWNER’S MANUAL